Masterpact ™

MTZ
Catalogue 2018
Power circuit breakers
and switch-disconnectors

schneider-electric.com
schneider-electriv.com/masterpactmtz I

Life is On | Schneider Electric I

 Power distribution
is changing.

Smart cities. Smart grids. Smart buildings. Smart industries. The world is becoming more
connected, electric, digitized, decarbonized, and decentralized. Power distribution is facing
new regulations, becoming more seamless and connected, but also becoming more dispersed
and vulnerable.

For this Internet of Things era, you need a future-ready circuit breaker that increases efficiency,
can adapt to your evolving needs, and helps to ensure safety, reliability, security, and sustainability.

At Schneider Electric, we’ve been setting the standard in air circuit breakers since 1987. We did it
first with the Masterpact M, and then with the groundbreaking Masterpact NT/NW circuit breakers.
™

Each Masterpact innovation has incorporated the most advanced features and has established a
legendary reputation for power uptime and protection against cable overloads, short circuits, and
insulation faults — even in the toughest environments.

Now, Schneider Electric is redefining electrical distribution with the new EcoStruxure Power ™

portfolio of digitized products that enhance connectivity, real-time operation, and smart analytics.

And the latest Masterpact innovation? Read on to discover the future of power distribution.

Buildings, industry, and energy

AMOUNT OF AVAILABLE LEVEL OF INCREASE

40% ENERGY CONSUMED

BY BUILDINGS
1
+ 50% IN GLOBAL INDUSTRY
ENERGY DEMAND
WORLDWIDE BY 2050 2

50
NUMBER OF SMART, EXPECTED UPTIME

BILLION
CONNECTED DEVICES
BY 2020
3

100% FOR BUILDINGS

WORLDWIDE

1 UN Report: World Urbanization Prospects, 2014

2 UN Report: Global Industrial Energy Efficiency Benchmarking, 2010
3 Cisco White Paper: The Internet of Things: How the Next Evolution of the Internet Is Changing Everything, 2011

II schneider-electric.com/masterpact-mtz
As power distribution changes, expectations
grow, increasing the demand for solutions that
enhance safety, offer greater cybersecurity, and
are more reliable, efficient, and sustainable.

Building investors want • Short but reliable project lead times

• Flexible and scalable investments
• Valuable energy labels and ratings
• Compliance to building codes and regulations

Building tenants want • Full power availability

• Energy expense optimization
• Tight control of maintenance costs
• Occupant comfort and productivity

Facility managers want • To provide high-quality service

• To keep electrical system 100% fail-safe
• To stay connected and act remotely
• To minimize critical fault time

Life Is On | Schneider Electric III

 Built on the legendary performance and
reliability of the Masterpact line.

Masterpact MTZ circuit breakers prepare you for the future of power distribution. Smart connectivity.
Remote monitoring. Easy and instant customization via digital modules. Masterpact MTZ circuit breakers
bring the future-ready EcoStruxure Power capabilities you need to build smart, secure, and sustainable
power distribution systems:

• Smartphone connectivity for wireless • Intuitive Micrologic X control unit

TM

alerts and maintenance • Easy installation using established architectures

• Precise Class 1 power meter built in • Seamless integration with building and energy
for energy-saving capabilities management systems via Smart Panel architecture
• Easy customization via digital modules • Demonstrated compliance with standards

With Masterpact MTZ breakers,

enhanced connectivity equips you
for the future of power distribution.
Available from 630 A to 6300 A.

IV schneider-electric.com/masterpact-mtz
Stay connected — Avoid surprises and downtime with
the Masterpact MTZ app.

Secure wireless connection locally • Get real-time alerts and self-diagnosis:

• Connect locally via contactless, wireless, and Event type, severity level, time stamp
secure Bluetooth and NFC connection
®

• Receive predictive measures with

• Review energy consumption, power quality, phase easy-to-interpret data
balance, and health status
• Review status via smartphone: Self-diagnosis,
load levels, warnings and alarms, Comprehensive crisis management
protection settings
• In case of a trip, restore power quickly and safely
• Review locally in the electrical room on the using your smartphone
Micrologic X display, on your smartphone,
or on your switchboard display • Key event data saved (before tripping) via NFC
connection, even without power
• Root cause explanation and step-by-step breaker
reclosing and power recovering, thanks to
Remote notifications anywhere digital modules:
• Review status anywhere via Facility Expert digital • Waveform Capture on Trip Event
and collaborative maintenance logbook: Periodic
• Power Restoration Assistant
inspection, warnings, and alarms
• Masterpact Operation Assistant
• Review remotely in the control room with
EcoStruxure Facility Advisor, Power Monitoring
Expert (PME), Power SCADA Operation (PSO),
Building Operation (BO)

Life Is On | Schneider Electric V

Access new energy-saving capabilities —
A built-in Class 1 power meter gives you precise
power measurements for greater efficiency.

• First air circuit breaker with built-in, third- • View energy usage analysis, trends, and
party certified Class 1 active power meter energy costs allocation
(IEC 61557-12)
• Compliant with international regulations:
• Instant and comprehensive views of your ISO 50001 and IEC 60364-8
building’s power consumption

Class 1 accuracy for active power and energy management.

VI schneider-electric.com/masterpact-mtz
Customize Micrologic X control unit anytime —
Digital modules make it easy to upgrade and tailor
your system.

• Download digital modules for system • Update at any stage of the life cycle:
protection, measurement, maintenance & during configuration, commissioning,
diagnostics. or operation
• Enhance energy management, • Modules available 24/7 on the
power quality management, and Schneider Electric GoDigital web store
crisis management
• Upload modules instantly using a single
USB cable without interrupting power

Optional digital modules to customize Micrologic 24/7.

Life Is On | Schneider Electric VII

Streamline configuration and commissioning.
Retrofit seamlessly Configure quickly Commission easily
Updating from Masterpact Designing your Masterpact Get your Masterpact MTZ
NT/NW breakers is easy. MTZ breaker to fit your breaker up and running in
needs is simple. no time.
Masterpact MTZ circuit
breakers have the same MyPact software makes With Ecoreach software,
power connection, breaking configuration and ordering commissioning and
capacity, thermal properties, quick and easy. maintaining your circuit
and footprint. breaker is seamless
and intuitive.

Installation and updates are

seamless, quick, and easy.

VIII schneider-electric.com/masterpact-mtz
Simplify your switchboard design — Masterpact MTZ
circuit breakers are adaptable to different systems.
• EcoStruxure Power’s open and • Embedded Ethernet connection • Fully customizable
interoperable system architecture (EIFE module) with chassis status Micrologic X control units
allows for seamless integration management and embedded for all types of protection
with Schneider Electric’s web pages
Smart Panels solution
• Breaker data displays locally on
• Monitor and control remotely switchboard and remotely on
using any supervision system supervision systems

EcoStruxure Power
monitoring software Ecoreach software
• Facility Expert • Simplify commissioning and maintenance
• Facility Advisor • Set up and test switchboards equipped
with smart devices
• Power Monitoring Expert
• Install digital modules
• Power SCADA Operation
• Reduce commissioning time
• Building Operation
• Speed up FAT and SAT delivery
• Improve preventive maintenance with protection
settings/checking, warnings and alarms, trip
history, and maintenance reports

Life Is On | Schneider Electric IX

 Smart Panels
integration
Masterpact MTZ integration with Smart Panels
architecture generates valuable data, enabling:
• Connection to EcoStruxure Power software unlocks your electrical system’s potential
• Remote monitoring and control with any supervision system to carry out predictive and
preventive maintenance
• Remote notification and maintenance planning with Facility Expert digital maintenance logbook
• Proactive facility management with EcoStruxure Facility Advisor, Power Monitoring Expert,
Power SCADA Operation, and Building Operation software
• Asset life-cycle management and condition-based maintenance via equipment monitoring
• Asset and alarm management
• Energy efficiency and power quality management
• Compliance with latest regulations for energy-efficient buildings

MEASURE
Certified Class 1 energy
and breaker status

CONNECT ACT
Embedded Comprehensive
Ethernet connection data collection

www.schneider-electric.com/smart-panels

X schneider-electric.com/masterpact-mtz
 A new digital
user experience
With the Masterpact MTZ circuit breaker,
every stage of the project — from designing
and configuring to operating and maintaining —
is streamlined using its digital capabilities.

DESIGN Ecodial Software Ecoreal software

Single-line diagram design software Quick configuration and quotation tool
that calculates and sizes your for switchboards.
electrical installation.

CONFIGURE MyPact
Configure and order Masterpact MTZ
AND ORDER to save time and ensure accuracy.
config.schneider-electric.com

BUILD AND Ecoreach

Commission and upgrade easily
COMMISSION with protection setting and
factory-acceptance test.

OPERATE AND A. Remotely in the control room C. Stay notified any time
PowerView software and
TM
The Facility Expert
MAINTAIN embedded web pages. maintenance
Obtain data visualization and reporting logbook app.
for increased efficiency. Track facility data
and receive alerts
B. Locally in the facility room in case of power
events and scheduled
maintenance.
EcoStruxure Power schneider-electric.com/facilityhero
monitoring software Masterpact Home
MTZ app
Power Monitoring Expert Quickview
Measures

Power SCADA Operation ! Alarms & H...

Maintenan...
Building Operation OK
Status
“at a glance”
Facility Advisor
schneider-electric.com/facilityinsights
app.facilityhero.com

CUSTOMIZE GoDigital marketplace Advanced functions

Purchase additional digital modules • Protection
OR UPGRADE for even more visibility and efficiency • Measurement
over the Masterpact MTZ circuit • Maintenance & diagnostics
breaker life cycle. godigital.schneider-electric.com

Life Is On | Schneider Electric XI

Keep your electrical system online in the harshest
environments — Masterpact MTZ circuit breakers
give you proven reliability by going beyond standards.
Built to endure:
• Voltage fluctuations • Vibrations and shocks
• Electromagnetic disturbances • Corrosive and chemical ambiance
• Severe temperatures

XII schneider-electric.com/masterpactmtz
schneider-electric.com/masterpact-mtz
Contribute to a better world — with Masterpact MTZ
circuit breakers you can enhance sustainability.
• Total control over environmental impact • Compliant with all European and international
of equipment regulations and Green Premium ecolabel

RoHS
Our products are subject to RoHS requirements
worldwide. This initiative aims to eliminate hazardous
substances.

REACh
The Schneider Electric Green Premium We apply the strict REACh regulation on our products
ecolabel is committed to offering worldwide. This discloses extensive information
transparency by disclosing extensive concerning the presence of substances of very high
information related to the environmental concern in products.
impact of its products.

PEP: Product environmental profile

In compliance with the ISO 14025 PEP Eco passport
program, we publish the most complete set of
environmental data on all of our products.

End-of-life instructions
Available at the click of a button, these instructions
provide:
• Recyclability rates for Schneider Electric products
• Guidance to mitigate personnel hazards during the
dismantling of products
• Parts identification for recycling or for selective
treatment to mitigate environmental hazards/
incompatibility with standard recycling processes

Life Is On | Schneider Electric XIII

 Innovation
at every level
Masterpact MTZ circuit breakers offer
innovative features that streamline system
design, construction, and operation.

I design Win more projects

Digital modules give you the ability to add functions
based on one standard Micrologic X control unit,
helping to reduce your initial investment in a project
and making Masterpact MTZ circuit breakers
scalable to future needs.

Design durable and

compliant systems
Masterpact MTZ circuit breakers are compliant
with electrical distribution and energy efficiency
standards and regulations. Plus, they are tested
and proven to withstand harsh conditions.

Create smart, flexible systems

Masterpact MTZ circuit breakers integrate
seamlessly with Schneider Electric Smart Panels.
The embedded Ethernet connection and a Class 1
power meter help to increase energy efficiency by
providing comprehensive data on any building or
power management system.

XIV schneider-electric.com/masterpactmtz
I build Install and retrofit easily
The transition from Masterpact NT/NW circuit
breakers to Masterpact MTZ circuit breakers
doesn’t require switchboard modification or
IEC 61439 1 and 2 recertification.

Commission quickly
With Ecoreach software, you can integrate
smart devices, commission connected
switchboards, and generate comprehensive
reports as part of factory and site
acceptance tests.

Provide better service

Our partner programs offer tools, software,
support, and loyalty awards to help you grow
your business and meet your customers’
needs with high-quality pre- and
post-sale services.

I operate Improve customer loyalty

Masterpact MTZ circuit breakers allow you
to provide commissioning and maintenance
reports to demonstrate your reliability and
value to your customers or employer.

Make maintenance easier

Masterpact MTZ circuit breakers send alerts
to your smartphone, helping you to diagnose
problems quickly and avoid downtime. In
case of power interruptions, the Power Crisis
Assistant digital module guides you to the root
cause and helps you restore power quickly.

Increase safety
Because Masterpact MTZ circuit breakers
can be maintained wirelessly via Bluetooth
and NFC connections, physical contact
with the breaker is limited. Plus, the facility
manager application provides guidance for
the daily maintenance operation.

Life Is On | Schneider Electric XV

XVI schneider-electric.com/masterpactmtz
Offer more services and
get experienced support

With smart connectivity, Masterpact MTZ

circuit breakers give you the ability to offer better
service and insights. And our Field Services
team is always ready with experienced support
when you need it.

Digital Services Field Services

As a panel builder, contractor, or facility We’re here to help with new projects,
manager, Masterpact MTZ gives you new retrofitting, maintenance, spare parts kits,
ways to serve your customers or company. and trainings. Manage your Masterpact
MTZ circuit breaker throughout its entire life
Data analysis and reporting assists you with cycle with Schneider Electric Field Services.
network management and cost management.
Remote monitoring helps to increase Our professional engineers and qualified
operational efficiency and uptime. Plus, when field services representatives are
combined with the Smart Panels architecture, committed to providing you with innovative
Masterpact MTZ air circuit breakers can solutions, advanced customer service, and
generate remote data collection, enabling: technical support.

• Maintenance planning with

Facility Expert
• Facility management with
Facility Advisor
• Permanent equipment monitoring
• Asset and alarm management
• Energy efficiency and power
quality management

Get peace of mind

Masterpact MTZ associated services are

available when purchasing your circuit breaker,
such as assistance in commissioning and
start-up, warranty extension, and an e-learning
program.

Life Is On | Schneider Electric XVII

 The Masterpact MTZ
range covers your
protection needs.

Five performance levels

N1 | H1 | H2 | H3 | L1

kA rms
Type H2 – 150
kA rms
Type H1 – 100

MTZ3
kA rms
Type L1 – 150 kA rms
Type H3 – 150

rms
MTZ2 Type H2 – 100
kA

kA rms
Type H1 – 66
kA rms
Type N1 – 42

kA rms
Type L1 – 150
kA rms
Type H3 – 66
MTZ1 kA rms
Type H2 – 50 In (A)
5000 6300
kA rms 4000
Type H1 – 42 2500 3200
1600 2000
1000 1250
630 800

Icu (kA rms) at 415 V AC

XVIII schneider-electric.com/masterpactmtz
With Masterpact MTZ circuit breakers, you’re ready for all the ways power
distribution is changing. Smart connectivity gives you real-time data to help
avoid downtime. Digital modules allow you to customize the circuit breaker
to your specific needs. And proven durability gives you the assurance that
you’re placing your power distribution on a reliable foundation.

Masterpact MTZ circuit breakers are available in three sizes:

MTZ1 MTZ2 MTZ3

From 630 to 1600 A From 800 to 4000 A From 4000 to 6300 A

Now featuring digital

modules to customize
Micrologic X control units
2.0 X | 5.0 X | 6.0 X | 7.0 X

Downloadable digital modules provide enhanced:

• Protection
• Measurement
• Maintenance & diagnostics

Life Is On | Schneider Electric XIX

General contents
Masterpact™ MTZ

Select your circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors

Characteristics and performances A

Select your Micrologic X control unit

Overview of functions B

Customize your Micrologic X with digital modules

Overview of digital modules C

Customize your circuit breaker with accessories

Overview, Installation simplification, Signalling, Controlling, Interlocking, Circuit protection, D
Operation protection, Mechanical protection, Power availability and reliability

Integrate in Smart panels - Architecture and systems

Architecture overview, Components, Customer engineering tool E

Integrate in switchboard
Operating conditions, Installation rules, Temperature derating, Busbar sizing, F
Derating in switchboards, Dimensions, Electrical diagrams

Integrate in special applications - Source-changeover systems

G

Services
Services Overview, Associated Services, Life Cycle Services, Digital Services H

Order your circuit breaker

Catalogue numbers, Spare parts & Mypact I

1
 www.schneider-electric.com

2
www.schneider-electric.com

Select your circuit breakers

and switch-disconnectors

Selection guide A
Circuit breakers................................................................................. A-2
Switch-disconnectors....................................................................... A-4

Characteristics and performance

Circuit breakers................................................................................. A-6
Switch-disconnectors....................................................................... A-8

Utilisation category............................................................... A-10

Other chapters
Select your Micrologic X control unit........................................................... B-1
Customize your Micrologic X with digital modules......................................C-1
Customize your circuit breaker with accessories........................................D-1
Integrate in Smart panels - Architecture and systems................................ E-1
Integrate in switchboard............................................................................. F-1
Integrate in special applications - Source-changeover systems.................G-1
Services......................................................................................................H-1
Order your circuit breaker............................................................................ I-1

A-1
 Select your circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors www.schneider-electric.com

Selection guide
Circuit breakers

A Selection criteria
Safety of operation
Masterpact MTZ front face provides reinforced

PB115935_50.eps
insulation (Class 2) according to IEC 60664-1.
It allows Class 2 installation with breaker control
from outside.

Masterpact MTZ1
From 630 to 1600 A
Type H1 H2 H3 [8] L1
Rated current (A) at 40/50 °C [1]
MTZ1 06 630 630 630 630
MTZ1 08 800 800 800 800
MTZ1 10 1000 1000 1000 1000
MTZ1 12 1250 1250 1250
MTZ1 16 1600 1600 1600

Selectivity category [2] B B B A

Ultimate breaking capacity Icu at 440 V 42 50 66 130
V AC 50/60 Hz (kA rms)
at 1150 V - - - -
Rated service breaking capacity Ics at 440 V 42 50 50 130
(kA rms) at 1150 V - - - -
Rated short-time withstand Icw 0.5 s 42 42 50 10
current V AC 50/60 Hz (kA rms) 1 s 42 42 50 -
3s 24 24 30 -
Position of neutral (Left: L, Right: R) L L L L
Type of control unit: Micrologic X

Installation characteristics
Type H1 H2 H3 L1
Connection
Drawout, front
Drawout, rear
Fixed, front
Fixed, rear
Dimensions (mm) H x W x D
Drawout 3P 322 x 288 x 291
Drawout 4P 322 x 358 x 291
Fixed 3P 301 x 276 x 209
Fixed 4P 301 x 346 x 209
Weight (kg) approximate
Drawout 3P/4P 30/39
Fixed 3P/4P 14/18
[1] 5
 0 °C for rear vertical connected only, refer to temperature derating [6] MTZ2-H10 dedicated to 1250 V systems.
tables for other connection types. [7] F
 or Masterpact MTZ2-H10 circuit breaker the Micrologic X control
[2] For details on selectivity category A and B, see page A-10. unit cannot be directly connected to the internal voltage pick-up on
[3] No front connection for 4000 A. the downstream terminal. The external voltage pick-up option PTE
[4] No horizontal rear connection for 6300 A. associated with external voltage transformer shall be used
[5] To be specified when ordering. (See page B-28).
[8] F
 or Masterpact MTZ1 H3 the rated operational voltage is limited to
440 V AC - 50/60 Hz.
A-2
www.schneider-electric.com
Select your circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors
Selection guide
Circuit breakers

PB115951_80.eps
PB115943_85.eps

Masterpact MTZ2 Masterpact MTZ3

From 800 to 4000 A From 4000 to 6300 A
Type N1 H1 H2 H3 L1 H10 [6] Type H1 H2

MTZ2 08 800 800 800 800 800

MTZ2 10 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
MTZ2 12 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250
MTZ2 16 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600
MTZ2 20 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
MTZ2 25 2500 2500 2500 2500
MTZ2 32 3200 3200 3200 3200
MTZ2 40 4000 4000 4000 4000 MTZ3 40 4000 4000
MTZ3 50 5000 5000
MTZ3 63 6300 6300
B B B B B B B B
42 66 100 150 150 - 100 150
- - - - - 50 - -
42 66 100 150 150 - 100 150
- - - - - 50 - -
42 66 66 85 85 65 30 50 100 100
42 66 66 85 85 65 30 50 100 100
22 36 66 50 75 65 30 50 100 100
[5] [5] [5] [5]
L L or R L or R L L L L or R L or R
[7]

N1 H1 H2 H3 L1 H10 H1 H2

[3] [3] [3]

[4] [4]

[3] [3]

[4] [4]

439 x 441 x 403 479 x 786 x 403

439 x 556 x 403 479 x 1016 x 403
352 x 422 x 300 352 x 767 x 300
352 x 537 x 300 352 x 997 x 300

90/120 225/300
50/65 120/160

A-3
 Select your circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors www.schneider-electric.com

Selection guide
Switch-disconnectors

A Selection criteria
Safety of operation
Masterpact MTZ front face provides reinforced insulation (Class 2)

PB115672.eps
according to IEC 60664-1.
It allows Class 2 installation with breaker control from outside.

Masterpact MTZ1
From 630 to 1600 A
Type Type HA
Rated current (A) at 40/50 °C [1] MTZ1 06 630
MTZ1 08 800
MTZ1 10 1000
MTZ1 12 1250
MTZ1 16 1600

Switch-disconnector (as per IEC/EN 60947-3)

Rated making capacity V AC 50/60 Hz Icm (kÂ) at 690 V 75
at 1150 V -
Rated short-time withstand current V AC 50/60 Hz Icw (kA rms) 1 s 36
Utilisation category [2] AC-23A
Unprotected circuit breaker (tripping by shunt trip as per IEC/EN 60947-2)
External protection relay: short-circuit protection, maximum delay: 400 ms [2]
Ultimate breaking capacity V AC 50/60 Hz Icu (kA rms) at 415 V -
Rated service breaking capacity Ics (kA rms) % Icu -
Rated short-time withstand current V AC 50/60 Hz Icw (kA rms) 1s -
3s -
Rated making capacity V AC 50/60 Hz Icm (kÂ) at 220 to 690 V
Position of neutral (Left: L, Right: R) L or R

Installation characteristics
Type HA
Connection
Drawout, front
Drawout, rear
Fixed, front
Fixed, rear
Dimensions (mm) H x W x D
Drawout 3P 322 x 288 x 291
Drawout 4P 322 x 358 x 291
Fixed 3P 301 x 276 x 209
Fixed 4P 301 x 346 x 209
Weight (kg) approximate
Drawout 3P/4P 30/39
Fixed 3P/4P 14/18
[1] 5
 0 °C for rear vertical connected only, refer to temperature derating tables [3] No front connection for 4000 A.
for other connection types. [4] No horizontal rear connection for 6300 A.
[2] F
 or details on unprotected circuit breaker and utilisation category AC-23A, [5] MTZ2-HA10 dedicated to 1250 V systems.
see page A-10.
A-4
www.schneider-electric.com
Select your circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors
Selection guide
Switch-disconnectors

PB115674.eps
PB115673.eps

Masterpact MTZ2 Masterpact MTZ3

From 800 to 4000 A From 4000 to 6300 A
Type NA HA HA10 [5] Type HA

MTZ2 08 800 800 800

MTZ2 10 1000 1000 1000
MTZ2 12 1250 1250 1250
MTZ2 16 1600 1600 1600
MTZ2 20 2000 2000
MTZ2 25 2500 2500
MTZ2 32 3200 3200
MTZ2 40 4000 4000 MTZ3 40 4000
MTZ3 50 5000
MTZ3 63 6300

88 145 - 187
- - 105 -
42 66 50 85
AC-23A AC-23A AC-23A AC-23A

- 66 - 85
- 100 % -
- 66 - 85
- 36 - 85
145 - 187
L or R L or R L or R L

NA HA HA10 HA

[3]

[4]

[3]

[4]

439 x 441 x 403 479 x 786 x 403

439 x 556 x 403 479 x 1016 x 403
352 x 422 x 300 352 x 767 x 300
352 x 537 x 300 352 x 997 x 300

90/120 225/300
50/65 120/160

A-5
 Select your circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors www.schneider-electric.com

Characteristics and performance

Circuit breakers

A Common characteristics MTZ1 MTZ2 & MTZ3 MTZ2 H10

Number of poles 3/4 3/4 3/4
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 1000 1000 1250
Impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 12 12 12
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC 50/60 Hz) 690 [7] 690 1150
Suitability for isolation IEC/EN 60947-2
Degree of pollution IEC/EN 60947-1 3 3 3

Characteristics
Masterpact MTZ1
From 630 to 1600 A
Circuit breaker as per IEC/EN 60947-2
Masterpact 06 08 10 12 16
Rated current at 40/50 °C [1] In (A) 630 800 1250 1600
Sensor ratings (A) 400 400 400 630 800
to 630 to 800 to 1000 to 1250 to 1600
Masterpact 06 to 10 12 to 16
Type H1 H2 H3 [7] L1 [2] H1 H2 H3 [7]
Ultimate breaking capacity Icu (kA rms) 220/415 V 42 50 66 150 42 50 66
V AC 50/60 Hz 440 V 42 50 66 130 42 50 66
500/525 V 42 42 - 100 42 42 -
660/690 V 42 42 - - 42 42 -
1150 V - - - - - - -
Rated service breaking capacity Ics (kA rms) % Icu 100 100 75 [4] 100 100 100 75 [4]
Selectivity category [3] B B B A B B B
Rated short-time withstand current Icw (kA rms) 0.5 s 42 42 50 10 42 42 50
V AC 50/60 Hz 1s 42 42 50 - 42 42 50
3s 24 24 30 - 24 24 30
Rated making capacity Icm (kÂ) 220/415 V 88 105 145 330 88 105 145
V AC 50/60 Hz 440 V 88 105 145 286 88 105 145
500/525 V 88 88 - 220 88 88 -
660/690 V 88 88 - 52 88 88 -
1150 V - - - - - - -
Integrated instantaneous protection (DIN kA instantaneous ±10 %) [3] - 90 110 10 In - 90 105
Break time between tripping order and arc extinction (ms) 25 25 25 9 25 25 25
Closing time (ms) < 50 < 50

Durability as per IEC/EN 60947-2/3

Mechanical durability [6] MTZ1 06 to 10 MTZ1 12 to 16
Mechanical durability, C/O cycles x 1000 with periodic preventive 12.5 12.5 10 12.5 12.5 12.5 10
maintenance
Electrical durability [6] at rated current In MTZ1 06 to 10 MTZ1 12 to 16
630 to 1000 A 1250 to 1600 A
Type of Masterpact H1 H2 H3 [7] L1 H1 H2 H3 [7]
Electrical durability, C/O cycles x 1000 440 V 6 6 6 3 6 6 6
IEC/EN 60947-2 690 V 3 3 - 2 3 3 -
1150 V - - - - - -
Electrical durability [6] at rated operational current MTZ1 06 to 12 MTZ1 16
Ie in AC-23A [3] 630 to 1250 A 1600 A
Type of Masterpact H1 H2 H3 [7] H1 H2 H3 [7]
Electrical durability, C/O cycles x 1000 440 V 6 6 6 6 6 6
IEC/EN 60947-3 690 V 3 3 - 3 3 -
1150 V - - - - - -
Electrical durability [6] at rated operational current MTZ1 06 to 10
Ie in AC-3 [3] 500 A 630 A 800 A 1000 A
Type of Masterpact H1/H2/H3
Motor power (kW) 380/415 V y 250 250 to 335 335 to 450 450 to 560
440 V y 300 300 to 400 400 to 500 500 to 630
690 V - - - -
Electrical durability, C/O cycles x 1000 440 V 6
IEC/EN 60947-3 and IEC/EN 60947-4-1 690 V -
[1] 5
 0 °C: rear vertical connected. Refer to temperature derating tables for [3] F
 or details on selectivity category A, B, AC-3, AC-23A, DIN-DINF,
other connection types. see page A-10.
[2] See the current-limiting curves in the “additional characteristics” section. [4] Ics: 50 kA for 415-440 V.
[5] MTZ2 H10 dedicated to 1250 V systems.
A-6
www.schneider-electric.com
Select your circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors
Characteristics and performance
Circuit breakers

Sensor selection A
Sensor rating In (A) 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000 6300
Ir threshold 160 250 320 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500
setting(A) to 400 to 630 to 800 to 1000 to 1250 to 1600 to 2000 to 2500 to 3200 to 4000 to 5000 to 6300

Masterpact MTZ2 Masterpact MTZ3

From 800 to 4000 A From 4000 to 6300 A

08 10 12 16 20 25 32 40 40 50 63
800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 4000 5000 6300
400 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2000 2500 3200
to 800 to 1000 to 1250 to 1600 to 2000 to 2500 to 3200 to 4000 to 4000 to 5000 to 6300
08 to 16 20 25 to 40 40 to 63
N1 H1 H2 L1 [2] H10 [5] N1 H1 H2 H3 L1 [2] H10 [5] H1 H2 H3 H10 [5] H1 H2
42 66 100 150 - 42 66 100 150 150 - 66 100 150 - 100 150
42 66 100 150 - 42 66 100 150 150 - 66 100 150 - 100 150
42 66 85 130 - 42 66 85 130 130 - 66 85 130 - 100 130
42 66 85 100 - 42 66 85 100 100 - 66 85 100 - 100 100
- - - - 50 - - - - - 50 - - - 50 - -
100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
42 66 85 30 50 42 66 85 65 30 50 66 85 65 50 100 100
42 66 85 30 50 42 66 85 65 30 50 66 85 65 50 100 100
22 36 50 30 50 22 36 75 65 30 50 66 75 65 50 100 100
88 145 220 330 - 88 145 220 330 330 - 145 220 330 - 220 330
88 145 220 330 - 88 145 220 330 330 - 145 220 330 - 220 330
88 145 187 286 - 88 145 187 286 286 - 145 187 286 - 220 286
88 145 187 220 - 88 145 187 220 220 - 145 187 220 - 220 220
- - - - 105 - - - - - 105 - - - 105 - -
- - 190 80 - - - 190 150 80 - - 190 150 - - 270
25 25 25 10 25 25 25 25 25 10 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
< 70 < 70 < 70 < 80

MTZ2 08 to 16 MTZ2 20 MTZ2 25 to 40 MTZ3 40 to 63

25 20 20 10

MTZ2 08 to 16 MTZ2 20 MTZ2 25 to 40 MTZ3 40 to 63

800 to 1600 A 2000 A 2500 to 4000 A 4000 to 6300 A
N1/H1/H2 L1 H10 N1/H1/H2 H3 L1 H10 H1/H2 H3 H10 H1 H2
10 3 - 8 2 3 - 5 1.25 - 1.5 1.5
10 3 - 6 2 3 - 2.5 1.25 - 1.5 1.5
- 0.5 - - - 0.5 - - 0.5 - -
MTZ2 08 to 16 MTZ2 20 MTZ2 25 to 40 MTZ3 40 to 63
800 to 1600 A 2000 A 2500 to 4000 A 4000 to 6300 A
H1/H2 H10 H1/H2/H3 H10 H1/H2/H3 H10 H1 H2
10 - 8 - 5 - 1.5 1.5
10 - 6 - 2.5 - 1.5 1.5
- 0.5 - - - 0.5 - - 0.5 - -
MTZ2 08 to 16 MTZ2 20
800 A 1000 A 1250 A 1600 A (2000 A)
H1/H2 H1/H2/H3
335 to 450 450 to 560 560 to 670 670 to 900 900 to 1150 -
400 to 500 500 to 630 500 to 800 800 to 1000 1000 to 1300 -
y 800 800 to 1000 1000 to 1250 1250 to 1600 1600 to 2000 -
6 6 -
6 6 -
[6] The term "durability" is used to express the expectancy of the number of the operating cycles
which can be performed by the device.
[7] For MTZ1 H3 the rated operational voltage Ue is limited to 440 V AC - 50/60 Hz.

A-7
 Select your circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors www.schneider-electric.com

Characteristics and performance

Switch-disconnectors

A Common characteristics MTZ1 MTZ2 & MTZ3 MTZ2 HA10

Number of poles 3/4 3/4 3/4
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 1000 1000 1250
Impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 12 12 12
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC 50/60 Hz) 690 690 1150
Suitability for isolation IEC/EN 60947-3
Degree of pollution IEC/EN 60947-1 3 3 3

Characteristics
Masterpact MTZ1
From 630 to 1600 A
Switch-disconnector as per IEC/EN 60947-3
Masterpact 06 08 10 12 16
Rated current at 40/50 °C [1] In (A) 630 800 1000 1250 1600
Type of Masterpact HA HA
Rated making capacity Icm (kÂ) 220...690 V 75 75
AC-23A/AC-3 category V AC 50/60 Hz 1150 V - -
Rated short-time withstand current Icw (kA rms) 0.5 s 36
AC-23A/AC-3 category V AC 50/60 Hz 1s 36
3s 20
Unprotected circuit breaker - Tripping by shunt trip as per IEC/EN 60947-2
Type of Masterpact
Ultimate breaking capacity AC 50/60 Hz Icu (kA rms) 220...690 V -
Rated service breaking capacity Ics (kA rms) % Icu
Rated short-time withstand current Icw (kA rms) 1 s -
3s -
Rated making capacity V AC 50/60 Hz Icm (kÂ) 220...690 V -
Overload and short-circuit protection -
External protection relay: short-circuit protection, maximum delay: 400 ms [2]

Durability as per IEC/EN 60947-2/3

Mechanical durability [4] MTZ1 06 to 10 MTZ1 12 to 16
Mechanical durability, C/O cycles x 1000 with periodic preventive 12.5 12.5
maintenance
Electrical durability [4] at Rated operational current MTZ1 06 to 12 MTZ1 16
Ie in AC-23A [3] 630 to 1000 A 1250 A 1600 A
Type of Masterpact HA
Electrical durability, C/O cycles x 1000 440 V 6 6 6
IEC/EN 60947-3 690 V 3 3 3
1150 V - - -
Electrical durability [4] at Rated operational current MTZ1 06 to 10
Ie in AC-3 [3] 500 A 630 A 800 A 1000 A
Type of Masterpact HA
Motor power (kW) 380/415 V y 250 250 to 335 335 to 450 450 to 560
440 V y 300 300 to 400 400 to 500 500 to 630
690 V - - - -
Electrical durability, C/O cycles x 1000 440 V 6
IEC/EN 60947-3 Annex A and IEC/EN 60947-4-1 690 V -
[1] 50 °C: rear vertical connected. Refer to temperature derating tables for other connection types.
[2] External
 protection must comply with permissible thermal constraints of the circuit breaker (please consult us).
No fault-trip indication by the SDE or the reset button.
[3] For details on utilisation category AC-3 and AC-23A, see page A-10.
[4] The term "durability" is used to express the expectancy of the number of the operating cycles which can be performed by the device.
[5] MTZ2-HA10 dedicated to 1250 V systems.

A-8
www.schneider-electric.com
Select your circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors
Characteristics and performance
Switch-disconnectors

Masterpact MTZ2 Masterpact MTZ3

From 800 to 4000 A From 4000 to 6300 A

08 10 12 16 20 25 32 40 40 50 63
800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 4000 5000 6300
NA HA HA10 [5] HA HA10 [5] HA
88 145 - 145 - 187
- - 105 - 105 -
-
42 66 50 66 50 85
- 36 50 55 50 85

HA HA10 HA HA10 HA
66 - 66 - 85
100 % - 100 % - 100 %
66 - 66 - 85
36 - 55 - 85
145 - 145 - 187
- - - - -

MTZ2 08 to 16 MTZ2 20 MTZ2 25 to 40 MTZ3 40 to 63

25 20 20 10

MTZ2 08 to 16 MTZ2 20 MTZ2 25 to 40 MTZ3 40 to 63

800 to 1600 A 2000 A 2500 to 4000 A 4000 to 6300 A
NA HA HA10 HA HA10 HA HA10 HA
10 10 - 8 - 5 - 0.5
10 10 - 6 - 2.5 - 0.5
- - 0.5 - 0.5 - 0.5 -
MTZ2 08 to 16 MTZ2 20
800 A 1000 A 1250 A 1600 A 2000 A
NA/HA/HA10 HA/HA10
335 to 450 450 to 560 560 to 670 670 to 900 900 to 1150 -
400 to 500 500 to 630 500 to 800 800 to 1000 1000 to 1300 -
y 800 800 to 1000 1000 to 1250 1250 to 1600 1600 to 2000 -
6 6 -
6 6 -

A-9
 Select your circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors www.schneider-electric.com

Utilisation category

A
Selectivity category A and B (IEC/EN 60947-2)
The Selectivity category is defined by the IEC/EN 60947-2 : 2013 standard:
bb Selectivity category A:
Circuit breakers not specifically intended for selectivity under short-circuit conditions with
respect to other short-circuit protective devices in series on the load side, i.e. without an
intentional short-circuit delay provided for selectivity under short-circuit conditions, and
therefore without a short-circuit withstand current rating according to 4.3.5.4.
bb Selectivity category B:
Circuit breakers specifically intended for selectivity under short-circuit conditions with
respect to other short-circuit protective devices in series on the load side, i.e. with an
intentional short-circuit delay (which may be adjustable), provided for selectivity under
short-circuit conditions. Such circuit breakers have a short-circuit withstand current rating
according to 4.3.5.4.
The selectivity between Masterpact MTZ category B circuit breakers is certified up to the
rated short-time withstand current (Icw).
When Icu > Icw, the circuit breakers integrate an instantaneous override protection (DIN)
which operates above Icw.
On top of the selectivity category, the selectivity performance between 2 circuit breakers
depends on the Micrologic X control units type and on their settings. Please refer to the
selectivity tables in the Complementary Technical Guide or to the Schneider Electric
calculation tools.

DIN-DINF
Masterpact MTZ circuit breakers integrate two types of instantaneous short-circuit
protection :
1: A “DIN” (Instantaneous override protection) active when the circuit breaker is closed.
The DIN is activated above Icw. It operates on the instantaneous value of the current.
2: A “DINF”(Instantaneous making over-current voltage release) intended to
instantaneously trip the circuit breaker in case of closing on a short-circuit current higher
than its threshold. The DINF operates on the instantaneous value of the current. The
DINF is disabled around 50 ms after the circuit breaker closing.

Unprotected circuit breaker

Circuit breaker without integrated protection control unit. The protection is ensured by
an external protection relay which trips the circuit breaker MX or MN voltage release.
The rated short-time withstand current (Icw) of the circuit breaker shall be higher than
the maximum expected short-circuit current on the protected circuit.

Utilisation category AC-23A

Defined in standard for Switches (IEC/EN 60947-3); applies to devices specifically
intended for the switching of motor loads or other highly inductive loads.
Utilization categories with suffix A (e.g. "AC-23A") designate devices which are intended
for frequent operation. The corresponding number of operating cycles with the associated
operational currents are specified in Table 4 of IEC/EN 60947-3.

Utilisation category AC-3

Defined in standard for Contactors and motor starters (IEC/EN 60947-4-1) and for
switches-disconnectors (IEC/EN 60947-3 Annex A); applies to devices specifically
intended for the switching of asynchronous squirrel-cage motors.

A-10
www.schneider-electric.com

Select your Micrologic X control unit

Overview of functions.............................................................B-2
Protections
Functions of protections................................................................... B-8
Tripping curves............................................................................... B-12
Limitation curves............................................................................. B-13 B
Measurement.......................................................................... B-14
Maintenance & diagnostics............................................... B-22
Event Management .............................................................. B-26
Power supply.......................................................................... B-28

Other chapters
Select your circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors.............................. A-1
Customize your Micrologic X with digital modules......................................C-1
Customize your circuit breaker with accessories........................................D-1
Integrate in Smart panels - Architecture and systems................................ E-1
Integrate in switchboard............................................................................. F-1
Integrate in special applications - Source-changeover systems.................G-1
Services......................................................................................................H-1
Order your circuit breaker............................................................................ I-1

B-1
 Select your Micrologic X control unit www.schneider-electric.com

Overview of functions

Measurement Maintenance
Energy management is & Diagnostics
the challenge of present
Optimal continuity of
& future generations.
services as well as
B To meet this requirement
Micrologic X incorporates
extended life of equipment
is one of customers
all the measuring functions
main concerns. For that
of a power meter including
purpose Micrologic X
Energy Class 1 accuracy
integrates new extended
third-party certified.
diagnosis and assistance
to maintenance.
PB116185_35.eps

Protection
Improvement of the
reliability of Micrologic X,
dual settings and
additional facilities
increase the
performance and the
flexibility of low voltage
systems of protection.

10  ptional 24/7 downloadable

O
digital modules dedicated
to upgrading Micrologic X Communication
p Under voltage and over voltage p It is now common practice to make
available most of the information
p Reverse active power
processed by a Protection Control
p Ground-fault alarm Unit, locally for network operation and
p Energy Reduction Maintenance Settings maintenance, as well as remotely for
higher functions of control, monitoring,
p Energy per phase energy efficiency and assets
p Individual harmonics analysis management.
p Power restoration assistant p To comply with this requirement,
p Masterpact operation assistant Micrologic X control units incorporate
several channels of communication,
p Waveform capture on trip event including Ethernet, Modbus SL and
p Modbus legacy dataset wireless communication facilities.

B-2
www.schneider-electric.com
Select your Micrologic X control unit
Overview of functions

> Protection for ...

> Additional features
... Micrologic 2.0 X of protections (page B-8)

PB116185_35.eps
Along with the LSIGV protections, new additional
DB419726.ai

features and facilities allow to improve the

LI: Long-time
+ Instantaneous protection performance of a system when B
difficulties are met such as low values of the
short-circuit current or the need to limit the
thermal constraints to the equipment: dual
settings, fine settings, zone selective interlock,
fast tripping.

> Measurement (page B-14)

Micrologic X measures all electrical parameters
... Micrologic 5.0 X of an electrical network: currents, voltages,
PB116185_35.eps

LSI: L
 ong-time frequency, power, energy, power factor, current
DB419727.ai

+ Short-time and power demand.

+ Instantaneous Min/Max and average values are calculated for
most of the parameters.
Optional digital modules allow the measurement
of energy per phase, and to perform Waveform
capture.

> Maintenance & Diagnostics

(page B-22)
... Micrologic 6.0 X Diagnostic features are intended to limit the risk of
power interruptions and to re-energize the
LSIG: Long-time
installation as quickly as possible after a trip.
PB116185_35.eps

+ Short-time
They provide warnings and messages to help the
+ Instantaneous
user in scheduling both preventive and predictive
+ Earth fault
DB419727.ai

maintenance, and device replacement.

DB419728.ai

> Communication (page E-1)

New generation Micrologic X control units
incorporate wireless technology (Bluetooth and
NFC) that allows the transfer of a wide selection
of critical information (protection, measurements,
Maintenance & diagnostics) to your mobile
device, by means of Masterpact MTZ mobile App.
... Micrologic 7.0 X Alternatively, Masterpact MTZ can be equipped
PB116185_35.eps

with ETHERNET communication through either

LSIV: Long-time the IFE module or the new embedded EIFE that
+ Short-time includes webpages. Modbus SL communication
+ Instantaneous is available through the IFM interface module.
+ Earth leakage
> Optional digital modules (chapter C)
DB419727.ai

Optional digital modules can be purchased

and downloaded to extend the performance of
DB419729.ai

Micrologic X control units. They are dedicated to

Protection, Measurement, and Maintenance &
diagnostics, and are available through
Go Digital on the Schneider Electric website,
open 24/7.

B-3
 Select your Micrologic X control unit www.schneider-electric.com

Overview of functions

Masterpact MTZ
> Makes power available and reliable in a range of
application and operating conditions.
B > Incorporates the lastest technology to enhance
both performance and safety.

B-4
www.schneider-electric.com
Select your Micrologic X control unit
Overview of functions

As standard As options
PB116185_35.eps

on Masterpact MTZ with digital modules mainly

with Micrologic X through Masterpact MTZ
mobile App
(and more coming soon)
B

p LSIGV protection [1]

+ Dual settings, ZSI, p Undervoltage
Trip history, Settings and overvoltage
traceability p Reverse active power
Protection p Ground fault alarm
and more
pE  nergy Reduction
[1] Depending on Micrologic X Maintenance Settings (ERMS)
model.
> See page B-8 > See page C-5 and C-7

p New full Power meter p Energy per Phase

Measurement embedded p Individual harmonics
IEC/EN 61557-12 certified Class 1
(Power & Energy) analysis

> See page B-18 > See page C-8 and C-9

p Power restoration assistant

pM asterpact operation
Maintenance p New Masterpact MTZ assistant
& diagnostics embedded diagnostics pW aveform capture
on trip event
pM odbus legacy dataset

> See page B-26 > See page C-10 and C-12

B-5
 Select your Micrologic X control unit www.schneider-electric.com

Overview of functions

All Masterpact circuit breakers are equipped with a Micrologic X control unit which can be upgraded 24/7 with
downloadable digital modules.

B
A
The functions B
DB419567.ai

of protection... MICROLOGIC
C
...included in the control Home
All the information
unit are designed to Quickview
processed and stored by
comply with electrical D Micrologic X control unit
Measures
installation rules is accessible by means
! Alarms & H...
providing overcurrent E
of ergonomic Human
Maintenan...
and short-circuit Machine Interfaces:
protection. OK F
b Embedded HMI with
Micrologic 6.0 X provides G coloured backlight,
earth-fault protection.
b Smartphones via
Micrologic 7.0 X provides H Bluetooth and NFC
earth-leakage protection.
I communication,
An embedded Power
meter complying with J
b External PC through
IEC/EN 61557-12 offers a USB connection.
K
the measurement Connection to Ethernet is
parameters required L achieved with dedicated
TRIP CAUSE

Ir Isd Ig Op.

to optimise energy Ii I n
interface modules: EIFE
M
management. and IFE.
The optional 24/7 N
7.0 X Connection to
downloadable digital ID:
1989421527520002LV847604 O Modbus SL is achieved
modules allow you to with the IFM interface
upgrade the functions of P
module.
Protection, Measurement DISCONNECT BEFORE Q
and Maintenance DIELECTRIC TEST

& diagnostics. In 1600 A

U T S R

A Ready LED (Green) I Bluetooth LED P VPS voltage power supply module (optional)
B Service LED (Red) J Bluetooth activation button Q VPS LED to indicate that the VPS
C ERMS LED (Blue) K  is energyzing the control unit
Test button for earth fault and earth leakage
D Graphic display screen protection (Micrologic 6.0 X and 7.0 X) R QR code to product information
E Escape button ESC L 
Test/Reset button for trip cause LEDs and S Control unit identification number
alarms T Control unit type
F Three contextual buttons
M Mini-USB port under rubber cover U Sensor rating In (A)
G Home button
N Overload and trip cause LEDs (Please refer to page A-7)
H NFC wireless communication zone
O Cover for battery

Note: Certain functions of the Micrologic X control unit require additional accessories and interface modules as described in the chapter D.

B-6
 www.schneider-electric.com
Select your Micrologic X control unit
Overview of functions

Micrologic X ensures a high degree of reliability and immunity to conducted and radiated disturbances with its
enhanced internal architecture including a dedicated ASIC electronic component for the protection functions.
A high level of diagnostics allows to follow the health of the circuit breaker in real time.
With its embedded backlight HMI, Micrologic X allows the quick identification of warning and alarm messages.
The information processed by the Micrologic X may be displayed on the embedded backlight HMI, a smartphone
through Bluetooth or NFC and a PC through the USB connection.
The connection to Ethernet is achieved with the EIFE and IFE interface modules.
B
The connection to Modbus SL is achieved with the IFM interface module.
A wide range of accessories allows to improve the functions of control and monitoring.

Menus Warning
DB430618.ai

MICROLOGIC MICROLOGIC

Home
Home
Quickview
Quickview
Measures
Protection
! Measures
Alarms & H...
Alarms
Maintenan...
OK
OK

MICROLOGIC
Embedded
HMI

TRIP CAUSE

TRIP CAUSE
Ir Isd Ig Op.
Ir Isd Ig Op.
Ii I n Test Reset Ii I n Test Reset

Home 7.0 X 7.0 X

Quickview
ID: ID:
1989421527520002LV847604 1989421527520002LV847604

MICROLOGIC MICROLOGIC

Measures DISCONNECT BEFORE

DIELECTRIC TEST
DISCONNECT BEFORE
DIELECTRIC TEST

! Alarms & H... In 1600 A In 1600 A

Maintenan...
OK

ERMS Alarm
Engaged
TRIP CAUSE

TRIP CAUSE
Ir Isd Ig Op. Ir Isd Ig Op.
Ii I n Test Reset Ii I n Test Reset

7.0 X 7.0 X

NFC ID:
1989421527520002LV847604
ID:
1989421527520002LV847604

DISCONNECT BEFORE DISCONNECT BEFORE

DIELECTRIC TEST DIELECTRIC TEST

In 1600 A In 1600 A

Ethernet
TRIP CAUSE

Ir Isd Ig Op.
Ii I n
TRIP CAUSE

7.0 X
ID:
1989421527520002LV847604 Ir Isd Ig Op.
Ii I n
DISCONNECT BEFORE
DIELECTRIC TEST

In 1600 A

FDM128 Note: Maximum length of the cord between the PC

and the Micrologic X USB port:
b 1 m with a 26/28 AWG cord
b 2 m with a 24 AWG cord.

Or EIFE Module
for drawout
circuit breaker

PC running Ecoreach

IFE Module

B-7
 Select your Micrologic X control unit www.schneider-electric.com

Protections
Functions of protections

The Micrologic X control unit is suitable for different systems of voltage, three or four wires up to 690 V AC, 50/60 Hz
and for all earthing systems as defined per IEC or North American standards (TNC, TNS, TT, IT, HRG).

Micrologic 2.0 X
Long-time ANSI Code 49 RMS
Current setting (A) Ir = In x … Ir = 0.4 In to In, step 1 A
B
DB419088.eps

Tripping between 1.05 and 1.20 Ir

Time setting tr = 0.5 s to 24 s, step 0.5 s for 6 Ir
Time setting exemple: Accuracy: 0 to -30 % 1.5 x Ir 12.5 25 50 100 200 300 400 500 600
time delay (s) Accuracy: 0 to -20 % 6 x Ir 0.5 [1] 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24
Accuracy: 0 to -20 % 7.2 x Ir 0.7 [2] 0.69 1.38 2.7 5.5 8.3 11 13.8 16.6
Thermal memory After tripping
Instantaneous ANSI Code 50
Pick-up (A) Isd = Ir x … Isd = 1.5 to 10 Ir, step 0.5 Ir [4]
Accuracy: ±10 %
Operating time (ms) Non tripping time: 20
Max breaking time: 80

Micrologic 5.0 X - 6.0 X - 7.0 X

Long-time ANSI Code 49 RMS
Current setting (A) Ir = In x … Ir = 0.4 In to In, step 1 A
DB419089.eps

Tripping between 1.05 and 1.20 x Ir

Time setting tr = 0.5 s to 24 s, step 0.5 s for 6 Ir
Time setting exemple: Accuracy: 0 to -30 % 1.5 x Ir 12.5 25 50 100 200 300 400 500 600
time delay (s) Accuracy: 0 to -20 % 6 x Ir 0.5 [1] 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24
Accuracy: 0 to -20 % 7.2 x Ir 0.7 [2] 0.69 1.38 2.7 5.5 8.3 11 13.8 16.6
Thermal memory After tripping
Short-time ANSI Code 51
Pick-up (A) Isd = Ir x … Isd = 1.5 Ir to 10 Ir, step 0.5 Ir [4]
Accuracy: ±10 %
Time setting tsd (s) Settings I2t Off 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
I2t On - 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
Operating time at 10 x Ir non tripping time (ms) 20 80 140 230 350
I2t Off or I2t On max breaking time (ms) 80 140 200 320 500
Instantaneous ANSI Code 50
Pick-up (A) Ii = In x … Ii = 2 In to 15 In, step 0.5 In [4] and OFF protection
Accuracy: ±10 %
Ii mode Standard Fast
Operating time non tripping time (ms) 20 0
max breaking time (ms) 50 30

Micrologic 6.0 X
Earth fault ANSI Code 51N
Pick-up (A) Ig = In x … Ig = 0.2 [3] In to In, step 0.1 In [4] and OFF protection
DB419090.eps

Accuracy: ±10 %
Time setting tg (s) Settings I2t Off 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
I2t On - 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
Operating time non tripping time (ms) 20 80 140 230 350
max breaking time (ms) 80 140 200 320 500

Micrologic 7.0 X
Residual earth ANSI Code 51G
leakage (Vigi)
Sensitivity (A) IDn 0.5 A to 30 A, step 0.1 A
DB419091.eps

Accuracy complies with IEC/EN 60947-2 Annex B

Time delay Dt (ms) Settings 60 150 230 350 800
non tripping time (ms) 60 150 230 350 800
max breaking time (ms) 140 230 320 500 1000
[1] 0 to -40 % [4] F
 iner resolution settings are possible with Ecoreach software
[2] 0 to -60 % and Masterpact MTZ mobile App.
[3] 0.3 In to In for In y 400 A

B-8
www.schneider-electric.com
Select your Micrologic X control unit
Protections
Functions of protections

The characteristics of the protection offers a full selectivity for the majority of the applications with all the types of
Compact circuit breakers and between Masterpact as well, even for a high level of short-circuit currents. Fine setting,
dual settings and zone selective interlocking allow to improve the performance of the low voltage protection systems.

Functions of protection The protection includes two characteristics depending on the

The following functions of protection are available, depending of status of the I2t setting:
b when I2t is OFF, a definite time characteristic is selected.
the type of Micrologic X selected: Long-time overload protection,
Short-time short-circuit protection, Instantaneous short-circuit The protection trips with the time delay tg as soon as the
setting current Ig is exceeded.
B
protection, Earth fault protection, Earth leakage protection.
All these protections operate without auxiliary supply. b when I2t is ON, an inverse time characteristic is selected.
They are powered by the currents flowing throught the circuit The protection operates with an inverse time characteristic up
breaker. to In and above with a definite time characteristic.
In Micrologic 7.0 X the earth leakage protection is powered by [1] for SGR option please consult us.
the system voltage via the voltage power supply module (VPS).
Earth leakage protection (ANSI 51 G)
Long-time overload protection (ANSI 49 RMS) Earth leakage or "Vigi" protection is based on true leakage
The long-time protection protects cables, busbars, and busbar current measured by a rectangular sensor encompassing the 3
trunkings against overload. It is based on the true RMS current. phases or the 3 phases and the neutral. The protection operates
It is implemented independently for each phase and the neutral. with a definite time characteristic. It trips with the time delay Δt as
This protection is an overcurrent time dependent protection with soon as the leakage current exceeds IΔn.
thermal memory. It operates as a thermal image using the The earth leakage protection complies with IEC/EN 60947-2
heating and cooling model of a conductor. Annex B.
After tripping the protection continues to reproduce the cooling of
the conductors. Neutral overload protection
The long-time protection can also be used for transformer or For a four-pole circuit breakers, the neutral protection may be set
generator protection thanks to the wide range of the proposed using a three-position switch:
settings. b neutral unprotected (4P 3d),
b neutral protection at 0.5 Ir (4P 3d + N/2),
Short-time short-circuit protection (ANSI 51) b neutral protection at Ir (4P 4d). Neutral protection greater than
The short-time protection protects the installation against Ir, but lower than In, limited at 1.6 Ir phase.
short-circuits for phase to phase, phase to neutral and phase to For a three-pole circuit breaker the protection of the neutral
earth short-circuits with total selectivity. It is based on the true requires an additional external neutral CT (ENCT). A long-time
RMS current. It includes two characteristics depending on the overcurrent characteristic is dedicated to the neutral protection.
status of the I2t setting:
b when I2t is OFF, a definite time characteristic is selected. Tripping voltage releases supervision (ANSI 74)
The protection trips with the time delay tsd as soon as the The Micrologic X control unit continously checks the electrical
setting current Isd is exceeded. continuity of the circuit breaker tripping voltage release (MITOP).
b when I2t is ON, an inverse time characteristic is selected. It generates an alarms in case of failure.
The protection operates with an inverse time characteristic up
to 10 x Ir and above with a definite time characteristic. Lock-out function (ANSI 86)
Any operation of the above protection trips and locks the circuit
Instantaneous short-circuit protection (ANSI 50) breaker in the open position until it is reset either manually or
The instantaneous protection protects the installation against electrically (see page D-21).
phase to phase, phase to neutral and phase to earth short-
circuits. Fault trip indication and inter-trip (ANSI 94)
The protection operates with a definite time characteristic. Any operation of the above protection activates SDE auxiliary
It trips without additional time delay as soon as the setting current contacts for signalling or inter-trip to other device. SDE contact(s)
Ii is exceeded. The protection offers two selectable typical stay close until the circuit breaker is reset either manually or
tripping times: electrically (see page D-9 and D-21).
b standard tripping time: 50 ms for applications requiring
selectivity. Full selectivity can be ensured with any
Trip history
All trips with the relevant information for their analysis are
Compact NSX circuit breaker installed downstream of
recorded in dedicated logbook history files.
a Masterpact.
For each trip inside the trip history (except the last one) it
b fast tripping time: 30 ms typically used for applications where
includes:
the thermal constraints to the equipment need to be limited and
bb the type of protection that causes the trips: Long time
when selectivity is not required.
overload, Short time short-circuit, Instantaneous short-circuit,
Earth fault protection (ANSI 51 N) Earth fault, Earth leakage,
The earth fault protection can be achieved in two ways: bb the date and time of the fault,
b by performing the summation of the three phases and neutral The last 50 trip histories can be retrieved by means of a PC
currents running Ecoreach or through Bluetooth. These last 50 trips are
b by means of an external sensor (SGR [1]) installed around the also accessible from the embedded display.
In addition, Micrologic X logs also:
cable performing the connection of the transformer neutral
vv the last electrical values measured before the fault (voltages,
point to the earth. The connection of the SGR sensor to
currents, frequency, unbalance current and voltage),
Micrologic 6.0 X is made through a MDGF interface module.
vv the tripping currents during the fault just before
Masterpact MTZ tripping (phase, neutral and ground currents).
vv The setting of the protection.
The last trip may be retrieved through the NFC powerless
wireless communication while the circuit breaker is open and the
Micrologic X is not energized.
B-9
 Select your Micrologic X control unit www.schneider-electric.com

Protections
Functions of protections
DB421316.ai

Dual settings
This function includes two sets of settings for every function of protection (LSIG)
according to the type of Micrologic X except for the earth leakage. User may switch
B from one set of settings to the other to comply with special conditions of operation.
A typical application is to adjust the short-circuit protection when an installation can
be supplied by two sources (grid / generator set) with very different levels of
short-circuit current. The settings can be selected by one of the following means:
bb by a digital input through the I/O module,
bb via Ethernet,
bb from the HMI.

Overcurrent and trip cause indications

Five LEDs are available on the front of the Micrologic X Control unit.
bb The first LED it is a bicolor LED with 2 functionalities, Prewarn/Warn LED :
vv alarm PreWarn LED that becomes orange when I > 0.9 Ir
vv alarm Warn LED that becomes red when I > 1.05 Ir
bb The second LED Ir is dedicated to the long time overload protection. It becomes
DB419569.ai

TRIP CAUSE

Ir Isd Ig red when the protection trips.

Op.
Ii I n bb The third LED Isd/Ii is dedicated to the short-time and instantaneous short-circuit
protection. It becomes red when the protection trips.
bb The fourth LED Ig/IΔn is dedicated to the ground/earth fault and the earth leakage
protection. It becomes red when the protection trips.
bb The fifth LED Op. is dedicated to the optional protections provided by the optional
digital modules. It becomes red when any of the optional protections trip.
The fault indication LEDs remain ON for 4 hours after trip if not reset by test/reset
push button. After 4 hours without reset it is possible to reactivate the trip indication
LEDs by pushing the test/reset push button. Under normal operating conditions,
the battery supplying the LEDs has a service life of approximately 10 years.
It is continuously monitored.

Protection settings and checking

The protections can be set by means of the embedded display, a smartphone via
Bluetooth or with a PC running Ecoreach, and additionally via Ethernet and Modbus
SL communication.
Ecoreach allows:
bb To set and check the protections,
bb To download current settings and upload new settings,
bb To check the breaker operation,
bb To retrieve and display all the information processed by the Micrologic X:
Measurements, alarms, warnings, diagnostics,
bb To generate and store reports.
Additionally, for Micrologic 6.0 X and Micrologic 7.0 X, the operation of earth-fault
and earth-leakage protection can be checked by pressing the test button located
A B above the USB connector.
DB421319.ai

MICROLOGIC Setting change traceability

Any setting change is recorded in a dedicated logbook protection history including:
Home
Quickview
Measures

bb The date and the time of the last setting change,

! Alarms & H...
Maintenan...

OK C
bb The previous settings and the new settings,
The settings corresponding to the active trip curve and the date of the last setting
change can be retrieved through NFC powerless wireless communication while the
D circuit breaker is open and the Micrologic X is not energized.
TRIP CAUSE

Ir Isd Ig Op.
Ii I n Test Reset

7.0 X
ID:
1989421527520002LV847604

In 1600 A
DISCONNECT BEFORE
DIELECTRIC TEST
Setting change locking
The general configuration menu of Micrologic X embedded display allows:
bb to enable or disable the protection setting change from the embedded display
bb to enable or disable the protection setting change from external access:
A PC running Ecoreach vv a smartphone via Bluetooth
B USB cable vv a PC running Ecoreach,
C Micrologic X Control unit vv Ethernet and Modbus SL communication.
In addition the setting change from external access is password protected.
D USB connector in front

B-10
www.schneider-electric.com
Select your Micrologic X control unit
Protections
Functions of protections

Zone Selective Interlocking (ZSI)

ZSI is a system designed to reduce the stress on electrical distribution equipment
during short-circuit or earth fault conditions. It works with a previously coordinated
protection by reducing the fault tripping time while maintaining the selectivity. Each
version of the control unit Micrologic X includes the ZSI function.
B
The ZSI function is associated with short-time short-circuit protection and earth fault
protection. A single ZSI input is provided for earth fault and short-time short-circuit

DB421320.ai
protections.
The control unit detecting a fault sends a signal upstream and checks for a signal
arriving from downstream. If there is a signal from downstream, the circuit breaker
remains closed for the full duration of its tripping delay. If there is no signal from
downstream, the circuit breaker trips with no intentional delay, regardless of the
tripping-delay setting.
Zone selective interlocking can be implemented between any types of Masterpact MTZ.
When ZSI connects circuit breakers other than Masterpact MTZ, it may be necessary to
use a Restraint Interface Module (RIM).

DB419093R.eps
Upstream
circuit breaker
A Z1 tsd = 0,3
Fault 1 Z2
Z3
Only circuit breaker A detects the fault. Because it receives no restraint signal from Z4
downstream, it trips with no intentional delay, regardless of its tripping delay set to 0.3. Fault 1
Fault 2
Circuit breakers A and B detect the fault. Circuit breaker A receives a restraint signal
B Z1
from B and remains closed for the full duration of its tripping delay set to 0.3. Z2
tsd = 0,2
Circuit breaker B does not receive a restraint signal from downstream and opens Z3
Z4
immediately, despite of its tripping delay set to 0.2.
Fault 2
Limits to device interconnection:
bb A maximum of 15 upstreams devices may be connected to the ZSI input (Z1-Z2). Z1 Downstream Z1
bb A maximum of 15 downstream devices may be connected to the ZSI input (Z3-Z4). Z2 circuit breaker Z2
If additional units are needed, a Restraint Interface Module (RIM) is required. Z3 Z3
Z4 Z4

Restraint Interface Module - RIM (ANSI 78)

The Restraint Interface Module (RIM) serves three purposes in a ZSI system with
Masterpact MTZ equipped with Micrologic X:
bb it boosts the voltage level of the restraint signal

DB425288.ai
bb it converts the restraint signal to be compatible with other types of Schneider Electric
circuit breaker (Masterpact NT/NW, Compact) and Square D circuit breaker as well ~ ~

bb when combining different generations of devices between upstream/downstream 3 4

5 6
max

(Masterpact MTZ, Masterpact NT/NW, Compact) it provides Double insulation to

A
41m
60 Hzmax
120
V 6mA
24 V
1 2

meet requirements of IEC standards. OU T

ZSI
ule ZSI
IN
8892 e Mod ZSI ream
LV84 terfac terface ZSI Upst

Within a ZSI system , the voltage level of the restraint signal must be maintained at ZSI In in az
ule d’ interf -test Downstre
am
Modulo de h-to
Mód Pus

a certain level in order to activate the time delay of electronic trip devices. S1
9 10

If the restraint signal is too weak to activate the time delay feature, all devices that .
CB Acc 2H4
Ctrl. No.5

sense the fault will trip with no intentional delay.

The voltage level of the restraint signal can be ineffective due to:
bb restraint wire length exceeding 300 m
bb one device sending a restraint signal to too many devices
bb differing signal levels between different electronic trip systems.
If the restraint wire length exceeds 300 m, the voltage drop along the control wire will
weaken the restraint signal until it can no longer activate the time delay on the
upstream device. If wire length exceeds 300 m, a RIM module must be placed in the
circuit to boost the voltage level of the restraint signal.
In addition, if the number of upstream circuit breakers exceeds 15, then a RIM is
required.
For further details on allowable RIM combinations, please refer to instruction sheet
of ZSI interface module.
RIM module is operational for electrical systems with rated operational voltage [Ue]
up to =690 V AC 50/60 Hz only.
Characteristics
bb Power supply DC: 24 V DC +25 % -20 % ,6 mA.
bb Maximum operating temperature surrounding the module when installed inside
a switchboard: -35 °C to 75 °C.
bb Standards compliance: IEC 60950-1 , CISPR 22, CISPR 24, UL 489, UL 489SE.
bb CE Marked according to LVD (Low Voltage Directive) / IEC 60950-1.
Connection & Installation
bb Terminal Strips, jumpers and 35 mm DIN mounting rail (IEC/EN 60715).
bb Twisted wire with a braided shield, 300 V AC, 14 AWG - 2.5 mm2 / 22 AWG - 0.4 mm2.
B-11
 Select your Micrologic X control unit www.schneider-electric.com

Protections
Tripping curves

Micrologic 2.0 X Micrologic 5.0 X - 6.0 X - 7.0 X

DB419094.eps

DB419095.eps
B

Earth fault protection (Micrologic 6.0 X)

DB419096.eps

B-12
 www.schneider-electric.com
Select your Micrologic X control unit
Protections
Limitation curves

Voltage 380/415/440 V AC Voltage 660/690 V AC

Limited short-circuit current (k peak) Limited short-circuit current (k peak)
Masterpact
DB419098.eps

DB419099.eps
MTZ2 H3 Masterpact
Masterpact MTZ2 H3

B
MTZ2 H2 MTZ3 H1
MTZ3 H1 MTZ3 H2
Masterpact Masterpact
Masterpact MTZ2 H2
MTZ1 H3 Masterpact
MTZ2 L1 Masterpact
MTZ2 H1 MTZ2 H1
MTZ2 L1
Masterpact
MTZ1 H2
Masterpact Masterpact
MTZ1 H1 Masterpact MTZ1 H1
MTZ2 N1 MTZ1 L1 MTZ1 H2
MTZ2 N1

Masterpact
MTZ1 L1

Rated short-circuit current (kA rms) Rated short-circuit current (kA rms)

Voltage 380/415/440 V AC Voltage 660/690 V AC

Limited energy Limited energy
DB419100.eps

DB419101.eps

Masterpact Masterpact
MTZ2 H3 MTZ2 H3

Masterpact
Masterpact
MTZ2 L1
MTZ2 L1

Masterpact
MTZ1 L1 Masterpact
MTZ1 L1

Rated short-circuit current (kA rms) Rated short-circuit current (kA rms)

B-13
 Select your Micrologic X control unit www.schneider-electric.com

Measurement

Masterpact MTZ with its embedded current sensors and Micrologic X is a PMD-DD Power Meter Device complying
with IEC/EN 61557-12, Class 0.5 for voltage and current and Class 1 for active power and energy measurements.
For each measurement the accuracy is certified within a temperature range of -25 °C to 70 °C and takes into account
all the individual errors of the components included in the measuring chain.

B
DB421322.ai

Measures and electrical parameters calculated

by the Micrologic X control unit
Based on the measurement of line currents, neutral current, phase-to-phase voltages
DB421321.ai

and phase-to-neutral voltages, Micrologic X control unit calculates (according to IEC

61557-12, Equipment for testing, measuring or monitoring of protective measures - Part
12: Performance measuring and monitoring devices (PMD)) and displays all the
parameters required to monitor any AC electrical power system, including power quality,
power management and energy efficiency:
bb RMS values of currents and voltages,
bb Active, reactive and apparent powers,
bb Active, reactive and apparent energies,
bb Power factor,
bb W.A.G.E.S (Water, Air, Gas, Electricity, Steam) through digital inputs of I/O module,
bb Frequency,
bb Phase sequence,
bb Voltage unbalances, Current unbalances,
bb Current demands,
Current
Thermal demand
DB430727.ai

bb Total active, reactive and apparent power demands,

100 % bb THD of voltages, THD of currents.
90 % The calculation of current and power demands are performed in compliance with
IEC/EN 61557-12.
The current demand is calculated using the thermal method. The time constant of
0% integration is adjustable between 1 and 60 minutes, in steps of 1 minute.
Time The power demand is calculated using arithmetical integration of power RMS values
Time constant
of integration during a period of time divided by the length of the period. In Micrologic X the power
demand is calculated according to the sliding block method, with a sliding block of
Thermal demand calculation adjustable between 1 and 60 minutes, in steps of 1 minute.
Note: as defined by IEC 61557-12:
b A demand is the average value of a quantity over a specified period of time.
b Thermal current demand calculates the demand based on a thermal response, which mimics the
analog-type thermal demand meters.
b Power demands are calculated using arithmetical integration of power values during a period of
Demand value time divided by the length of the period. The result is equivalent to the energy accumulated during
DB430638.ai

Calculation updates is the average the period of time divided by the length of the period. The period of calculation can be fixed or
for last sliding.
completed Electrical values calculated by Micrologic X control units can be displayed on the
interval embedded HMI, a smartphone via Bluetooth, a PC running Ecoreach software and on
15 minute interval
the FDM128 display unit. They are refreshed every 2 seconds.The display on the
embedded HMI is accessed by means of a contextual menu allowing easy navigation
through the electrical values. Alternatively a Quickview option allows the main basic
Time values to be displayed.
(s) Micrologic X control units log and time stamp minimum and maximum values since last
reset of all relevant measurements (currents, voltages, frequency, active power, reactive
Sliding bock
power, apparent power, THDI, THDV...). For the complete list of measurements and min /
Demand calculated with a sliding block interval max values, see Micrologic X User guide. The maximum and minimum values are
resettable from the embedded display, a smartphone via Bluetooth or a PC running
Ecoreach software.
An optional external 24 V DC power supply or VPS module is required to process and
display measurements, including energy counters, for currents below 20 % of the rated
current .
The phase-to-neutral voltages are available for 4-pole and 3-pole circuit breaker as well
providing the connection of the VN terminal of Micrologic X to the neutral. To ensure the
accuracy for the active power measurement the connection of the VN terminal of
Micrologic X to the neutral is mandatory. Please refer to the user manual for more details
concerning the wiring and configuration of Micrologic X.

B-14
www.schneider-electric.com
Select your Micrologic X control unit
Measurement

Masterpact MTZ for energy management functions

B
Active Power and Energy metering in Masterpact MTZ with Micrologic X has been
designed and tested to provide excellent accuracy: Class 1 according to
IEC/EN 61557-12. This standard specifies requirements for combined performance
of measuring and monitoring devices that measure and monitor the electrical
parameters within electrical distribution systems. It covers both devices with external
sensors such as current and/or voltage transformers like stand alone power meter
(PMD-S) and devices with embedded sensors (PMD-D) like circuit breakers.
In addition a list of available performance class for all relevant measurement
functions is specified in IEC/EN 61557-12, in opposition to most other standards
such as IEC 62053-2x series that are dealing only with active and reactive energy.
Masterpact MTZ equipped with Micrologic X and its own embedded sensors
is a Class 1 full chain measurement PMD-DD device for active power and energy
metering according to IEC/EN 61557-12. It complies with the requirements of K70
temperature class according to Table 6 of IEC/EN 61557-12.
PMD-DD offer the benefit of avoiding uncertainty and variation due to external
sensors and wiring.
IEC/EN 61557-12 standard defines three levels of uncertainty (intrinsic uncertainty,
operating uncertainty, overall system uncertainty) that need to be checked to ensure
accuracy class.
The uncertainty is the estimated amount or percentage by which a measured value
may differ from the true value. According to IEC/EN 61557-12, the total uncertainty of
a measurement, in general, depends on the instrument, the environment, and other
elements to be considered.
Note: Requirements for Class 1 active power and energy in IEC/EN 61557-12 regarding limits
of uncertainty due to variation of the current for different power factor, and limits of uncertainty
due to influence quantities such as temperature are equivalent to IEC 62053-2x standards.

PMD-D - Embedded sensors

Intrinsic uncertainty Operating Overall system
PB115943_85.eps

Uncertainty under uncertainty uncertainty :

reference conditions + measurement No additional error
uncertainty for PMD-D
according to

+
0
IEC 61000-4-30
Variations due to
influence quantities
> More information, > More information,
see page B-16 see page B-17 PMD-D - Embedded sensors

PMD-S - External sensors

Intrinsic uncertainty Operating Overall system
PB112459_15.eps

Uncertainty under uncertainty uncertainty

PB111768_17.eps

+ measurement
+
reference conditions Uncertainty and
uncertainty variations due to
according to external sensors

+ +
IEC 61000-4-30 accuracy and to
impedance of wires
Variations due to PMD-S - External sensors
influence quantities

B-15
 Select your Micrologic X control unit www.schneider-electric.com

Measurement

Intrinsic uncertainty under reference condition

IEC/EN 61557-12 definition:
Intrinsic uncertainty is uncertainty of a measuring instrument when used under reference conditions.

B In this standard, it is a percentage of the measured value defined in its rated range and with the other influence
quantities under reference conditions.
For Masterpact MTZ with Micrologic X the main influence quantities are the current and the power factor.
The effect of all other influence quantities are less significant.
Masterpact MTZ1 MTZ2 MTZ3
Lowest value of the current at which the MTZ starts Ist = 0.4 %Ib 1.6 A 1.6 A 3.2 A
and continues to register
Lowest value of the current to ensure 5 %Ib 20 A 20 A 40 A
accuracy for Active Power and Energy y 1,5 %
Lowest value of the current to ensure accuracy for Active 10 %Ib 40 A 40 A 80 A
Power and Energy y 1 % with PF = 1
Lowest value of the current to ensure accuracy for Active 20 %Ib 80 A 80 A 160 A
Power and Energy y 1 % with PF = 0.5 Ind to 0.8 Cap
Value of the current for which the relevant performances Ib 400 A 400 A 800 A
of a direct connected PMD (PMD Dp) are fixed
Highest value of current at which the MTZ meets Imax 1600 A 4000 A 6300 A
the uncertainty requirements of this standard x1.2 x1.2 x1.2

Intrinsic uncertainty for Active Power and Energy versus current

DB419711.ai

No
load

Ist

1.5 %

1%

1.6 20 40 4000 Current (A)

Masterpact MTZ2 Standard Out of standard

Example: graph for Masterpact MTZ2

B-16
www.schneider-electric.com
Select your Micrologic X control unit
Measurement

Operating uncertainty
IEC/EN 61557-12 definition:
Operating uncertainty is uncertainty under the rated operating conditions.
IEC/EN 61557-12 specifies tests and uncertainty maximum variation according to various disturbances such as:
b ambient temperature T°,
b frequency, unbalance, harmonics and EMC.
B
For Masterpact MTZ with Micrologic X the main influence quantity is the temperature T°, as Masterpact MTZ is
designed to carry high current, the self heating combined with the ambient temperature induces a wide range of
operating temperature.
In Masterpact MTZ the measurement has been designed to offer high stability, within this range of temperature.

Effect of T° on Masterpact MTZ measurement performance

The variation of the temperature around the internal current transformer and Micrologic X processing the
measures is a challenge regardless of the ambient temperature, as the internal temperature variation between
the minimum current and the nominal current load could be around 90 °K. So the effect of the temperature on
accuracy of the measurement has been carefully managed to ensure an operating temperature between -25 and
70 °C.

DB419712.ai
Accuracy (%)

5
Uncertainty
4 min/max PF 1
3
Uncertainty
2 min/max PF 0.5
1
Masterpact MTZ
0 Masterpact MTZ
-1 Standard
-2
Out of standard
-3
-4
-5 Temperature (°C)
-25 -15 -5 0 5 15 25 35 45 55 65

Overall system uncertainty

IEC/EN 61557-12 definition:
Overall system uncertainty is uncertainty including the instrumental uncertainty of several separated instruments,
external sensors, external wiring between devices, etc. under the rated operating conditions.

For Masterpact MTZ the overall system uncertainty is non-existent thanks to PMD-DD design with the embedded
sensors.

B-17
 Select your Micrologic X control unit www.schneider-electric.com

Measurement

Effect of EMC and other disturbances on Masterpact MTZ measurement

performances
Thanks to other functions such as protection functions, Masterpact MTZ with Micrologic X offers by design a high
level of immunity to disturbances. Operating uncertainty is very low ensuring a Class 1 in a wide range of
B operating conditions. The table below summarizes standard requirements and Masterpact MTZ performance
regarding these influence quantities :
Influence quantity Table 9 IEC/EN 61557-12 PMD DD Cl 1 Masterpact
Additional uncertainty variation tolerance MTZ
Ambiant Temperature PF 1 0.05 % / °K < 0.01 % / °K
PF 0.5 Ind 0.07 %/°K < 0.01 % / °K
Auxiliary voltage power supply 24 V DC ±15 % 0.1 % 0%
Voltage PF 1: 80 % / 120 % Un 0.7 % 0%
PF 0,5 Ind: 80 % / 120 % Un 1% 0%
Frequency 49 Hz 51 Hz / 59 Hz 61 Hz PF 1 0.5 % 0%
49 Hz 51 Hz / 59 Hz 61 Hz PF 0.5 0.7 % 0%
Reversed phase sequence 1.5 % 0%
Voltage unbalance 0 to 10 % 2% 0%
Phase missing 1 or 2 phase missing 2% 0%
Harmonic in current and voltage Un: 10 % harmonic 5 0.8 % < 0.1 %
Imax: 20 % harmonic 5
Odd harmonic in current 3% < 0.1 %
Sub harmonic in current 3% < 0.1 %
Common mode voltage rejection 0 to 690 V / earth 0.5 % 0%
Permanent a.c magnetic induction, 0.5 mT IEC 61326 2% 0%
Electromagnetic RF fields IEC 61326 2% <1%
Conducted disturbances induced by RF fields IEC 61326 2% <1%

B-18
www.schneider-electric.com
Select your Micrologic X control unit
Measurement

Compliance with ISO 50001: Reliability and repeatability

over time of energy measurement
Scope and main requirements of ISO 50001:
ISO 50001 specifies requirements for systems and organization dedicated to energy management.
This international standard defines rules and gives recommendations to achieve continual improvement of energy
performance, including energy efficiency, energy use and consumption, measurements, documentation and
B
reporting. Energy performance shall be monitored and significant deviations shall be investigated. It implies that
the accuracy of the instruments used for this purpose remains stable thoughout their entire operating life which
ensures the repeatability of the measurements (ISO 50001, clause 4.6 and 4.6.1 Checking, monitoring,
measurement and analysis).

In Masterpact MTZ with Micrologic X , the metering and protection functions are designed to perform accurate
and repeatable measurements during Micrologic X life time, provided it's used in the specified environmental
conditions as defined in Masterpact Maintenance Guide. Current sensors and Micrologic X are calibrated during
circuit breaker manufacturing and are not supposed to be re-calibrated during this life time. In general, electronic
instrument measuring electric parameters don’t request any specific maintenance provided they are working
within environmental specifications. Accuracy can be reduced in case of operation under exceptional conditions,
lightning strikes, high temperature, high degree of humidity, this is why a periodic verification is recommended
(please refer to the annex I of the AFNOR Document FD X30-147: Metrological maintenance recommendations,
applicable to electrical and fluidic measurements).

Compliance with IEC 60364-8-1 Sub-clause 8.3.1.1 Requirement

on accuracy and measuring range
Scope and main requirements of IEC 60364-8-1:
IEC 60364-8-1 provides requirements and recommendations for the design, erection and verification of low
voltage electrical installations including local production and storage of energy for optimizing the overall efficient
use of electricity. It introduces recommendations for the design of an electrical installation within the framework of
an energy efficiency management approach in order to get low electrical energy consumption and acceptable
energy availability. It also specifies the accuracies of the measuring instruments involved in the functions of
energy management such as:
bb Energy usage analysis and optimization
bb Contract optimization
bb Cost allocation
bb Efficiency assessment
bb Energy usage trends assessment.
Masterpact MTZ with Micrologic X complies with the requirements of IEC 60364-8-1 dedicated to the optimization
of energy efficiency. It provides a range of measurements with accuracies required for complex energy efficiency
approaches.
The table below from IEC 60364-8-1:2014 Sub-clause 8.3.1.1 "Requirement on accuracy and measuring range"
specifies the accuracies required for the measurements dedicated to cost management

Masterpact MTZ main applications Intermediate Final distribution

Incomer Main LV distribution board
switchboard boards
Measurement bb Revenue metering bb Cost allocation bb Cost allocation bb Energy usage
objectives for cost bb Bill checking bb Energy usage bb Energy usage analysis and
management bb Energy usage analysis and analysis and optimization
analysis and optimization optimization bb Energy usage
optimization bb Efficiency bb Efficiency trends assessment
bb Contract assessment assessment
optimization bb Contract bb Contract
bb Regulatory optimization optimization
compliance bb Regulatory bb Regulatory
compliance compliance
Overall system In general, In general, In general, In general, reliable
accuracy of active excellent accuracy, good accuracy, medium accuracy, indication should be
energy e.g. Class 0.2 e.g. Class 0.5 e.g. Class 1 more important than
measurement to Class 1 to Class 2 to Class 3 accuracy

B-19
 Select your Micrologic X control unit www.schneider-electric.com

Measurement

Appendix: abstract of IEC/EN 61557-12

Electrical safety in low voltage distribution systems up to 1000 V AC and 1500 V DC, equipment testing,
measuring or monitoring of protective measures - Part 12: Performance measuring and monitoring devices
(PMD).

B According to this standard a PMD is a combination in one or more devices of several functional modules dedicated
to measuring and monitoring electrical parameters in energy distribution systems or electrical installations.
A PMD can be used in connection with sensors.

Current measurement Sensor operated PMD -  irect connected PMD -

D
Current sensors out of PMD Current sensors in PMD
Voltage measurement > PMD Sp > PMD Dp

Direct connected PMD - PMD-SD PMD-DD

> PMD pD Direct insertion:
Voltage sensors in PMD Semi-direct insertion
Masterpact MTZ
Sensor operated PMD - PMD-SS PMD-DS
> PMD pS
Voltage sensors out of PMD Indirect insertion Semi-direct insertion

PMD-DD: Masterpact MTZ with Micrologic X and embedded sensors

DB419713.ai

U
PF MCH
MN MX1 XF
MX2

SDE1
MC2
SDE2 UC4
UC3
UC2 /Res
UC1
COM

NW40

Ue
Icw
Icm
rpact
Maste HA10

Ui 1250V
Ue 1150V
Uimp
12kV

690/100
50kA/1s
105kA
0V

peak
z
50/60H NEMA
I
AS
60947-2CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE 55°C
UTE
Ie
Ith 4000A Ue
(A)
(V)
4000
1000
z
AC23A 50/60H
60947-3CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE
UTE

Aux
Power VPS

A
In 1000

Class of temperature: Table 6 of IEC/EN 61557-12

Masterpact MTZ
K55 temperature K70 temperature Kx [1] temperature
Class of PMD Class of PMD Class of PMD
Rated operating range -5 °C to +55 °C -25 °C to +70 °C Above +70 °C
(with specified uncertainty) and/or under -25 °C [2]
Limit range of operation -5 °C to +55 °C -25 °C to +70 °C Above +70 °C
(no hardware failures) and/or under -25 °C [2]
Limit range for storage and -25 °C to +70 °C -40 °C to +85 °C Acc. to manufacturer
shipping specification [2]
[1] Kx stands for extended conditions.
[2] Limits are to be defined by manufacturer according to the application.

B-20
www.schneider-electric.com
Select your Micrologic X control unit
Measurement

Smartphone
Range Range FDM Ecoreach
Type of measurement Symbol Accuracy Unit EHMI
min acc max acc 128 EIFE
IFE, IFM
Currents
RMS current of phases I1, I2, I3, Iavg ±0.5 % 40 [6] 4 000 x 1.2 [6] A B
Voltages
V12,V23,V31,
RMS phase-to-phase voltage ±0.5 % 208 690 x 1.2 V
VLL average
V1N, V2N, V3N, VLN
RMS phase-to-neutral voltage ±0.5 % 120 400 x 1.2 V
average [2]
Power and energy
Active power P1, P2, P3, Ptot ±1 % 5 10 000 (±) kW
Reactive power Q1, Q2, Q3, Qtot ±2 % 5 10 000 (±) kVAR
Apparent power S1, S2, S3, Stot ±1 % 5 10 000 kVA
Power factor PF ±0.02 -1 1
Power factor / Phase PF1, PF2, PF3 ±0.02 -1 1
Fundamental power factor
Cos φ ±0.02 -1 1
(cos φ or DPF)
Fundamental power factor Cos φ1, Cos φ2,
±0.02 -1 1
(cos φ or DPF) / Phase Cos φ3
Active Energy resetable [7]
Ep IN / OUT / total [3]
±1 % 0 10 000 000 kWh
Reactive Energy resetable [7] Eq IN / OUT / total [3] ±2 % 0 10 000 000 kVARh
Apparent Energy resetable [7] Es ±1 % 0 10 000 000 kVAh
Active Energy not resetable [8] Ep IN / OUT / total [3] ±1 % 0 10 000 000 kWh
Reactive Energy not resetable [8] Eq IN / OUT / total [3] ±2 % 0 10 000 000 kVARh
Apparent Energy not resetable [8] Es ±1 % 0 10 000 000 kVAh
W.A.G.E.S (Water, Air, Gaz, Electricity, Steam) with digital inputs of I/O module
Current and power demands
Current demands I1, I2, I3, IN, Iavg ±0.5 % 40 [6] 4 000 x 1.2 [6] A
Total active power demand Ptot ±1 % 5 10 000 (±) kW
Total reactive power demand Qtot ±2 % 5 10 000 (±) kVAR
Total apparent power demand Stot ±1 % 5 10 000 kVA
Power quality
Frequency F ±0.005 Hz 40 70 Hz
Phase sequence
Phase sequence NA 123 132 0-1
(0: a,b,c /1,2,3 - 1: a,c,b /1,3,2)
RMS current on neutral IN [1] ±1 % 40 [6] 4 000 [6] A
RMS current on ground current Ig ±5 % 40 [6]
4 000 [6]
A
IΔ (with
RMS current on earth leakage ±10 % 0.1 30 A
Micrologic 7.0 X)
THDI Current phase ITHD I1, I2, I3, Iavg Cl 5 [9] 0% 100 % [4] % [4] [5]

THDI I neutral ITHD IN [1] Cl 5 [9] 0% 100 % [4] % [4] [5]

THDV Phase to phase voltage VTHD V12,23,31, LLavg Cl 2 [9]

0% 20 % [4]
% [4] [5]

THDV phase-N voltages VTHD V1N,2N,3N, LNavg [2]

Cl 2 [9]
0% 20 % [4]
% [4] [5]

Current unbalance vs average

I_unbal 1,2,3, Iunbal (worst) +5 % 0% 100 % %
3 phase RMS currents
Phase to phase voltage
VLL_Unbal 12 23 31 unbal Cl 0.5 0% 10 % %
unbalance
Phase to Neutral voltage VLN_Unbal 1N, 2N 3N,
Cl 0.5 0% 10 % %
unbalance unbal [2]
[1] Neutral current available only with 4 poles circuit breakers or 3 poles circuit breakers with External Neutral Current Transformer (ENCT).
[2] Phase to neutral voltage available only with 4 poles circuit breakers or 3 poles with VN terminal connected to Neutral.
[3] IN+OUT or IN-OUT according to setting.
[4] THD is calculated refering to fundamental or RMS value. Available
[5] Detail per phase is not displayed on EHMI. Not available
[6] 40 to 1600 A x1.2 for MTZ1, 40 to 4000 A x1.2 for MTZ2, 80 to 6300 A x1.2 for MTZ3.
[7] With reset.
[8] Without reset.
[9] According IEC/EN 61557-12.
Note: Micrologic X log and time stamp minimum and maximum values since last reset of all relevant measurements. Main max values may be read on
embedded HMI (Currents, Voltages, Frequence, Ptotal, Qtotal, THDIavg, THDVavg,THDIN ...). For complete list of measurements and min / max values,
see Micrologic X control unit User guide.

B-21
 Select your Micrologic X control unit www.schneider-electric.com

Maintenance & diagnostics

Electrical power supply availability and reliability are the main critical issues affecting profitability and competitiveness.
Outage management focuses on preventing, detecting, locating and clearing of faults.
Operation and maintenance are mandatory to keep performance of electrical installations at the highest level and
to ensure that the system users are prepared to manage any crisis that arises.

B
The Micrologic X control units perform in real time a high level of diagnostics on Masterpact MTZ circuit breakers.
They generate and store appropriate warnings, alarms and messages to help the users with maintenance and
DB421333.ai

power restoration.
This function complies with the following end user values:
bb Prevent interruption of the power supply, to ensure continuity of operation, preserve the asset from any damage
and supports the safety of persons,
bb Reduce downtime resulting from an unexpected failure in the electrical distribution system, to be able to restart
as quickly as possible after a trip,
bb To keep the devices in good condition of operation and get them repaired correctly by qualified personnel in
case of breakdown or lack of maintenance,
bb Build the history and the traceability of all the interventions to improve the preventive maintenance and to
secure daily operation.

Prevention of power supply interruptions

Prevention of power supply interruptions is achieved by generation of warnings to the users, preventive
operations of maintenance, and anticipation of device replacement.
DB421334.ai

By means of dedicated features, Micrologic X monitors the health of the circuit breaker and generates appropriate
information to help the users in scheduling periodic checks and, if needed, anticipated replacement of devices.

Most of the active mechanical and electrical components of the breaker and the control unit itself are monitored.
Warnings and alarms are issued as soon as internal malfunctions or failures requiring the intervention of the
maintenance staff are detected.
The condition base maintenance is based on the monitoring of parameters characterizing the operation and the
performances of the circuit breaker (number of operations, closing and opening times for instance). When limit
values are reached or exeeded alarms and warnings are issued to advise operators to plan maintenance
interventions.
Micrologic X monitors several parameters which allow to estimate the ageing of the circuit breaker (e.g. load
profile, contact wear, end of life indicator for instance). Based on the values of these parameters, algorithms
identify if any maintenance or replacement is needed.

Prevent power Periodic checks and maintenance

Conditional checks
shutdown Predictive maintenance
optimize uptime Replacement anticipation

Restart quickly Locate the fault and identify the tripping causes
Retrieve all the fault information
after a trip Assistance to the power restoration
Reduce downtime Assistance to the breaker reclosing

Get the product Get spare parts

Warranty on components
repaired correctly Extension of warranty
Secure performance Preventive maintenance contract
Note: for more information please refer to
of the circuit breaker chapter H.

Note: for further details please refer to page B-24.

B-22
www.schneider-electric.com
Select your Micrologic X control unit
Maintenance & diagnostics

B
Restart Quickly after a trip

DB419581.ai
MICROLOGIC

The LEDs on the front of the Micrologic X control unit allow to quickly identify the tripping cause. All the relevant
information characterizing the fault may then be retrieved by means of mobile smartphone via either Bluetooth or
NFC.
Power restoration may be assisted by decision trees displayed on the smartphone. Reclosing of the circuit
breaker can be assisted by displaying information concerning the health of the circuit breaker (see page C-4).

Get the device repaired correctly

TRIP CAUSE
Ir Isd Ig

Micrologic X control unit includes dedicated facilities for maintenance assistance.

Op.
Ii I n

On request, the following information can be retrieved by the operators: 7.0 X

ID:
1989421527520002LV847604

bb serial number and composition of the circuit breaker, optional accessories installed on the circuit breaker,
references of the spare parts,
DISCONNECT BEFORE
DIELECTRIC TEST

bb type of failure or malfunction encountered with relevant information for maintenance assistance. In 1600 A

In addition, to ensure the level of performance of the circuit breaker, the three following services can be offered by
Schneider Electric: warranty on components, extension of warranty, maintenance contract.

Warning and alarms displays

DB419582.ai
MICROLOGIC

The Micrologic X control unit is equipped with a "Service" LED to alert the user to the overall health of the circuit
breaker. This LED, represented by a "wrench / spanner", can have 3 states:
bb Unlit LED: the unit is in good working order,
bb Orange LED: non-urgent intervention required (contact wear above 60 % for example),
bb Red LED: alert message that requires immediate intervention (contact wear above 100 %, failure of the tripping
chain, malfunction of the control unit for instance).
The messages processed and made available by the Micrologic X control unit to follow the level of availability
of the circuit breaker and plan the operations of maintenance are classified in three categories:
TRIP CAUSE
Ir Isd Ig Op.

bb Maintenance assistance,
Ii I n

bb Circuit breaker health state, 7.0 X

ID:
1989421527520002LV847604

bb Circuit breaker diagnostics.

The associated warnings and alarms are displayed on the embedded HMI. The warnings are displayed with
DISCONNECT BEFORE
DIELECTRIC TEST

an orange backlight, the alarm with a red backlight.

In 1600 A

The information is also accessible from a smartphone with Bluetooth or NFC wireless communication,
a PC running Ecoreach software, an FDM128 in Smart Panel, Ethernet through IFE and EIFE interfaces ,
Modbus SL through the IFM interface.
When the Micrologic X control unit is not energized only the trip alarms with their associated messages remain
accessible with a smartphone through NFC.

The various possibilities to display warnings, alarms and messages concerning the management of maintenance
and the health of the circuit breaker are summarized in the following table:
Micrologic X control unit energized Micrologic X
control unit
not
energized

Display Display Display on Ecoreach Display IFE/EIFE Display trip

DB421332.ai

on EHMI on EHMI smartphone software on web alarm on

Warning Alarm with USB FDM128 pages smartphone
Bluetooth connection with NFC

Orange
Warnings
BACKLIGHT
Red
Alarms
BACKLIGHT

B-23
 Select your Micrologic X control unit www.schneider-electric.com

Maintenance & diagnostics

Prevent power shutdown Restart quickly after a trip

Optimize uptime Reduce downtime

B Do prevention Diagnose trip

DB421446.ai

Inside Micrologic X:
Inside Micrologic X:
Conditional checks Alarms, events, counters, timers
Locate the fault EHMI back light screen & health
status LEDs
Note: Please refer to page B-25
to get details on conditional checks
Inside Micrologic X:
Identify the trip causes Trip cause indicators (LED) &
history trip messages on EHMI
Get alerted
preventively Relevant information saved
Retrieve trip during the trip available even
Inside Micrologic X & context data powerless (NFC + Bluetooth)
new "Wrench LED" & EHMI
Critical / Non critical back light with message, also
on Masterpact MTZ mobile App Retrieve waveform Waveform capture on trip event
capture on Masterpact MTZ mobile App
Product ID policy with S/N,
Identification QR code, BOM and product
code new features

For connected panel:

Proprietary connectivity
Communication means & ethernet (IFE, EIFE)
Digital Modules
For local connection:
NFC, bluetooth, USB
Restore power

Anticipate
replacement Be assisted to Power restoration assistant
power restoration on Masterpact MTZ mobile App

Inside Micrologic X:
Device ageing Wear contact & circuit breaker
Be assisted to reclose Masterpact operation
durability indication
the circuit breaker assistant on Masterpact MTZ
mobile App
Enhanced spare part policy
with compliance with safety
Spare parts availability
rules and available also in
Mypact

Training path courses level 2 3 4

Knowledge and as well available specific
elearning modules

Inside Masterpact MTZ:

Documentation QR code to download user
guide, instruction notices
and other additional features

B-24
www.schneider-electric.com
Select your Micrologic X control unit
Maintenance & diagnostics

Prevent power shutdown with conditional checks

Monitored functions & Logs Circuit breaker operation

Elect. Closing
function
Elect.
Opening
Tripping
function
B
function
bbXF voltage bbMX voltage bbTripping chain
release circuit release circuit continuity
continuity continuity (Ready LED)
bbMCH charging bbMN undervoltage bbTrip counter by
time release circuit Mitop (SDE)
bbClosing counter continuity bbTime stamped
bb“Time stamped” bbOpening counter tripping log
closing log bb“Time stamped”
bbMCH counter opening log
bbAlarm for failed (Electrical/
closing order mechanical)
bbAlarm for failed
opening order

Monitored functions & logs Fault detection on Micrologic X

External Micrologic X External

Sensors internal failure Communication
Disconnection failure
bbInternal Current bbASIC over temp bbBluetooth error
Transformers bbAsic internal bbEthernet Error
bbExternal Neutral failure communication
CT bbError reading (IFE)
bbVigi Sensor perform / Sensor bbI/O module
plug
bbInternal battery
bbTripping voltage
release (Mitop) not
detected

B-25
 Select your Micrologic X control unit www.schneider-electric.com

Event Management

From all the functions processed by Micrologic X a list of predefined events has been selected for user notification
of alarms, and traceability. All these events are time stamped and logged in non volatile memory.
For ease of use these events have been classified in seven families: Trip, protection, diagnostic, metering,
configuration, operation, and communication.

B
Definition and categories of events
In addition to their main action of tripping, measuring, and counting, Micrologic X
functions produce events available for alarm notification and history logging.

Event Number Event characteristics

history of events All events are time stamped and logged in non-volatile memory, they have two
Trip 50 characteristics
bb Event family: Trip, protection, diagnostic, measurement, configuration, operation,
Protection 100
communication
Diagnostic 300 bb Severity: High-level, medium-level, low-level events
Metering 300 They can be of two different types: occurence/completion or intantaneous, latched or
Configuration 100 unlatched.
Operation 300
Communication 100 Event logbooks
Each event is logged in a Micrologic X history according to its family
bb trip : Long-time trip, short-time trip, trip on internal failure ...
bb protection : Setting change, I > 90 % Ir Long time, change from set A to set B ...
DB421335.ai

bb diagnostic : Voltage release failure, low battery ...

bb metering : reset min/max, reset energy counters…
bb configuration : Digital module license …
bb operation : Opening, closing, alarm reset...
bb communication : Bluetooth enable ...
All events are logged regardless of their severity, including low-level events. Each
history has a predefined maximum size. When a history is full each new event
overwrites the oldest event, and other histories are left unchanged (FIFO).
For the complete list of events see Micrologic X user guide.

Event notification
bb High severity events generate pop-ups on embedded HMI with a red backlight
bb Medium severity events generate pop-ups on embedded HMI with an orange backlight.
bb On the FDM128 display unit they change the related pictogram colour to orange.
bb All events can be addressed individually or by group to digital output (M2C or I/O
module)
bb All events can trigger an email through EIFE or IFE communication interfaces.
bb High and medium severity active events can be read on the embedded HMI, a PC
DB421336.ai

or a smartphone
bb All the events logged in histories can be displayed on a PC with Ecoreach,
a smartphone or on the FDM128 display unit. They are displayed in chronological order.
They can be sorted according to the following selections: date and time, severity, or family.
bb Additionally, all the events logged in histories are accessible via Ethernet and
Modbus SL through the EIFE, IFE and IFM interfaces.

Event type and reset mode

They are two types of events:
bb Occurence / Completion events: These events have a beginning and an end
(for example Long-time pick-up and dropout).
bb Instantaneous events: These events have no duration (for example reception of
an opening order, breaker tripping or settings changes).
An event may be latched or unlatched:
bb A latched event does not reset automatically. It remains in held position after its
cause has disappeared until it is reset by the user.
bb An unlatched event is active while its cause is present and returns to inactive as
soon as its cause disappears or is resolved.
For latched events a reset action can be made from:
bb The test/reset button on the front face of the Micrologic X.
bb From a PC
bb From a smartphone
bb Via Ethernet and Modbus SL through the EIFE, IFE and IFM interfaces
A command from a PC, a Smartphone, Ethernet and Modbus SL resets all the held
events managed by Micrologic X.
B-26
 www.schneider-electric.com
Select your Micrologic X control unit
Event Management
DB430620.ai

Time Date
stamp Time

COM
UC1
SDE2 UC4
UC2 /Res
UC3
MC2
SDE1
MN MX1 XF
MX2
PF MCH

B
ed -20 H3
Discharg MTZ2

High
Event log Severity
ed
harg
Disc

Medium
Non volatile memory Level
Isd
Ig
I n
Op.

Low
TRIP CAUSE

Ir Ii

7.0 X
4

ID: 20002LV84760
19894215275

A
In 1600

Trip
NFC
Protection
Metering
Event
Diagnostic
Family
Operation
Configuration
Communication

PF MCH
MN MX1 XF
MX2

SDE1
MC2
SDE2 UC4
UC3
UC2 /Res
UC1
COM

ed -20 H3
Discharg MTZ2

Event
ed
harg
Disc

Isd
Ig
I n
Op.

notification
TRIP CAUSE

Ir Ii

7.0 X
04

ID: 20002LV8476
19894215275

A
In 1600

Switchboard or
Device Remote
technical room
24VDC

ETH2
ETH2
ETH1
ETH1

set)
(factory
.YY.ZZ
IFE-XX T
IFE 100/AC
LK/10-
lin'X ETH1 T
Ener 100/AC
LK/10-
ETH2
e Status
Modul
rk Status
Netwo
s-SL
Modbu

Test
02
LV4340

Embedded Display IFE EIFE IFM

or
MICROLOGIC
Modbus SL
Home
Quickview
MICROLOGIC

Home
Home
MICROLOGIC
FDM128
Quickview
Quickview
Measures Measures
Protection
! Measures
!
Alarms & H...
Alarms & H... Alarms
Maintenan...

Maintenan... OK
OK

Ethernet
OK

Internet
TRIP CAUSE

TRIP CAUSE

Ir Isd Ig Op.
Ir Isd Ig Op.
Ii I n Test Reset Ii I n Test Reset

7.0 X 7.0 X

ID: ID:
1989421527520002LV847604 1989421527520002LV847604
Cupcake ipsum dolor. Sit amet tiramisu.

@
MICROLOGIC MICROLOGIC

@
DISCONNECT BEFORE DISCONNECT BEFORE
DIELECTRIC TEST DIELECTRIC TEST Cupcake ipsum dolor. Sit amet tiramisu. 00 00 00 00

123 123 123 123

TRIP CAUSE

Ir Isd Ig Op. In 1600 A In 1600 A 456 456 456 456

Ii I n 00 00 00 00

Cupcake ipsum dolor sit amet 789

123 123 123 123

Cupcake ipsum dolor sit amet 456

456 456 456 789

7.0 X
ID:
1989421527520002LV847604
POWER

0V
100-23
POWER

POWER

DISCONNECT BEFORE
DIELECTRIC TEST
200
Com’X
TRIP CAUSE

Ir Isd Ig
TRIP CAUSE

Op. Ir Isd Ig
Ii I n Test Reset Op.
Ii I n Test Reset
Cupcake ipsum dolor. Sit amet tiramisu.

In 1600 A 7.0 X

@
7.0 X

ID:
1989421527520002LV847604 ID:

Com’X
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

1989421527520002LV847604

Micrologic X
123 123 123 123 123 123 123 123

456 456 456 456 Cupcake ipsum dolor sit amet 456

Cupcake ipsum dolor sit amet 789 456 456 456 789
DISCONNECT BEFORE
DIELECTRIC TEST DISCONNECT BEFORE
DIELECTRIC TEST

Digital Output
In 1600 A
In 1600 A

I6
C
I5
I4
C
I3
I2
C
I1
+
24VDC

A1

O1
I1

NFC
O2
I2
O3
I3
APP
I4
I5
I6

063
LV434

IO
T2
O3 T1
34
O2 33
24
O1 23
14
13

M2C IO Module

Masterpact MTZ mobile App

B-27
 Select your Micrologic X control unit www.schneider-electric.com

Power supply

Micrologic X is a self-powered protection control unit. The basic functions of protection (LSIG)do not require any power
supply. Below 20 % of the rated current a 24 V dc supply or the VPS module is needed to ensure the proper operation and
all the specified performances of Micrologic X for the measurement, diagnosis, display and communication functions.

B Micrologic X is equipped with a robust internal power supply as well as various alternative external power supplies
to cover the needs in any situation.
Micrologic X control unit combines five possible sources of supply:
bb The internal currents provided by the embedded current transformers,
bb The internal voltages through the VPS module, up to 600 V AC,
bb An external 24 V DC power supply,
bb A PC supply via the mini USB port,
bb An external portable battery connected to the mini USB port.
When the currents are higher than 20 % of the rated current, the internal current supply ensures the proper
operation of the Micrologic X control unit.
This includes:
bb The accurate performance of the protection functions, i.e. Long-time overload protection, Short-time short
circuit protection, Instantaneous short circuit protection, Earth fault protection
bb All the measures with the accuracies specified page B-21 of this catalogue
bb The diagnosis
bb The HMI (Embedded display and key pad)
bb The wireless features (Bluetooth and proprietary connectivity).
When the currents fall below 20 % of the rated current, the internal current supply is not enough to ensure the
proper operation of the Micrologic X control unit.
The internal voltage supply through the VPS module or an external 24 V DC power supply is required to ensure
the operation of all the functions processed by Micrologic X with the specified performances.
The following 24 V DC supplies are recommended
bb The external 24 V DC power supply (AD) with or without an additional battery module
bb The Universal Phaseo ABL8 RPS 24050 (24 V DC, 5 A , 120 W) or ABL8 RPS 24030 (24 V DC, 3 A, 72 W)
power supplies.
The input voltage of the VPS module is limited to 600 V. The module is directly connected to the internal pick up
voltage on the bottom side of the circuit breaker. For voltage above 600 V the VPS module shall be supplied from
an external voltage by means of the PTE option and voltage transformers.
The external voltage can be picked up either from the top or the bottom side of the circuit breaker.
The Micrologic X voltage inputs used for the voltage and power measurements are limited to 690 V, taking into
account the maximum input voltage of the VPS module. The PTE option with external voltage transformers shall
consequently be selected for the following situations:
bb Applications > 690 V without VPS module
bb Applications >600 V with VPS module.
To maintain the operation of the earth leakage protection for any load situations, the Micrologic 7.0 X is delivered
with the VPS power supply module.
When the circuit breaker is open or not energized after tripping or during setting, commissioning, testing or
maintenance, the VPS module is not supplied. The possible solutions to supply power to the Micrologic X are
the following:
bb An external 24 V DC
bb A PC through the mini USB port
bb An external mobile portable battery connected on the mini USB port .
Micrologic X is also equipped with an internal unit battery dedicated to the supply of the trip cause LEDs and the
internal real-time clock. It allows the user to read and identify the trip cause when the breaker trips .The battery is
lithium type with a service life of approximately ten years. The battery condition can be checked by pressing the
test button on the front of the Micrologic X control unit. An alarm is issued when the voltage of the battery reaches
its low level.
When EIFE, IFE or IFM communication modules, I/O modules or FDM128 display unit are installed, an external
24 V DC power supply is mandatory to supply power to these devices.
The XF, MX, MN, XF diag&com, MX diag&com, MN diag voltage release and the electric motor MCH require a
power supply separate from the Micrologic X power supply.
The optional protections provided by the optional digital modules require the Micrologic X control unit to be
supplied by an external 24 V DC power supply.

B-28
www.schneider-electric.com
Select your Micrologic X control unit
Power supply

Recommended selection of alternative power sources

B
in different situations
Situation Purpose VPS External PC Portable
24 V DC supply Battery
power
supply
When the circuit Ensure the performance
breaker is of protections,
energized, but the measurements,
current is below communication,
20 % of the rated diagnosis, HMI, wireless
current features
When the circuit Retrieve information
breaker is opened through Micrologic HMI
or not energized Retrieve information
through Bluetooth
During setting, Perform all relevant
commissioning, actions
testing and
maintenance
When IFE/EIFE, Power these devices
I/O, IFM or
FDM128
are installed
Note: Please refer to accessory chapter for more details concerning VPS module,
external 24 V DC supply, portable battery
Micrologic X EIFE IFE I/O module FDM128
without with
M2C/ M2C/ Circuit breaker

DB421352.ai
ESM ESM top side
Power 250 300 100 150 165 283
comsumption Voltage
transformer
(mA) 24 V DC

Voltage measurement inputs PTE

option
The PTE option can be connected either on the top side or on the bottom side of the
circuit breaker.
The power source can indifferently be connected on the top side or on the bottom
side of the circuit breaker. or Micrologic X
Consequently, when the power source and the PTE option are connected on the
same side of the circuit breaker, the Micrologic X control unit is energized as soon as
the power source is live, whatever the position of the circuit breaker (open or closed). Internal
bottom VPS
The possible VT ratios are the following: connection
bb primary range:
vv Min value: 100 V
vv Max value 1250 V Circuit breaker
bb secondary range: bottom side
vv Min value: 100 V Note: PTE option connected on the top side of the circuit
vv Max value: 690 V. breaker. It can also be connected on the bottom side.
vv recommended values: 220-400 V
bb Power u 10 VA.

B-29
 Select your Micrologic X control unit www.schneider-electric.com

B-30
www.schneider-electric.com

Customize your Micrologic X

with digital modules

Overview of digital modules................................................C-2

ANSI 27/59 - Under/Over voltage protection ................C-4
ANSI 32P - Reverse active power protection.................C-5
ANSI 51N/51G - Ground-fault alarm ................................C-6
ERMS. Energy Reduction Maintenance Settings..........C-7
Energy per phase.....................................................................C-8
Individual harmonics analysis ............................................C-9 C
Power restoration assistant .............................................. C-10
Masterpact operation assistant ...................................... C-11
Waveform capture on trip event ..................................... C-12
Modbus legacy dataset....................................................... C-13

Other chapters
Select your circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors.............................. A-1
Select your Micrologic X control unit........................................................... B-1
Customize your circuit breaker with accessories........................................D-1
Integrate in Smart panels - Architecture and systems................................ E-1
Integrate in switchboard............................................................................. F-1
Integrate in special applications - Source-changeover systems.................G-1
Services......................................................................................................H-1
Order your circuit breaker............................................................................ I-1

C-1
 Customize your control unit with digital modules www.schneider-electric.com

Overview of digital modules

10 optional digital modules to digitally > Go to GoDigital

customize Micrologic X. Optional digital

modules can be purchased through
GoDigital open 24/7.
C GoDigital allows you to purchase optional digital modules to customize your
Micrologic X control units that have already been installed in Masterpact MTZ circuit
breakers. The proposed digital modules are dedicated to optional protections,
measurement and Maintenance & diagnostics functionalities.
With GoDigital open 24/7, Panel Builders have the flexibility to further customize the
Micrologic X features at the last minute before commissioning the switchboard.
Electrical contractors and facility managers can upgrade the install base during
operational phase of product life cycle, according to new requirements, anytime,
without changing the hardware or disrupting operations.
The Micrologic X control unit firmware greater than or equal V002.000.XXX is
compatible with the 10 proposed digital modules.
The Micrologic X control unit firmware V001.000.XXX support only the Power
restoration assistant, the Masterpact operation assistant, the Energy per phase and
the Waveform capture on trip event. It needs to be upgraded to be compatible with
the other digital modules.
DB421338.ai

MICROLOGIC

Home
Quickview
Measures

! Alarms & H...

Maintenan...

OK
TRIP CAUSE

Ir Isd Ig Op.
Ii I n

7.0 X
ID:
1989421527520002LV847604

DISCONNECT BEFORE
DIELECTRIC TEST

In 1600 A Maintenance
Protection Measurement
& diagnostics

C-2
www.schneider-electric.com
Customize your control unit with digital modules
Overview of digital modules

Maintenance
Protection Measurement
& diagnostics

Secure uptime,
Increase people Monitor energy
plan maintenance and
& property protection & power quality reduce downtime C
Optional protections Cost Management Power outage

 NSI 27/59 - Under/Over voltage

A  nergy per Phase
E  ower restoration assistant
P
> see page C-5 > see page C-9 > see page C-11

 NSI 32P - Reverse active power

A Power Quality  asterpact operation assistant
M
> see page C-6 > see page C-12
Individual harmonics analysis
 NSI 51N/51G - Ground fault
A > see page C-10  ave form capture on trip event
W
alarm > see page C-13
> see page C-7
Communication
 RMS - Energy Reduction
E
 odbus legacy dataset
M
Maintenance Settings
> see page C-14
> see page C-8

C-3
 Customize your control unit with digital modules www.schneider-electric.com

Optional protections

The Micrologic X control unit can be customized with optional protections at any time, without operation disruption
and without additional hardware.
The optional protections: undervoltage, overvoltage, reverse active power, ground-fault alarm and Energy Reduction
Maintenance Settings allow to improve the monitoring and the operation of electrical networks. They are generally
used in abnormal or critical situations to initiate appropriate actions to safeguard the operation of electrical
installations.

Optional protections are available whatever the type of Micrologic X control unit
selected. These protections require the Micrologic X control unit to be supplied by an
external 24 V DC power supply.
C Each optional protection has the following protection settings parameters :
bb ON/OFF
ON: Protection is enabled
OFF: Protection is disabled
PB119220.eps

bb Trip/Alarm
Trip : tripping order shall be sent to the tripping voltage release in order to open the
breaker
Alarm: no tripping order, alarm only
bb Inhibition disable/Inhibition enable
Inhibition disable: optional protection cannot be inhibited
Inhibition enable: optional protection can be inhibited by using an input of the IO
module. The inhibition inhibits all the optional protections that have the inhibition
setting enabled.
An adjustable time-delay is associated with each protection.
The time-delay starts as soon as the protection picks up.
Each optional protection generates the following events:
bb When set in “alarm” mode:
vv Start event when the protection picks up
vv Operate event when its associated time-delay elapses
bb When set in “trip” mode:
vv Start event when the protection picks up
vv Operate event when its associated time-delay elapses
vv Trip order event when the circuit breaker tripping voltage release (MITOP) activates.
The start event is generated even if the protection is inhibited. The operate event and
the trip order event are generated only when the protection is not inhibited.
Each optional protection can be set as follows:
bb From a smartphone via Bluetooth
bb From a PC running Ecoreach.

C-4
 www.schneider-electric.com
Customize your control unit with digital modules
ANSI 27/59 - Under/Over voltage protection

The voltage in electrical installations must be maintained between a minimum value and a maximum value, generally
the rated operating voltage ±10 %. Out of these limits the operation and performance of the loads may be deeply
affected. Undervoltage and overvoltage protections (ANSI codes 27 and 59 respectively) allow the system voltage
to be permanently monitored. If the voltage level of an installation goes out of its acceptable limits, the information
delivered by the protections 27 and 59 can be used to initiate appropriate action to restore good operating conditions
in the installation.

Description
For each undervoltage protection, ANSI code 27 and overvoltage protection, ANSI code 59, we can choose to monitor
either the three phase-to-phase voltages V12, V23, V31, or the three phase-to-neutral voltages V1N, V2N, V3N.
The selection applies for both under and over voltage protections. It is not possible to select phase-to-phase voltages C
for undervoltage monitoring and phase-to-neutral voltages for overvoltage monitoring and vice versa. For each
protection there are two independent elements: 27-1, 27-2 and 59-1, 59-2 respectively. For 27-1 and 59-1 the protection
picks up when one of the three monitored voltages reaches its upper or lower limit. For 27-2 and 59-2 the protection
picks up when the three monitored voltages have reached their upper or lower limit. Under and overvoltage protections
operate according to a definite time characteristic. One adjustable time-delay is associated to each of the four elements
27-1, 27-2, 59-1, 59-2. The time-delay starts as soon as the protection picks up. Each element generates the start,
operate and trip events as described page C-4 . When the undervoltage protection is set in tripping mode, the voltage
measurement must be performed on the power source side to allow the circuit breaker closing. As standard, the
Micrologic X voltage input is directly connected to the internal pickup voltage on the bottom side of the circuit breaker.
Consequently:
bb if the circuit breaker is bottom-fed, the internal pickup voltage is suitable for undervoltage protection and circuit
breaker closing.
bb if the circuit breaker is top-fed, an external voltage input is required. The PTE option must be selected to perform the
voltage measurement on the power source side.
The protection trips when:
bb the value of voltage exceeds the setting
bb the associated timer is elapsed.

Benefits
The information given by the protections is used to generate alarms and when required, circuit breakers tripping.
The undervoltage and overvoltage are suitable for generator protection.
The permanent monitoring of phase-to-phase or phase-to-neutral voltages enables appropriate action to be initiated to
safeguard the operation of the installation during abnormal or critical situations, for example: load shedding, source
change-over, and emergency generator starting.

Micrologic 2.0 X - 5.0 X - 6.0 X - 7.0 X

Under Voltage ANSI Code 27
27-1 Voltage setting (V) Accuracy: ±0.5 % 20 to 1200 V by step of 1 V
V12,V23,V31 or V1N,V2N,V3N
Protection picks up when one of the three monitored voltages reaches the setting
Time setting Max breaking time: 140 ms 0 to 300 s, by step of 0.01s
(with time delay set to 0) accuracy: ±2 %
DB430643.eps

V 27-2 Voltage setting (V) Accuracy: ±0.5 % 20 to 1200 V by step of 1 V

V12,V23,V31 or V1N,V2N,V3N
Protection picks up when the three monitored voltages have reached the setting
Time setting Max breaking time: 140 ms 0 to 300 s, by step of 0.01s
(with time delay set to 0) accuracy: ±2 %

Micrologic 2.0 X - 5.0 X - 6.0 X - 7.0 X

Over Voltage ANSI Code 59
59-1 Voltage setting (V) Accuracy: ±0.5 % 20 to 1200 V by step of 1 V
DB430644.eps

V12,V23,V31 or V1N,V2N,V3N
Protection picks up when one of the three monitored voltages reaches the setting
Time setting Max breaking time: 140 ms 0 to 300 s, by step of 0.01 s
(with time delay set to 0) accuracy: ±2 %

V 59-2 Voltage setting (V) Accuracy: ±0.5 % 20 to 1200 V by step of 1 V

V12,V23,V31 or V1N,V2N,V3N
Protection picks up when the three monitored voltages have reached the setting
Time setting Max breaking time: 140 ms 0 to 300 s, by step of 0.01 s
(with time delay set to 0) accuracy: ±2 %

C-5
 Customize your control unit with digital modules www.schneider-electric.com

ANSI 32P - Reverse active power protection

In case of loss of its prime mover (steam turbine, gas turbine or diesel engine), a synchronous power generator
connected to an external network or operating in parallel with other generators becomes a synchronous motor
and drives the prime mover with a potential risk of mechanical damage. The reverse active power protection (ANSI
code 32 P) is used to detect such abnormal operating conditions and to disconnect the generator from other power
sources. The reverse active power protection can also be used to monitor the amount of active power exchanged
between two parts of an electrical network, with associated alarms, load shedding or tripping as soon as the flow of
active power in the selected direction exceeds the set value.

Description
C The Reverse active power protection calculates the active power with the RMS
values of the voltages and currents. A timer is associated with the protection.
The positive sign of the active power is defined by setting. The same sign is used for
active power measurement. By default the Micrologic X assigns the sign + to the
PB119222_L63.eps

active power when the transit of the active power circulates from the top to the
bottom of the circuit breaker. This assumes that the power supply feeding the
installation is connected to the top of the circuit breaker (top- fed breaker).
The sign – is assigned when the transit circulates from the bottom to the top of the
circuit breaker. When the power supply is connected to the bottom of the circuit
breaker (bottom- fed breaker) the sign assigned by default (power sign parameter)
must be changed with Ecoreach software.
The protection trips when:
bb the active power is negative
bb the value of active power exceeds the setting
bb the timer is elapsed
The recommended settings are 2 % to 6 % of the rated power for turbines
and 8 % to 15 % for diesel engines

Benefits
Monitoring of the mode of operation of a synchronous power generator connected to
an external network or running in parallel with other generators.
Tripping as soon as the generator operates as a synchronous motor, driving its prime
mover.
Monitoring of the active power exchanged between separate parts of an electrical
network.

Micrologic 2.0 X - 5.0 X - 6.0 X - 7.0 X

Q Reverse active power ANSI Code 32P
DB430645.eps

Active power Accuracy: ±10 % 50kW to 5000 kW by step of 10 kW

Time setting Max breaking time: 140 ms 0 to 300 s, by step of 0.05 s
(with time delay set to 0)
accuracy: ±2 %
-Ps Ps

C-6
www.schneider-electric.com
Customize your control unit with digital modules
ANSI 51N/51G - Ground-fault alarm

A phase- to- earth fault can be the result of the slow degradation of an insulating component of electrical equipment
or the presence of a foreign body inside the equipment. For such events the fault resistance can be significantly high-
enough to maintain the earth fault current below the settings of the phase- to- earth fault protections. No tripping
occurs and, the installation remains energized with a potential risk of local over-heating and damage. The - Earth
fault alarm and earth-leakage alarm with appropriate settings can pick up such critical resistive earth- fault, allowing
the maintenance staff to take appropriate action to restore good operating conditions in the installation .

Description
The earth fault alarm and earth-leakage alarm functions operate as the earth fault
and earth-leakage protections, using the same sensors. They are, however,
C
independent from these protections and have their own settings.
When the Ground-fault alarm digital module is installed in Micrologic 2.0 X,

PB119221_63.eps
Micrologic 5.0 X or Micrologic 6.0 X control units, the earth fault alarm is
automatically activated. When installed in the Micrologic 7.0 X control unit,
the earth-leakage alarm is automatically activated.
The earth fault current is detected in two ways:
bb by summation of either the three phase currents or the three phase currents and
the neutral;
bb by means of the external sensor SGR installed on the link connecting to the earth
the neutral point of the power transformer feeding the installation. The SGR sensor
must be connected to the Micrologic X control unit through the MDGF interface
module.
The earth-leakage current is detected by means of the rectangular sensor
encompassing the three phases or the three phases and the neutral.

Benefits
Early detection of resistive earth-faults with fault currents increasing slowly up to the
settings of the phase-to-earth fault protections.
The alarms allow the maintenance staff to take appropriate action at the right time in
order to safeguard the installation.

Micrologic 2.0 X - 5.0 X - 6.0 X

Earth fault alarm ANSI Code 51N
Pick up (A) Accuracy: ±10 % Ig = 0.2 In to In by step of 1A
Time setting 1 to 10 s by step of 0.1 s

Micrologic 7.0 X
Earth leakage alarm ANSI Code 51G
Sensitivity (A) Accuracy: Complies with IΔn = 0.5 to 30 A by step of 0.1 A
IEC/EN 60947-2 Annex B
Time setting 1 to 10 s by step of 0.1 s

C-7
 Customize your control unit with digital modules www.schneider-electric.com

ERMS - Energy Reduction Maintenance Settings

Under specific circumstances, qualified professionals may need to access and work near energized equipment to
perform testing, troubleshooting, and diagnostics. They are thereby subject to the risk of internal arc fault which is
a growing concern. Current research shows that up to 80% of reported electrical injuries are caused by an electrical
arc. In this context, the safety of personnel working on electrical power distribution systems has received increasing
attention from a number of regulatory organizations in recent years [1].
Masterpact MTZ circuit breakers with the “Energy Reduction Maintenance Settings” digital module provide an answer
to this issue. The ERMS function, when engaged , allows the Micrologic X control unit to operate faster.
Should an internal arc fault occurs downstream to Masterpact MTZ , the reduced fault clearing time allows a decrease
in the amount of energy generated by the electrical arc, and may limit the risk of injury.

C Description
The ERMS function is used to reduce the LSIG protection settings in order to trip
faster when an internal arc fault occurs. It is acknowledged as one of the recognized
MICROLOGIC MICROLOGIC

solutions to improve the protection of workers against internal arc-fault caused by

faulty electrical equipment, abnormal environmental conditions, lack of maintenance,
DB430646.ai

ingress of mice. It complies with the recommendations issued by the regulatory

organisations [1] dealing with this concern.
As soon as the ERMS digital module is installed on Micrologic X control unit, the
ERMS function is enabled, but not engaged. Additional steps are then required to set
the appropriate ERMS LSIG settings and to engage the ERMS function.
ERMS settings is an additional LSIG tripping curve in addition to dual settings.
ERMS LSIG settings can be customized on site by means of a smartphone via
Bluetooth, or with Ecoreach software running on a PC. Customization of ERMS
settings with Ecoreach software or a smartphone is password-protected.
TRIP CAUSE

As soon as ERMS is engaged, the ERMS LSIG factory settings are automatically
TRIP CAUSE

Ir Isd Ig Op. Ir Isd Ig Op.

Ii I n Test Reset Ii I n Test Reset

7.0 X 7.0 X replaced by the ERMS LSIG customized settings:

ID:
1989421527520002LV847604
ID:
1989421527520002LV847604
ERMS can be engaged/disengaged through the Masterpact MTZ Mobile App (there
is a digital lock between MTZ Mobile App and Micrologic X control unit). ERMS can
DISCONNECT BEFORE DISCONNECT BEFORE
also be engaged/ disengaged through an external lockable selector switch with the
DIELECTRIC TEST DIELECTRIC TEST
additional dedicated ESM hardware module (ERMS Switch Module) [3].
In 1600 A In 1600 A When ERMS is engaged, the corresponding information is made available as
follows:
bb on the Micrologic X front face with the ERMS blue LED
ERMS Range Factory bb on the Micrologic X embedded display with the blue backlight
settings settings bb on an external light with the additional dedicated ESM hardware module
[2] bb on a PC with Ecoreach software
bb through the customer communications network (Ethernet or Modbus SL)
Ir ERMS Same as L protection In
tr ERMS Same as L protection 0.5
Isd ERMS Same as S protection 1.5 ir
Benefits
The ERMS function complies with the regulations concerning the protection of
tsd ERMS Same as S protection 0 personnel against the effects of internal arc fault, when under specified condition
li ERMS Same as I protection 2 it becomes necessary to work close to, or in the vicinity of, energized electrical
Ii ERMS Same as I protection fast equipment.
operating ERMS engaged status is visible at a distance thanks to the Micrologic X HMI blue
time backlight. ERMS can be engaged/disengaged with your personnal smartphone.
Ig ERMS Same as G protection 0.2 [1]
tg ERMS Same as G protection 0 b NEC Section 240.87 – Acceptable Methods for Arc Energy Reduction
b NFPA 70E: National Fire Protection Association. Standard for Electrical Safety in the
Workplace where there are recognized hazardeous situations when working on energized
electrical equipment.
DB421316.ai

b IEEE 1584: Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations provides guidelines for
conducting a formal arc flash study
b EN 50 110-1: Operation of electrical installations - General requirements
[2] ERMS LSIG factory settings.
[3] When the ESM hardware module is used, the M2C programmable contacts cannot be
installed.

C-8
 www.schneider-electric.com
Customize your control unit with digital modules
Energy per phase

The energy per phase digital module enables the analysis of energy consumption per phase. It is especially
recommended for low voltage installations having a large amount of unbalanced loads.

Description
At the point of measurement, this function allows to calculate and to display the
imported and exported energy on each phase of the network. It calculates and
displays active, reactive and apparent energy per phase. It also provides the total
active, reactive and apparent energy per phase.

Benefits
Follows energy per phase when having large amount of unbalanced loads in low
C
voltage installations, or when different usages or tenants are supplied on each
phase.

Note: Energy per phase digital module can be installed on 4 poles Masterpact MTZ circuit
breaker or 3 poles circuit breaker as well with the neutral connected to the VN terminal of
Micrologic X and ENVT=Y configuration.
DB421339.ai

MICROLOGIC

Home
Quickview
Measures

! Alarms & H...

Maintenan...

OK
TRIP CAUSE

Ir Isd Ig Op.
Ii I n

7.0 X
ID:
1989421527520002LV847604

DISCONNECT BEFORE
DIELECTRIC TEST

In 1600 A

Type of measurement Symbol Accuracy Range Range Unit EHMI FDM128 Ecoreach
min acc max acc Smartphone
EIFE
IFE, IFM
Active energy IN per phase Ep IN, phase 1, 2, 3 ± 1% 0 10,000,000 kWh
Active energy OUT per phase Ep OUT, phase 1, 2, 3 ± 1% 0 10,000,000 kWh
Total active energy per phase [1]
Ep phase 1, 2, 3 ± 1% 0 10,000,000 kWh
Reactive energy IN per phase Eq IN, phase 1, 2, 3 ± 2% 0 10,000,000 kVARh
Reactive energy OUT per phase Eq OUT, phase 1, 2, 3 ± 2% 0 10,000,000 kVARh
Total reactive energy per phase [1]
Eq phase 1, 2, 3 ± 1% 0 10,000,000 kVARh
Total apparent energy per phase Es phase 1, 2, 3 ± 1% 0 10,000,000 kVAh
[1] IN+OUT or IN-OUT according to setting.
Available
Not available

C-9
 Customize your control unit with digital modules www.schneider-electric.com

Individual harmonics analysis

Harmonic pollution in electrical systems is generated by non-linear loads, for example, power electronic equipment
(drives, motor starters, rectifiers, UPS), computers and data processing equipment, arc furnaces, welding machines,
lighting (discharge lamps, fluorescent lamps). The harmonics have instantaneous and long-term effects.
The instantaneous effects include for example :
b Disturbance of the operation of power electronic equipment,
b Generation of pulsating mechanical torques, vibrations and noise in asynchronous motors,
b Additional errors in metering devices,
b Interference on communication and control circuits.
The long-term effects include mainly:
b Additional losses and heating in power transformers, rotating machines, capacitors and power cables,
b Mechanical fatigue and premature aging of motors.
C The effects of harmonics always have an economic impact resulting from the additional costs linked to:
b Degradation of the performance of electrical installations
b Degradation in the energy efficiency due to increased losses
b Premature aging and oversizing of the electrical equipment.
The limit values below are taken into account by EMC standard IEC 61000-2-4:
THDV < 5% Insignificant deformation of the voltage waveform: No significant risk of malfunction.
5% < THDV < 8% Significant deformation of the voltage waveform: Risk of over-heating and malfunction.
THDV > 8% Major deformation of the voltage waveform: Very high risk of malfunction if the installation has not been
specifically calculated and sized with this restriction in mind.
The Individual harmonics analysis digital module allows real-time monitoring of harmonics affecting the voltages
and currents of an electrical power system. If harmonic pollution reaches unacceptable limits it helps you to select
appropriate corrective solutions.

Description
THDV and THDI are available as standard. Individual harmonics of voltages and
currents up to rank 40 are available with the Individual harmonics analysis digital
module. They are calculated by the Micrologic X control unit according to the
measurements methods specified in IEC 61000-4-30 (Testing and measurement
techniques - Power quality measurement methods). The calculation of individual
harmonics is performed every 200 ms. Micrologic X control units provide the average
aggregated values of individual harmonics calculated on a time period of 3 s.

Benefits
"Individual harmonics analysis at a glance" on your smart phone.
Easy share with a remote expert thanks to the share function on the smartphone.
Remote individual harmonics analysis thanks to EcoStruxure Power Services.
Real-time monitoring of harmonic pollution enabling appropriate decisions to be
made when unacceptable levels are reached:
bb Deep investigation, based on measurements and recordings
bb Dedicated studies
bb Installation of passive filters
bb Installation of active filters.

Type of measurement Symbol Accuracy Range Range Unit EHMI FDM128 Smartphone
min acc max acc IFM EIFE
Ecoreach IFE
Harmonics of currents
I1, I2, I3, IN Cl II [2] 40 [1] 4000 x 1.2 [1] A
up to rank 40
Harmonics of phase to phase
V12, V23, V31 Cl II [2] 208 690 x 1.2 V
voltage up to rank 40
Harmonics of phase to neutral
V1N, V2N, V3N Cl II [2]
120 400 x 1.2 V
voltage up to rank 40
[1] 40 to 1600 A x1.2 for MTZ1, 40 to 4000 A x1.2 for MTZ2, 80 to 6300 A x1.2 for MTZ3.
[2] According IEC/EN 61000-4-7. Available
Not available

C-10
 www.schneider-electric.com
Customize your control unit with digital modules
Power restoration assistant

Embedded intelligence in LV circuit breakers may help the user to recover the supply in a quick and safe manner.
The optional digital modules dedicated to power restoration and Masterpact operation bring assistance to operators
for fault analysis and reduction of the consequences of power outages.

Description
The function aims to assist maintenance operator on power restoration procedure,
The true cost of
by displaying information on the event and the circuit breaker. It helps the operator to
determine potential cause of event like opening, manual trip or electrical trip, or loss
a power disruption
of supply. It also provides guidance for potential solution to restore the power.

Can you C
Benefits
This function aims to reduce downtime of power supply at critical load (Mean Time To afford it ?
Repair) after a trip, an opening, or a loss of upstream power supply.
DB421885.ai

Hospital
100000 euros per hour
MICROLOGIC + endangered lives
Home
Quickview
Measures

! Alarms & H...

Maintenan...

OK

Data centers
750000 euros per minute
TRIP CAUSE

Ir Isd Ig Op.
Ii I n

7.0 X
ID:
1989421527520002LV847604

DISCONNECT BEFORE
DIELECTRIC TEST

In 1600 A

Semi conductor
manufacturing plant
35 million euros per hour

C-11
 Customize your control unit with digital modules www.schneider-electric.com

Masterpact operation assistant

In many critical installations the cost of a power interruption may exceed several hundred thousand euros per hour.
Human lives may also be endangered. Most of the time the quick restoration of power is essential after tripping.

Description
This function aims to assist the operator in reclosing and opening the circuit breaker
by delivering instructions like reset (if applicable) or charge spring (if applicable).
It displays circuit breaker status like ready to close, voltage release status or spring
status. This is a real onsite guidance. Full benefit of the function is given when
installed with the diagnostic and communicating voltage release (MX diag&com, XF
diag&com).
C Benefits
This function allows to close and open the circuit breaker from a distance of few
meters.
It reduces reclosing time, without the need for documentation and lengthy training.

Yesterday, with Masterpact NT/NW Today, with Masterpact MTZ1, MTZ2 and MTZ3
DB421340.ai

MICROLOGIC

Home

+
Quickview
Measures
6.5
8 ! Alarms & H...
Maintenan...

OK

+
TRIP CAUSE

Ir Isd Ig Op.
Ii I n

7.0 X
ID:
1989421527520002LV847604

Troubleshooting DISCONNECT BEFORE

DIELECTRIC TEST

In 1600 A

C-12
 www.schneider-electric.com
Customize your control unit with digital modules
Waveform capture on trip event

After any tripping initiated by long-time, short time, instantaneous and earth fault protection (LSIG) the waveform
digital module allows to display the interrupted phase and neutral currents.

Description
Waveform capture digital module allows to automatically log five cycles of phase and
neutral currents, with a sampling period of 512 microseconds, in case of trip of LSI or
LSIG or optional protection. The record can be retrieved with the MTZ SmartApp and
Ecoreach, in Comtrade format. In addition, the waveform capture function records
the following digital status: circuit breaker open/close/trip and ZSI signals.
The five cycles of the waveform capture are split as follows: Four cycles before the
trip event and one cycle after.
C
Benefits
The automatic recording of waveform helps the maintenance operator to analyze
the trip event in detail. At a glance, it helps to understand the nature of the trip event,
the gravity of the trip event (with amplitude and duration) and the potential damage
on the installation. Digital signals, like SDE / Open / ZSI, support analysis of global
behavior of the circuit breaker in the power system (response time, selectivity).

Yesterday, with Masterpact NT/NW Today, with Masterpact MTZ1, MTZ2 and MTZ3
DB421341.ai

MICROLOGIC

Home
Quickview
Measures

! Alarms & H...

+
Maintenan...

OK
TRIP CAUSE

Ir Isd Ig Op.
Ii I n

7.0 X
ID:
1989421527520002LV847604

DISCONNECT BEFORE
DIELECTRIC TEST

In 1600 A

C-13
 Customize your control unit with digital modules www.schneider-electric.com

Modbus legacy dataset

Supervision software for Masterpact NT/NW circuit breakers uses Modbus drivers that are compatible with legacy
format Modbus registers. Masterpact MTZ circuit breakers provide standard format Modbus registers.
As a result, supervision software for Masterpact MTZ should use Modbus drivers that are compatible with standard
format Modbus registers. The Modbus legacy dataset Digital Module provides a dataset that is compliant with
the legacy format. This dataset can be used by existing Modbus drivers running supervision software designed for
Masterpact NT/NW to allow easy integration for installations which include both Masterpact NT/NW and Masterpact
MTZ circuit breakers.

Description
C The Modbus dataset collects the most useful information for remote supervision
software in one convenient Modbus table (starting at register 12000 for the legacy
dataset, starting at register 32000 for the standard dataset). This table contains the
following information:
bb Circuit breaker status
bb Tripping causes
bb Real time values (current, voltage, power, energy…)
The user can get the information contained in this table with only two read requests.
As standard, with Micrologic X control units, the Modbus standard dataset is
available via the following communication interfaces: EIFE, IFE, IFE gateway
and IFM.
As an option, with Modbus legacy dataset Digital Module, the Modbus legacy
dataset is available via the following communication interfaces: EIFE, IFE, IFE
gateway and IFM.
The Modbus legacy dataset is compatible with the Micrologic control unit of
Masterpact NT/NW.

Benefits
The Modbus legacy dataset Digital Module allows the system integrator to keep
the same existing Modbus driver within the supervision software.
It allows easy integration for installations with both Masterpact NT/NW and
Masterpact MTZ.

C-14
www.schneider-electric.com

Customize your circuit breaker

with accessories

Overview of accessories.......................................................D-2
Design and installation simplification
Connection........................................................................................ D-4

Operation efficiency
Signalling.......................................................................................... D-8
Controlling....................................................................................... D-13

Protection of people and property

Locking and interlocking................................................................ D-22
Circuit protection............................................................................. D-26
Operation and mechanical protection............................................ D-29

Power Availability and reliability

Power supplies................................................................................ D-32

Other chapters
Select your circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors.............................. A-1
Select your Micrologic X control unit........................................................... B-1
Customize your Micrologic X with digital modules......................................C-1
Integrate in Smart panels - Architecture and systems................................ E-1
Integrate in switchboard............................................................................. F-1
Integrate in special applications - Source-changeover systems.................G-1
Services......................................................................................................H-1
Order your circuit breaker............................................................................ I-1

D-1
 Customize your circuit breaker with accessories www.schneider-electric.com

Overview of accessories

Design and installation simplification - connection > On page D-4

Applicable Fixed Drawout
for
Horizontal and vertical rear connection MTZ 1/2/3
Front connection MTZ 1/2/3
Vertical-connection adapters MTZ 1
Cable-lug adapters MTZ 1
Spreaders MTZ 1
Disconnectable front connection adapter MTZ 2/3
Drawout version Interphase barriers MTZ 1/2/3
CC - arc chute cover MTZ 1
Brackets for mounting MTZ 2/3
Operation efficiency - Signalling > On page D-8
OF - ON/OFF indication contacts MTZ 1/2/3
SDE - fault-trip indication contact MTZ 1/2/3
EF - combined connected/closed contacts MTZ 2/3
CE, CD, CT - Carriage switches MTZ 1/2/3
PF - ready-to-close contact MTZ 1/2/3
M2C - Programmable contacts MTZ 1/2/3
ESM - ERMS switch module MTZ 1/2/3

D Fixed version
CDM - mechanical operation counter MTZ1/2/3
Operation efficiency - Controlling
MTZ 1/2/3
> On page D-13
XF - closing voltage release MTZ 1/2/3
XF diag&com - diagnostic and communicating closing voltage release MTZ 1/2/3
MX - opening voltage release MTZ 1/2/3
MX diag&com - diagnostic and communicating opening voltage release MTZ 1/2/3
MN - undervoltage release MTZ 1/2/3
MN diag - diagnostic undervoltage release MTZ 1/2/3
R - non-adjustable delay unit MTZ 1/2/3
Rr - adjustable delay unit MTZ 1/2/3
Isolation module MTZ 1/2/3
MCH - gear motor MTZ 1/2/3
RES - electrical reset option MTZ 1/2/3
RAR - automatic reset option MTZ 1/2/3
BPFE - electrical closing pushbutton MTZ 1/2/3
People and property safety - Locking and Interlocking > On page D-22
VBP - ON/OFF pushbutton locking MTZ 1/2/3
VSPO-VCPO - OFF position locking MTZ 1/2/3
Chassis locking in disconnected position by padlock MTZ 1/2/3
VSPD - Chassis locking in disconnected position: by keylock MTZ 1/2/3
Optional connected/disconnected/test position locking MTZ 1/2/3
VO - Safety shutters (with padlocking standard) MTZ 1/2/3
VIVC - shutter position indication and locking MTZ 2/3
IPA - cable-type door interlock MTZ 1/2/3
VPEC - door interlock MTZ 1/2/3
VPOC - racking interlock MTZ 1/2/3
IBPO - racking interlock between crank and OFF pushbutton MTZ 2/3
V DC - mismatch protection MTZ 1/2/3
People and property safety - Circuit protection > On page D-26
TCE - external sensor for neutral and residual earth fault protection MTZ 1/2/3
SGR - External sensor for source ground return protection MTZ 1/2/3
Rectangular sensor for earth-leakage protection MTZ 1/2/3
People and property safety - Operation protection > On page D-29
DAE - automatic spring discharge before breaker removal MTZ 2/3
KMT - grounding kit MTZ 2/3
People and property safety - Mechanical protection > On page D-29
CB - terminal block shield MTZ 1/2/3
CDP - escutcheon MTZ 1/2/3
OP - blanking plate for escutcheon MTZ 1/2/3
CP - transparent cover for escutcheon MTZ 1/2/3
Power availability and realiability - Power supplies > On page D-32
VPS - Voltage power supply MTZ 1/2/3
External 24 V DC power supply module (AD) MTZ 1/2/3
BAT - battery module MTZ 1/2/3
Mobile powerpact by APC MTZ 1/2/3
Spare internal battery MTZ 1/2/3

D-2
 www.schneider-electric.com
Customize your circuit breaker with accessories
Overview of accessories

Mounting versions
Masterpact circuit breakers are available in two mounting versions: fixed and drawout
The drawout version is prefered in most of the applications due to its following benefits:
b visible separation of the power contacts via racking out
b easy and complete access to the device for periodic maintenance
b possibility of a quick replacement of the device if necessary
Masterpact MTZ Accessories provide the possibility to further customize the circuit breaker and enhance
functionality at all stages of the lifecycle.
b The comprehensive range of accessories addresses the needs of majority of applications
b Many accessories are common between Masterpact NT, NW, MTZ1, MTZ2 and MTZ3. In addition, some accessories
are also common between Masterpact and Compact ranges. Safety stock can therefore be optimized and less
training is required to master the installation of different ranges of Schneider Electric circuit breakers. The design
of the circuit breaker incorporates the need to simplify installation, last minute changes and future upgrading.

Masterpact MTZ2/3 drawout version as an example

J K L M N
DB419733_1.ai

O D

CT1
CT2 914
924 912
CT3 922 911
OF1 934 921
14 932
OF2 12 931
OF3 24 11
34 22
21
1 OF444 32
31
2 OF1
114 42
41
3 OF1
124 112
4 OF1 122 111
134 121
4 OF1
144 132
2 OF2 142 131
214 141
3 OF2
224 212
4 OF2 222 211
234 221
OF2 232
244 231
242
241
MCH
PF B2
254 B3
XF 252 B1
MX1 A2 251
X2 C2 A3
MN/M 2 C3 A1
D2/C1
/C13 1 C1
D1/C1
CE1
CE2 314
324 312
1 CE3 322 311
334 321
SDE
84 332
MC2 82 331
UC3 484 81
- 474
UC4 VN- 471
2 V3
es

- V2
SDE2/R
UC2M3/T1 184/K V1
T5 182/ 1
UC1M1 M2 AF3
T2
AF2
181/K
COM - T6 Z4 AF1
- - Z3 Z1
Z2
- F1-
CD1 F2+
CD2 814
824 812
CD3 822 811
834 821
832
831

A B C D E

SDE1
MC2
M2C
UC3
SDE2 UC4
UC2 /Res
UC1

UC
UC 2
1

G
arged
Disch

00000

T S R Q P
Ig Op.
Isd I n
TRIP CAUSE

Ir Ii

7.0 X

Circuit breaker accessories

604
2LV847
ID: 52000
21527
19894

A
In 1600

A V DC - Mismatch protection
B Terminal blocks for standard accessories Chassis accessories
I H MTZ2
-20 H3

C Terminal blocks for optional accessories

J V DC mismatch protection
D Optional block of four OF indication contacts or EF
K ULP port
combined connected/closed contacts
L Terminal blocks for optional accessories
E Standard block of four OF indication contacts
M Cord between ULP port and EIFE interface
F KMT grounding kit
N EIFE Embedded Ethernet interface
G MCH gear motor
O CB - Terminal block shield
H MX, XF, MN, MX diag&com,
MN diag&com and MN diag voltage release P VPOC racking interlock
I CDM operation counter Q VIVC Shutter position indication locking
R Latch to lock the device in any position
S Chassis locking in disconnected position by padlock
T VSPD - Chassis locking in disconnected position by keylock

D-3
 Customize your circuit breaker with accessories www.schneider-electric.com

Design and installation simplification

Connection

Simple and adaptable design, accurate and fast installation are the first two essential elements of building a
switchboard. Masterpact MTZ provides three types of basic connections and additional accessories to fullfill different
connection needs as well as to simplify installation.

Masterpact MTZ1 fixed version as an example

A B C

D
DB419898.ai

F E

Connection accessories Connection

A Vertical connection adapters D Arc chute screen F Horizontal and vertical rear connection
B Cable-lug adapters E Interphase barriers G Front connection
C Spreaders Note: For more information, see Chapter I.

D-4
 www.schneider-electric.com
Customize your circuit breaker with accessories
Design and installation simplification
Connection

Three types of basic connections are available for Masterpact MTZ1, MTZ2 and MTZ3 devices:
b Rear vertical connection
b Rear horizontal connection
b Front connection
Top and bottom can have different connection types (mixed connection).
Changing between horizontal and vertical rear connection can be done by simply turning the terminal by 90°.
Masterpact circuit breakers can be connected indifferently with bare-copper, tinned-copper or tinned aluminum
conductors. No special treatment is required.

Masterpact MTZ2/3 fixed version as an example

A B C
DB419897.ai

E D

Connection accessories Connection

A Disconnectable front connection adapter C Mounting brackets D Front connection
B Interphase barriers E Horizontal and vertical rear connection
Note: For more information, see Chapter I.

D-5
 Customize your circuit breaker with accessories www.schneider-electric.com

Design and installation simplification

Connection
Three types of connections are available
Rear connection Front connection

For 6300 A circuit breaker only vertical connection is available. Front connection is available for fixed
and drawout versions up to 3200 A.
ront

ront
ear

ear
nt

nt
ar

ar
out r
out f

out f

out r
d fro

d fro
d re

d re

D
Draw

Draw

Draw

Draw
Fixe

Fixe

Fixe

Fixe

Masterpact Masterpact
MTZ1 MTZ2, MTZ3 Type of accessories
Vertical connection adapters
Vertical connection adapters are used for simplifying
the connection to a set of vertical busbars. They are
[1] [1] mounted on front-connected MTZ1 devices or
chassis. The adapters can be oriented either towards
the front or the back of the device. When oriented
towards the front of the fixed devices, the use of arc
chute screen is compulsory.
Cable lug adapters
Cable lug adapters are used for simplifying the
connection of cables fitted with lugs. They are
[1] [1]
mounted on the vertical-connection adapters on front
connected devices or chassis. To ensure adequate
mechanical strength, the cable lug adapters must be
secured together via spacer (part number 04691).
The cable lug adapters must not go over the arc chute
screen (see “Dimensions” page in this catalogue).

Spreaders
When the connection bar is wider than the terminal,
[1] [1] [1] [1]
[2] [2] [2] [2] or a higher pole pitch is needed, spreaders can be
mounted on the front or rear terminals of MTZ1
devices.

Disconnectable front connection adapter

Disconnecting a rear connected circuit breaker for
maintenance or replacement can be complicated if
there is no rear access to the switchboard. To avoid
this complication, front connectors and
disconnectable adapters can be used together as
shown in the picture. In this case, the circuit breaker
can be easily disconnected from the front of the
switchboard.

[1] Spreaders, vertical connection adapters and cable lug adapters cannot be used when the voltage is u 500 V.
[2] MTZ1 spreaders are not compatible with interface barriers.
[3] Mandatory for voltage u 500 V. Not compatible with spreaders.
[4] Except for MTZ2 40 equipped with horizontal rear connections and for fixed MTZ3 40-63 .
[5] Mandatory for fixed MTZ1 front connexion versions with vertical connection adapters oriented towards the front.

D-6
www.schneider-electric.com
Customize your circuit breaker with accessories
Design and installation simplification
Connection

Mixed connection

Mixed connection. Top and bottom can have different connection types

ront

ront
ear

ear
nt

nt
ar

ar
out r
out f

out r
out f
d fro

d fro
d re

d re
D
Draw

Draw

Draw
Draw
Fixe

Fixe

Fixe

Fixe
Masterpact Masterpact
Type of accessories MTZ1 MTZ2, MTZ3
Interphase barriers
To reinforce the isolation of connecting points,
interphase barriers can be installed vertically between
rear connection terminals. As the interphase barriers [3] [3] [3] [4] [4]
are bendable, it gives more flexibility when installing the
busbars. The busbars can be insulated or not.
They are mandatory for MTZ1 devices at voltages
> 500 V.
They cannot be used for MTZ3.
Arc chute screen
When the breaker trips with high current, hot gas is
generated and pushed up to the terminals through the
filter. A flashover can occur between different
terminals.
An arc chute screen blocks the hot air and prevents [5]

the generation of an arc between the terminals. For

the drawout type, an additional arc chute screen is not
necessary as the filter is already covered. For fixed
Masterpact MTZ1 with front-connection and vertical-
connection adapters oriented towards the front, it is
mandatory to respect the safety clearances.

Mounting brackets
When fixing a breaker at the back, mounting brackets
can be installed on the backplates to simplify the
installation. Only applicable for MTZ2 08 to 32.

D-7
 Customize your circuit breaker with accessories www.schneider-electric.com

Operation efficiency
Signalling

Efficient day-to-day operation is vital. It means precise, in time and accessible data about the status of the circuit
breaker and fast action without the limitation of physical location.
Masterpact further develops the operation efficiency of the circuit breaker through signalling and control accessories.
Signalling
Signalling accessories provide status indications for both the device and the chassis. The accessories listed below
are available to achieve efficiency objectives. Combinations of contacts are possible depending on the needs.
b On/Off position of the breaker main poles - OF
b Fault trip of the breaker - SDE
b Combined connected/closed position of the breaker (for MTZ 2/3 only) - EF
b Connected, disconnected and test positions of the chassis – CE, CD, CT
b Threshold overruns or status change through M2C programmable contacts – M2C
b Indication ERMS engaged through ESM, ERMS switch module
b Ready-to-close contact - PF
b Operation counter - CDM
OF, EF, CE, CD, CT, SDE and PF are available:
b in the standard version for relay applications
b in a low-level version for control of PLCs and electronic circuits.

D Masterpact MTZ2 drawout version as an example

A B C
DB430622.ai

EF118
EF128 11 6
12 6 11 5
EF138 12 5 11
EF148 13 6 12
14 6 13 5
EF218 14 5 13
EF228 21 6 14
22 6 21 5
EF238 22 5 21
EF248 23 6 22
24 6 23 5
24 5 23
24

CT1
CT2 914
924 912
CT3 922 911
OF1 934 921
14 932
OF2 12 931
OF3 24 11
34 22
OF4 32 21
44 31
OF11 42
114 41
OF12 112
124 111
OF13 122
OF14 134 121
144 132
OF24 142 131
214 141
OF22 212
224 211
OF23 222
OF24 234 221
244 232
242 231
241
MCH
PF B2
254 B3
XF 252 B1
A2 251
2 MX1 C2 A3
MN/MX C3 A1
D2/C12
/C13 C1
D1/C11
CE1
CE2 314
324 312
1 CE3 322 311
334 321
SDE
84 332
MC2 82 331
UC3 484 81
- 474
es UC4 VN- 471
SDE2/R 2 V3 V2
UC2M3/T1 184/K - V1
T5 182/ 1
UC1M1 M2 AF3
T2
AF2
181/K
COM - T6 Z4 AF1
- - Z3 Z1
Z2
- F1-
CD1 F2+
CD2 814
824 812
CD3 822 811
834 821
832
831

SDE1
MC2
M2C
UC3
SDE2 UC4
UC2 /Res
UC1

UC
UC 2
1

00000

Ig Op. Test
/ Reset

Isd
I n
TRIP CAUSE

Ir Ii

7.0 X
847604
0002LV
ID: 152752
198942

A
In 1600

G F E

or 0000
0

A CE, CD - Carriage switches C OF - ON/OFF indication contacts F M2C - Programmable contacts

or ESM - ERMS switch module
B EF - combined connected/closed D PF - ready-to-close contact
contacts G SDE - fault-trip indication contact
E CDM - mechanical operation counter

D-8
www.schneider-electric.com
Customize your circuit breaker with accessories
Operation efficiency
Signalling

PB100806-32.eps
ON/OFF indication contacts OF
Two types of contacts indicate the ON and OFF position of the circuit breaker:
bb Micro switch type changeover contacts standard or low level version for
Masterpact MTZ1
bb Rotary type changeover contacts for Masterpact MTZ2/3. They are driven directly
by a mechanism and switch when the minimum isolation distance between the main
poles of the circuit breaker is reached.
bb Four OF contacts are provided in the basic configuration for all the Masterpact
circuit breakers.
bb For MTZ1, no additional OF contacts can be added. However, low level OF
contacts can replace the standard OF contacts. A mix of low level contacts and
standard contacts is possible.
bb For MTZ2/3, the rotary type changeover contacts can be used in both standard
and low level version. In addition to the 4 OF contacts provided for the basic
configuration, two optional blocks of 4 contacts can be added on the circuit breaker.
This gives 12 OF contacts maximum. When EIFE is installed, as it takes up two OF
positions, the maximum number of OF contacts is reduced to 10.
For Masterpact MTZ2 and MTZ3, two positions of OF are taken up when EIFE is
installed.
ON/OFF indication contacts (OF)
OF
MTZ1 MTZ2/3
(micro switch type) - MTZ1
D

PB100807-20.eps
Type Micro switch Micro switch Rotary Rotary
standard low level type contacts type contacts
type type by default additionals
Number By default 4 Maximum 4 By default 4 Maximum 8
Minimum load 100 mA/24 V 2 mA/15 V 2 mA/15 V 2 mA/15 V
Breaking V AC 240/380 6 5 10 6
capacity 480 6 5 10 6
(A) 690 6 5 6 6
p.f.: 0.3 V DC 24/48 2.5 5/2.5 10 6
AC-12/ 125 0.5 0.5 10 6 ON/OFF indication contacts (OF)
DC-12 [1] 250 0.3 0.3 3 3 (rotary type) - MTZ2 and MTZ3

Fault-trip indication contacts SDE

Circuit breaker tripping following a fault is signalled by:
PB100820-32.eps

bb local indication given by a blue mechanical fault indicator (reset)

bb remote indication given by a changeover contact SDE
Following tripping, the mechanical indicator must be reset before the circuit breaker
can be closed. One SDE standard level (SDE1) is supplied in the basic breaker
configuration. An optional SDE (SDE2, standard or low level) can be added.
Note: SDE2 is incompatible with the electrical reset after fault-trip option (RES), see page D-11.
Details of RES are explained on page D-21.

SDE MTZ1, MTZ2, MTZ3

Supplied as standard 1
Maximum number 2
Breaking capacity (A) Standard Minimum load: 100 mA/24 V
p.f.: 0.3 V AC 240/380 6
AC-12/DC-12 [1] 480 2 Additional fault-trip
V DC 24/48 3 indication contacts (SDE)
125 0.3
250 0.15
Low-level Minimum load: 2 mA/15 V
V AC 24/48 3
240 3
380 3
V DC 24/48 3
125 0.3
250 0.15
[1] Utilization category according IEC 60947-5-1.

D-9
 Customize your circuit breaker with accessories www.schneider-electric.com

Operation efficiency
Signalling

Combined connected/closed contacts EF

PB100816-32.eps

The contact combines the device connected and the device closed information to
produce the circuit closed information. Supplied as an option for Masterpact MTZ2/3,
it is installed in the place for the connector of an additional OF contact.

Note: Ordering of additional OF contacts is compulsory if EF is selected.

The maximum number of EF is the number of additional OF contacts.
EF MTZ2, MTZ3
Maximum number 8
Breaking capacity (A) Standard Minimum load: 100 mA/24 V
p.f.: 0.3 V AC 240/380 6
AC-12/DC-12 [1] 480 6
690 6
Combined contacts. V DC 24/48 2.5
125 0.8
250 0.3
D Low-level
V AC 24/48
Minimum load: 2 mA/15 V
5
240 5
380 5
V DC 24/48 2.5
125 0.8
250 0.3

Connected, disconnected and test position carriage

PB100817-32.eps

switches
As standard, the connected, disconnected and test positions are shown by a
mechanically indexed indicator. It shows the exact position when the racking handle
blocks.
In addition, three types of optional auxiliary contacts (both standard and low level)
are available to indicate the position of the chassis:
bb changeover contacts to indicate the connected position CE,
CE, CD and CT bb changeover contacts to indicate the disconnected position CD. This position is
connected/disconnected/test indicated when the required clearance for isolation of the power and auxiliary circuits
position carriage switches. is reached,
bb changeover contacts to indicate the test position CT. In this position, the power
circuits are disconnected and the auxiliary circuits are connected.
 
MTZ1, MTZ2, MTZ3
Contacts CE/CD/CT
Breaking capacity (A) Standard
p.f.: 0.3 V AC 240 8
AC-12/DC-12 [1] 380 8
480 8
690 6
V DC 24/48 2.5
125 0.8
250 0.3
Low-level
V AC 24/48 5
240 5
380 5
V DC 24/48 2.5
125 0.8
250 0.3
[1] Utilization category according IEC 60947-5-1.

D-10
www.schneider-electric.com
Customize your circuit breaker with accessories
Operation efficiency
Signalling

Connected, disconnected and test

position carriage switches
MTZ1

DB419909.ai
10

11

12

13

MCH 14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22
1

9
COM

ESM UC4 M2C

UC1

UC2

UC3
RES SDE

SDE

MX

MX

CD

CD
OF
CE

CE

OF

OF

OF

CE

CT
PF
XF
CT1
CE1
CD1
CD2

2
ETH
1
ETH
MN

EIFE EIFE
MS

ZZ
-XX.YY.
EIFE

F1
F2
F3
F4
CH
PF F1
XF F2
N/ X1 F3
X2 A01
DE1 A02
2C C3 SD
DE2 C4 T1
es N/ T2
C2 X
DE
C3
AF2
AF1
C2

As shown in the picture above, the carriage switches can be installed in 6 positions: 1, 2, 19, 20, 21
and 22. Each position corresponds to a particular type of auxiliary contact (CE, CD, CT).
When EIFE is installed, it takes the place of 1 CD at position 19, 1 CD at position 20, 1 CE at act
position 21 and 1 CT at position 22. The CD, CE, CT switches are directly connected to EIFE which Mas
terp CT1
CE1
CD1
CD2

ETH2

ETH1

makes the information available through the Ethernet communication bus.

D
R

EIFE NS
MS

CE2 .YY.ZZ
CE3 EIFE-XX

F1
F2
F3
F4
CH

Position Without EIFE With EIFE

PF F1
XF F2
N/ X1 F3
X2 A01
DE1 A02
2C C3 SD
DE2 C4 T1
es N/ T2
C2 X
C1 DE
C3
AF2
AF1
C2
C1
OM

1 None or 1 CE None or 1 CE
2 None or 1 CE None or 1 CE
rpact
Maste

19 None or 1 CD None
20 None or 1 CD None
21 None or 1 CE None
Reset
Reset
Test
Test

Reset
Test

22 None or 1 CT None
Aux
Aux
Power
Power VPS
VPS

AA
1000
InIn1000

Aux
Aux
er
Power
Pow VPSS
VP

Note: Any standard contact can be replaced by a low level contact except for the ones provided by EIFE. 10000
AA
InIn100

MTZ2 and MTZ3

DB419910.ai
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

ETH2

ETH1

EIFE NS
MS
COM

MCH
ESM M2C
UC1
UC2

UC4
UC3
RES SDE

SDE

Y.ZZ
MX MN

-XX.Y
MX
CD
CD
CD

EIFE
CE
CE
CE

OF
OF
OF
OF
OF
OF
OF
OF
OF
OF
OF
OF
CT
CT
CT
XF
PF

CT1
CT2 914
924 912
CT3 922 911
OF1 934 921
14 932
OF2 12 931
OF3 24 11
34 22
21
1 OF444 32
31
2 OF1
114 42
41
3 OF1
124 112
4 OF1 122 111
134 121
4 OF1
144 132
2 OF2 142 131
214 141
3 OF2
224 212
4 OF2 222 211
234 221
OF2 232
244 231
242
241
MCH
PF B2
254 B3
CD CE
CD CE

XF B1
CE
CE
CE

CE

252
CT
CT
CT

A2
EF
EF
EF
EF
EF
EF
EF
EF

MX1 A3 251
X2 C2 A1
MN/M 12 C3
D2/C
/C13 C1
11
D1/C
CE1
CE2 314
324 312
1 CE3 322 311
334 321
SDE
84 332
MC2 82 331
UC3 484 81
- 474
UC4 VN- 471
Res V3
SDE2/ K2 V2
UC2M3/T1 184/ /- V1
T5 182 K1
UC1M1 M2 AF3
T2
AF2
181/
COM - T6 Z4 AF1
- - Z3 Z1
Z2
- F1-
F2+
CD

PF MCH
MN MX1 XF

EIFE
MX2

SDE1
MC2
SDE2 UC4
UC3
UC2 /Res
UC1
COM

As shown in the picture above, the carriage switches can be installed in three blocks:
bb Position 1, 2, 3 for the first block.
ETH2

ETH1

EIFE NS
MS

Y.ZZ
EIFE-XX.Y

bb Position 12, 13, 14 for the second block.

CT1
CT2 914
924 912
CT3 922 911
OF1 934 921
14 932
OF2 12 931
OF3 24 11
34 22
OF4 32 21
44 31
OF11 42
114 41
OF12 112
124 111
OF13 122
134 121
OF14 132
144 131
OF24 142
214 141
OF22 212
224 211
OF23 222
234 221
OF24 232
244 231
242
241
MCH
PF B2
B3

bb Position 32, 33, 34 for the third block.

XF 254 B1
A2 252
MX1 A3 251
C2 A1
MN/MX2 C3
D2/C12
/C13 C1
D1/C11
CE1
CE2 314
324 312
CE3 322 311
334 321
SDE1
84 332
MC2 82 331
UC3 484 81
-VN 474
UC4 471
V3 -
SDE2/Res V2
UC2 184/K2 - V1
M3/T1
T5 182/
UC1M1 M2 AF3
T2
AF2
181/K1
COM - T6 Z4 AF1

-20 H3
- - Z3 Z1
Z2
- F1-
CD1 F2+
CD2 814

Z2act
812

As standard, the first block can be installed with CD (maximum 3), the second block can be installed
CD3 824 811
834 822

terp
MT
832 821

Mas HA10
831

12kV
NW40 Uimp
V
Ui 1250 V
V 1000
Ue 1150 690/
/1s
Ue 50kA
A peak
PF MCH Icw 105k

with CE (maximum 3), and the third block can be installed with CT (maximum 3).
MN MX1 XF 0Hz
MX2 Icm 50/6
7-2 AS NEMA
6094 CEI UNE
IEC BS
SDE1 VDE 55°C
MC2 UTE
SDE2 UC4
UC3 A Ie
UC2 /Res Ith 4000 Ue
(A)
UC1 (V)
COM 4000
1000

Change of the functions of the carriage switches is possible. In this case, the first block can be
3A 0Hz
AC2 50/6
7-3
6094 CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE
UTE

replaced by CE, the second block can be replaced by CT and the third block can be replaced by CE Reset

or CD.
Test

pact
MasterHA10
12kV
NW40 Uimp
Ui 1250V V
Ue 1150V 690/1000
Ue 50kA/1s
peak
Icw 105kA
Icm 50/60Hz
AS NEMA
60947-2CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE 55°C
UTE
Ie
Ith 4000A Ue
(A)

Mixing of CE, CD, CT in one block is not possible. For example, installing 1CD and 2CE in the first
(V)
4000
1000
AC23A 50/60Hz
60947-3CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE
UTE

r
Aux
Powe VPS

block is not possible.

A
In 1000

Aux
Power VPS

When EIFE is installed, it takes the place of CT, CE and CD switches at positions 32, 33 and 34.
A
In 1000

The CD, CE, CT switches are directly connected to EIFE which makes the information available
through the Ethernet communication bus. As EIFE also takes up positions 30 and 31, OF cannot be
installed at these positions and the maximum number of OF contacts is limited to 10.
Block: Position Without EIFE With EIFE
1: 1, 2, 3 None None
or 1CD or 2CD or 3CD or 1CD or 2CD or 3CD
or 1CE or 2CE or 3CE or 1CE or 2CE or 3CE
2: 12, 13, 14 None None
or 1CE or 2CE or 3CE or 1CE or 2CE or 3CE
or 1CT or 2CT or 3CT or 1CT or 2CT or 3CT
3: 32, 33, 34 None or None
1CT or 2CT or 3CT
or 1CE or 2CE or 3CE
or 1CD or 2CD or 3CD
Note: Any standard contact can be replaced by a low level contact except for the ones provided by EIFE.

D-11
 Customize your circuit breaker with accessories www.schneider-electric.com

Operation efficiency
Signalling

M2C programmable contacts

PB115794.eps

The M2C optional module ( 2 contacts) can be used to signal threshold overruns or
status changes. The assignment of the 2 contacts can be configured by using
Ecoreach software. The M2C optional module ( 2 contacts) requires the Micrologic X
control unit to be supplied by an external 24 V dc power supply. When the M2C
optional module 2 contacts is installed, the ESM hardware module cannot be installed.
M2C MTZ1, MTZ2, MTZ3 Output
Rated voltage V AC 250 V / 3 A
V DC 30 V / 3 A
Max breaking voltage V AC 277 V / 3 A
M2C programmable contacts:
circuit breaker internal relay with Max load breaking capacity V AC 277 V / 3 A
two contacts V DC 30 V / 3 A
Minimum load V DC 5 V / 10 mA

ESM: ERMS Switch Module

The ESM optional hardware module is used with an external lockable selector switch
D to engage/disengage the ERMS function. It is equipped with one input dedicated to the
ERMS selector switch and one output to activate an external pilot light when the ERMS
is engaged. The ESM optional hardware module requires the Micrologic X control unit
to be supplied by an external 24 V dc power supply. When the ESM optional hardware
LV836302.eps

module is installed, the M2C optional module 2 contacts cannot be installed.

ESM MTZ1, MTZ2, MTZ3 Output Input
ESM: ERMS switch module Rated voltage V AC 250 V / 3 A 24 ... 110 V
V DC 30 V / 3 A 24 V
Max breaking voltage V AC 277 V / 3 A -
Max load breaking capacity V AC 277 V / 3 A -
V DC 30 V / 3 A -
Minimum load V DC 5 V / 10 mA -

Ready-to-close contact PF
The ready-to-close function ensures that the breaker will close only when all the
PB100818-16.eps

necessary criteria are met.

It checks through the prerequisites for closing the circuit breaker and informs when it is
ready to close.
It consists of a mechanical indicator and a PF changeover contact.
This indicator only shows ready when all the following conditions are met:
bb the circuit breaker is in the OFF position
bb the spring mechanism is charged
bb a maintained opening order is not present.
This indicator will not show ready when any of the following conditions is met:
bb voltage release MX energized
Ready-to-close contacts PF bb fault trip
bb remote tripping second voltage release MX or MN
bb device not completely racked in
bb device locked in OFF position
bb device interlocked with a second device.
Note: Details of MX are presented on page D-18.
PF MTZ1, MTZ2, MTZ3
Maximum number 1
Breaking Standard - Minimum load: 100 mA/24 V
capacity (A) V AC 240/380 480
p.f.: 0.3 5 2
AC-12/DC-12 [1] V DC 24/48 125 250
3 0.3 0.15
Low-level - Minimum load: 2 mA/15 V
V AC 24/48 240
3 3
PB116027_64.eps

V DC 24/48 125
3 0.3
[1] Utilization category according IEC 60947-5-1.

Operation counter CDM

The operation counter sums the number of operating cycles and is visible on the front
panel. It is compatible with manual and electrical control functions.
Operation counter CDM This option is compulsory for source-changeover systems.
D-12
 www.schneider-electric.com
Customize your circuit breaker with accessories
Operation efficiency
Controlling

Control accessories bring convenience and safety by providing multiple ways of controlling the circuit breaker
and the possibility to operate it remotely. Two control devices are presented here:
b Remote On/Off
b Remote reset after fault tripping

A B C
DB419896.ai

D
CT1
CT2 914
924 912
CT3 922 911
OF1 934 921
14 932
OF2 12 931
OF3 24 11
34 22
OF4 32 21
44 31
OF11 42
114 41
OF12 112
124 111
OF13 122
134 121
OF14 132
144 131
OF24 142
214 141
OF22 212
224 211
OF23 222
234 221
OF24 232
244 231
242
241
MCH
PF B2
254 B3
XF 252 B1
A2 251
2 MX1 C2 A3
MN/MX C3 A1
D2/C12
/C13 C1
D1/C11
CE1
CE2 314
324 312
1 CE3 322 311
334 321
SDE
84 332
MC2 82 331
UC3 484 81
- 474
UC4 VN- 471
2 V3
es

- V2
SDE2/R
UC2M3/T1 184/K V1
T5 182/ 1
UC1M1 M2 AF3
T2
AF2
181/K
COM - T6 Z4 AF1
- - Z3 Z1
Z2
- F1-
CD1 F2+
CD2 814
824 812
CD3 822 811
834 821
832
831

SDE1
MC2
M2C
UC3
SDE2 UC4
UC2 /Res
UC1

UC
UC 2
1

00000

Ig Op. Test
/ Reset

Isd
I n
TRIP CAUSE

Ir Ii

7.0 X
847604
0002LV
ID: 152752
198942

A
In 1600

F E D

A RAR - automatic reset option b MX - opening voltage release D BPFE - electric closing pushbutton
b MX diag&com - diagnostic and
B RES - electric reset option communicating opening voltage release E MCH - gear motor
C 
b XF - closing voltage release 2nd MX or MX diag&com F b R - delay unit non-adjustable
b XF diag&com - diagnostic and b MN - undervoltage release b Rr - delay unit adjustable for MN
communicating closing voltage b MN diag - diagnostic undervoltage and MN diag undervoltage release.
release release

D-13
 Customize your circuit breaker with accessories www.schneider-electric.com

Operation efficiency
Controlling

Remote ON/OFF
PB116196_50.eps

Various solutions are possible that use different combinations of the accessories below.
bb Basic voltage release to voltage release open and close orders:
vv XF - closing voltage release
vv MX - opening voltage release
vv MN - undervoltage release
The circuit breaker can be equipped with:
-- an XF voltage release,
-- an MX voltage release,
-- a 2nd MX voltage release or an MN undervoltage release.
bb Diagnostic & Communicating voltage release with diagnostic and communication functions in addition to
releasing open and close orders:
vv XF diag&com - diagnostic and communicating closing voltage release
vv MX diag&com - diagnostic and communicating opening voltage release
vv MN diag - diagnostic undervoltage release
The diagnostics and communicating voltage release require the installation of the insulation module.

D The circuit breaker can be equipped with:

-- an XF diag&com voltage release,
-- an MX diag&com voltage release
-- a 2nd MX diag&com voltage release or an MN diag undervoltage release. The 2nd MX diag&com voltage release
and the MN diag undervoltage release provide only the diagnostic function. The communicating function cannot
PB115972_50.eps

be performed. The second MX diag&com voltage release can only be installed after the delivery of the circuit
breaker. This is an after sales adaptation.
Note: MN undervoltage release and MN diagnostic undervoltage release can be used with non adjustable and adjustable delay
unit R or Rr.
bb Electric Motor to charge the spring:
vv Electric motor MCH
XF, MX and MN
bb Signalling Accessories are often added to enhance convenience and safety:
vv ready-to-close contact PF
vv Device ON/OFF indication OF
vv fault-trip indication SDE
bb Other Accessories to complete the solutions:
vv Electric closing pushbutton BPFE. It requires the installation of an XF diag&com voltage release
vv Isolation module (compulsory when diagnostic & communication voltage release are used).

Solutions
DB421346.ai

Three remote control solutions are provided by Masterpact MTZ

Customer wiring with basic voltage release (XF, MX, MN)

Masterpact MTZ can be opened and closed remotely by using the output contacts of a PLC or a pushbutton wired
to the voltage release (MX, MN, XF).
This solution requires hard wiring between the circuit breaker and the location from where the operation is conducted.
AC/DC supply
DB421188.ai

Charged
to-close

(+) (+) (+) (+)

Ready-

Adjustable or non-
AT
adjustable delay unit BPF

BPO
C12

252
254
B3
B2
C2

A2
D2

MCH
[2] [2] [2] [2]

MN MX MX XF
PF CH

or [1]

(-) (-) (-) (-)

C1
D1

C11

251
A1

B1

[1] Possibility to add a second MX voltage release or an MN undervoltage release.

[2] The maximum lengths of the wiring between the AC/DC power supply and voltage release terminals A1-A2 / C1-C2 /
C11-C12 / D1-D2 are given page D-18.

D-14
 www.schneider-electric.com
Customize your circuit breaker with accessories
Operation efficiency
Controlling

Customer wiring with voltage release with diagnostic function (XF diag&com, MX diag&com, MN diag)

PB115971_50.eps
When voltage release with diagnostic functions are used in customer wiring, the following diagnosis information is
available in addition to remote operation. The information can be accessed through the Micrologic X HMI, wireless
communication, and Ecoreach through USB connection.
bb Identify the type of the voltage release, MX diag&com, XF diag&com or MN diag.
bb Detect whether the voltage release is functioning properly by comparing the voltage release order and the
opening/closing status of the circuit breaker.
bb Check whether there is any breakage of the wiring in the voltage release periodically (every 30 seconds). XF diag&com,
bb Identify whether the order comes from BPFE option. MX diag&com, MN diag
bb Identify whether the order is a permanent order.
bb Count the operation cycle of the voltage release.
AC/DC supply
DB421189.ai

(+) (+) (+)

Charged
to-close

(+)
Ready-

[2] [2] [2] Note: When MX or XF diagnostic

and communicating voltage release
are used, the third wire (A3, C3, C13)
AT BPF
BPO must be connected. When the control
voltage (A3-A1, C3-C1, C13-C11) is
C12
C13

252
254

B3
B2
C2
C3

A2
A3

D
D2

applied to the voltage release, it is

necessary to wait 1.5 seconds before
issuing an order. Special attention shall
be paid to control voltage when using
[3] [3] [3] [3] these voltage release in application
MCH
2nd MX MX XF where power supply may disappear
MN
diag diag diag such as source change over systems.
diag
& com & com & com PF CH

or [1]

(-) (-) (-) (-) OF OF : ON/OFF indication

D1

C11

C1

A1

251

B1

contact.
PF
SDE
PF : Ready to close
Isolation contact.
Module Micrologic X CH
SDE : Fault trip indication
contact.
CH : Mechanism charged.
Communication Bus connection with diagnostic & communication voltage release
(XF diag&com, MX diag&com)
When a communication system is present, the Masterpact MTZ can be opened and closed from a remote control
system such as a SCADA, through the communication bus.
In addition to the functionalities of the previous solution, this solution brings the following benefits:
bb Bus solution provides more flexibility geographically and saves wiring costs
bb Diagnosis information can be accessed remotely through the communication network but not from the
Micrologic X HMI.
A bus solution and point-to-point solution can be implemented together when using communication voltage release.
AC/DC supply
(+) (+) (+)
DB430624.ai

Charged
to-close

(+)
Ready-

[2] [2] [2]

AT BPF
Local [1] P
 ossibility to add a
BPO PC running Supervisor
Ecoreach Smart phone
second MX diag&com
voltage release or an
C12
C13

252
254

B3
B2
C2
C3

A2
A3
D2

MN diag undervoltage
release. The second
MX diag&com voltage
[3] [3] [3] [3]
Ethernet release can only be
MCH installed after the
2nd MX MX XF EIFE/
MN
diag diag diag FDM 128 delivery of the circuit
diag IFE
& com & com & com breaker. This is an after
PF CH Micrologic X or sales adaptation.
IFM Modbus SL
or [1]
[2] M
 aximum length of
Module
the two wires cables
between A2-A3 / C2-C3
(-) (-) (-) (-)
OF / C12-C13: 5 m.
D1

C11

C1

A1

251

B1

PF [3] The maximum lengths

SDE of the wiring between
Isolation the AC/DC power supply
Module CH
and voltage release
terminals
A1-A3 / C1-C3 /
C11-C13 /D1-D2 are
given page D-18.

D-15
 Customize your circuit breaker with accessories www.schneider-electric.com

Operation efficiency
Controlling

The table below summarizes all the possibilities for controlling the On/Off status of a breaker in different operating modes.
Connection Voltage Method Micrologic X Operation Mode Setting Exclusiveness Diagnostic
release Manual Auto Auto [1]
Information
Local Remote [2]

Customer wiring Basic voltage Pushbutton

release Wireless pushbutton
(XF, MX, MN) (XB5)
Diagnostic & Pushbutton
Communicating BPFE voltage release
voltage release connection
(XF diag&com,
Wireless pushbutton
MX diag&com,
MN diag) BPFE via Micrologic X
Digital input (IO module) [3]

Ecoreach via USB

D Masterpact MTZ mobile

App (Bluetooth)
Bus solution Diagnostic & BPFE via Micrologic
with COM Communicating Digital Input
[3]
communication voltage release (I/O module)
option (XF diag&com,
Ecoreach via USB
MX diag&com)
SCADA via
IFE/EIFE/IFM
FDM128 via IFE/EIFE
Ecoreach via IFE/EIFE
Webpage via IFE/EIFE
Masterpact MTZ mobile
App (Bluetooth)
[1] Exclusiveness means that the operation can only be done in one particular operating mode.
For example, when customer wiring with basic voltage release is used, On/Off operation of the breaker using the pushbutton has no exclusiveness as it can
be done in all three operating modes.
[2] Details of diagnostic functions can be found on page B-22.
[3] When the rotary switch of the I/O module is switched to I2/I3, operation can only be done in Auto remote mode. When it is switched to I4/I5 operation can
only be done in auto local mode.

D-16
www.schneider-electric.com
Customize your circuit breaker with accessories
Operation efficiency
Controlling

Selection of voltage release

Three common user cases are presented here to illustrate the possible choice of voltage release.

User case I: Remote Opening

This case is applicable when only remote opening is required. It is necessary to respond to an emergency.
This solution enables the emergency opening of the circuit breaker.

User case II: Remote Opening and Closing

When both remote opening and remote closing are required, this solution can be implemented.
As the spring needs to be charged to close the circuit breaker, an electric motor MCH needs to be installed in this
solution.

User Case III: Remote closing and opening with 2nd MX or MN voltage release
For safety reasons, redundancy of mechanisms is required in certain installations. A second MX/MX diag&com or
MN/MN diag can be added for this purpose.

The additional MN diag benefits the following situations.

bb When the voltage drops by 35 % to 70 % of its rated voltage, MN diag will open the breaker automatically.
D
bb When MX diag&com fails to receive the order or fails to voltage the voltage after receiving the order, MN diag
can be triggered to voltage the voltage to open the circuit breaker.
Customer wiring with Customer wiring with Communication bus
basic voltage release diagnostic & communicating connection with diagnostic
voltage release & communicating voltage
release
User Case I: Option I: Option I: Option I:
Remote Opening bb Opening voltage bb Opening voltage release MX bb Opening voltage release
release MX diag&com MX diag&com
Option II: Option II:
bb Instantaneous bb Instantaneous undervoltage
undervoltage release release MN diag
MN
User Case II: Option I: Option I: Option I:
Remote Opening bb Opening voltage bb Opening voltage release MX bb Opening voltage release
and Closing release MX diag&com MX diag&com
bb Closing voltage bb Closing voltage release XF bb Closing voltage release XF
release XF diag&com diag&com
bb Electric motor MCH bb Electric motor MCH bb Electric motor MCH
Option II: Option II:
bb Instantaneous bb Instantaneous undervoltage
undervoltage release release MN diag
MN bb Closing voltage release XF
bb Closing voltage diag&com
release XF bb Electric motor MCH
bb Electric motor MCH
User Case III: Option I: Option I: Option I:
Remote Closing bb Opening voltage bb Opening voltage release MX bb Opening voltage release
and Opening with release MX diag&com MX diag&com
2nd MX or MN bb Closing voltage bb Closing voltage release XF bb Closing voltage release XF
voltage release release XF diag&com diag&com
bb Electric motor MCH bb Electric motor MCH bb Electric motor MCH
bb Instantaneous bb Instantaneous undervoltage bb Instantaneous
undervoltage release release MN diag undervoltage release
MN MN diag
Note:
b Adjustable or non adjustable delay unit can be added to MN and MN diag in all situations.
b An isolation module is required for all connections between Micrologic X and diagnostic & communicating voltage release (XF
diag&com, MX diag&com and MN diag).
b When a 2nd MX diag&com or a MN diag undervoltage release is used, the diagnostic function only can be performed for
these two voltage release.
The communication function is not provided.

D-17
 Customize your circuit breaker with accessories www.schneider-electric.com

Operation efficiency
Controlling

Basic voltage release and diagnostics &

PB115972_50.eps

communication voltage release general characteristics

After receiving the command, the closing/opening voltage release instantaneously
triggers the mechanism to close/open the circuit breaker. For MN, it also opens the
circuit breaker when its supply voltage drops to a value between 35 % and 70 % of
its rated voltage. Circuit breaker closing is possible only when the supply voltage of
the voltage release returns to 85 % of its rated value.
bb MN undervoltage release locks the circuit breaker in OFF position when it is not
energized.
bb MX opening voltage release can lock the circuit breaker in OFF position if the
order is maintained.
Voltage releases XF and MX
The XF, MX, MN, XF diag&com, MX diag&com, MN diag voltage release require a
power supply separate from the Micrologic X power supply.
Note: The minimum duration of the pulse operating order must be 200 ms.
200 ms min.

D
XF Characteristics XF, XF diag&com MX, MX diag&com
XF diag&com [1]
Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz 24 - 48 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 277 - 380/480
V DC 12 - 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250
XF Close Operating threshold 0.85 to 1.1 Un 0.7 to 1.1 Un
DB425480.eps

XF diag&com order
action Consumption (VA or W) Hold: 4.5 Hold: 4.5
Pick-up: 200 (200 ms) Pick-up: 200 (200 ms)
MX Circuit breaker MTZ1: 55 ms ±10 50 ms ±10
MX diag&com [2]
response time at Un MTZ2: 70 ms ±10
MTZ3: 80 ms ±10
MX
MX diag&com Open CB locked
action order in off position Characteristics MN, MN diag
Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz 24 - 48 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 380/480
V DC 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250
MN
MN Diag Operating Opening 0.35 to 0.7 Un
threshold Closing 0.85 Un
MN Consumption (VA or W) Hold: 4.5
Open CB locked
MN Diag order in off position Pick-up: 200 (200 ms)
action
MN consumption Hold: 4.5
[1] For XF diag&com the supply shall be present between with delay unit (VA or W) Pick-up: 200 (200 ms)
terminals A1-A3. Circuit breaker 40 ms ±5 (Masterpact MTZ1)
[2] For MX diag&com the supply shall be present between response time at Un 90 ms ±5 (Masterpact MTZ 2, MTZ3)
terminals C1-C3.
Recommended maximum cable lengths (m)
12 V 24 V 48 V
2.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 1.5 mm2
MN, U source - - 58 35 280 165
MN diag 100 %
U source - - 16 10 75 45
85 %
MX-XF, U source 21 12 115 70 550 330
MX diag&com,100 %
XF diag&com U source 10 6 75 44 350 210
85 %
Note: The indicated lengths are given for each of the two wires of the cables.

D-18
www.schneider-electric.com
Customize your circuit breaker with accessories
Operation efficiency
Controlling

Diagnostic & communicating voltage release

PB115971_50.eps
specificities
The new generation of communicating voltage release brings two major benefits
compared with the basic voltage release, diagnostic and communication functions.

Diagnostic Function
Incorrect operation or failure of the voltage release can cause damage to the electric
network. The new function of the diagnostic and communicating voltage release
provides the diagnostic information and prevents incorrect operations that can
damage the equipment.

These voltage release can perform the following diagnosis and communicate the XF diag&com, MX diag&com, MN diag
results through Micrologic X.
bb Identify the type of the voltage release, MX diag&com, XF diag&com or MN diag
bb Detect whether the voltage release is functioning properly by comparing the
voltage release order and the opening/closing status of the circuit breaker
bb Check whether there is any breakage of the wiring in the voltage release D
periodically
(every 30 seconds)
bb Identify whether the order comes from BPFE option
bb Identify whether the order is a permanent order
bb Count the operating cycles of the voltage release

Results can be read through all the different ways of retrieving information from
Micrologic X as presented in chapter B, including HMI, wireless communication, and
Ecoreach through a USB connection. If the voltage release are connected to the
communication system, they can also be accessed through the communication
system.

Communication function
In addition to hard wiring, these voltage release can be connected to the
communication network.
It allows the voltage release to be integrated in the communication system. It gives
more flexibility for remote operations, and the diagnosis results mentioned in
diagnostic function can be assessed remotely as well.
MN diag only has the diagnostic function. It cannot be connected to a communication
network.

New voltage release action type

In addition to the diagnostic function, a major new feature of the new generation is
the voltage release action type. The new generation no longer has the pulse-type
voltage release; the voltage release can be maintained as long as the order is
maintained. Because of the new feature, MX diag&com can lock the circuit breaker
in the OFF position when the order is maintained.
DB421346.ai

MN delay units
To reduce circuit breaker nuisance opening during short voltage drops, MN delay
units can be installed to delay the MN undervoltage release and only trigger the
voltage release when voltage is low for a certain period of time. It can be disabled by
an emergency OFF button to obtain instantaneous opening of the circuit breaker.
Two versions of the delay unit are available, adjustable and non-adjustable.
Adjustable or non-adjustable delay unit
Characteristics
Power supply Non-adjustable 100/130 - 200/250
V AC 50-60 Hz /DC Adjustable 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250
- 380/480
Operating threshold Opening 0.35 to 0.7 Un
Closing 0.85 Un
Delay unit consumption Pick-up: 200 (200 ms) Hold: 4.5
Circuit breaker Non-adjustable 0.25 s
response time at Un Adjustable 0.5 s - 1 s - 1.5 s - 3 s

D-19
 Customize your circuit breaker with accessories www.schneider-electric.com

Operation efficiency
Controlling

Isolation module (Compulsory for XF diag&com, MX

diag&com, MN diag voltage release)
PB116199_50.eps

When diagnostic and communicating voltage release are required, the internal
isolation module for Micrologic X is compulsory to provide reinforced insulation as
per IEC 60664-1 (up to 12 kV). It is installed between the voltage release and
Micrologic X. Besides the isolation between the electric network and Micrologic X, it
also provides the insulation between the voltage release. It is necessary because
the voltage release can be powered by different voltages.
Isolation module
DB421191.ai

BPFE

MX diag & com

Micrologic X Isolation
Module

D XF diag & com

2nd MX diag & com

or MN diag

Note:
b only one isolation module is needed regardless of the number of voltage release installed.
To facilitate the ordering process and make sure the isolation module is ordered for diagnostic
and communicating voltage release, it will be added to the purchase list automatically when
any of the XF diag&com, MX diag&com or MN diag is selected.
b for safety reasons it must be avoided to mix in the same circuit breaker 277-380/480 V
voltage release with 24/48 V voltage release.
b when ordered the BPFE is de facto connected in factory to the isolation module.

Electric closing pushbutton BPFE

Located on the front cover of the circuit breaker, this pushbutton carries out electric
closing of the circuit breaker, taking into account the safety functions that are part of
the control and monitoring system of the installation.
PB116200_50.eps

The BPFE requires a XF diag&com voltage release to be installed on the circuit breaker.
The BPFE does not operate with a standard XF voltage release.
They are two solutions to implement the electric closing pushbutton. A standard
solution and a customized solution:
bb The standard solution is performed in factory. When the BPFE option is ordered,
the circuit breaker is de facto delivered equipped with the BPFE and a XF diag&com
voltage release, both connected on the isolation module. The two functions of the XF
diag&com voltage release (remote control through Micrologic X and diagnostic) are
operational
Electric closing pushbutton BPFE bb The customized solution can only be performed after the delivery of the circuit
breaker. This is an after sales adaptation. The isolation module is removed and the
BPFE directly connected to the diag&com voltage release.
For both solutions, terminal A2 of the XF diag&com voltage release can be used to
close the circuit breaker by means of an external closing pushbutton. Terminal A3
can be used to insert the safety functions of the installation
For safety reasons, the BPFE is generally associated with the pushbutton locking
VBP that forbids access to the mechanical closing pushbutton.
DB425695.eps

DB425694.eps

External
closing Safety External
push functions closing Safety
button push functions
button
A2 A3

XF A2 A3
diag&com
BPFE
XF
diag&com
A1

Isolation A1
BPFE Micrologic X
Module

BPFE standard solution performed in factory BPFE customized solution

performed after sale
D-20
www.schneider-electric.com
Customize your circuit breaker with accessories
Operation efficiency
Controlling

Remote reset after fault trip

DB419110.eps
When a fault trip happens, the fault trip indicator SDE indicates ‘fault’ and the reset
button pops up. To close the breaker, the reset button needs to be pressed down.
To do a remote reset after fault trip, two solutions, RES and RAR, Reset Fault
are provided. order
82 84
K2

Electric reset after fault trip RES

This function resets the SDE fault trip indication and voltage releases the circuit
breaker mechanism, the reset button goes in and circuit breaker closing is possible. SDE
A power supply of 100/130 V AC or 200/240 V AC is required to enable this function.
Note: The additional Fault Trip indication contact SDE2 is not compatible with RES.

Automatic reset after fault trip RAR 81

In the case of RAR, it is no longer required to press the reset button to enable the
circuit breaker closing after tripping. The circuit breaker is closed with the Reset
button still popped up and the SDE indication still indicating ‘fault’. The SDE
indications will remain in fault position until the reset button is pressed. Remote reset after fault trip
D
Note: To achieve remote closing after fault trip, closing voltage release XF and electric motor
MCH are required in addition to RES or RAR.

Note: an opening order always takes priority over a closing order. If opening and closing orders
occur simultaneously, the mechanism discharges without any movement of the main contacts. DB429640.ai

The circuit breaker remains in the open position (OFF).

In the event of maintained opening and closing orders, the standard mechanism provides an
anti-pumping function by blocking the main contacts in open position.
Anti-pumping function. After fault tripping or intentional opening using the manual or electric
controls, the closing order must first be discontinued, then reactivated to close the circuit
breaker.
Electric reset after fault trip RES
When the automatic reset after fault trip (RAR) option is installed, to avoid pumping following
a fault trip, the automatic control system must take into account the information supplied by
the circuit breaker before issuing a new closing order or blocking the circuit breaker in the
open position (information on the type of fault, e.g. overload, short-time fault, earth fault, earth
leakage, short-circuit, etc.).
DB429639.ai

Automatic reset after fault trip RAR

Electric motor MCH

The electric motor automatically charges the spring mechanism when the circuit
breaker is closed. Instantaneous reclosing of the breaker is thus possible following
PB100808-32.eps

opening. The spring-mechanism charging handle can be used as a backup if the

auxiliary power supply is absent.
The electric motor MCH is equipped as standard with a limit switch contact CH that
signals the charged position of the mechanism.
PB100797-23.eps

The electric motor MCH require a power supply separate from the Micrologic X
power supply.
Characteristics
Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/240 - 277- 380/415 - 400/440
- 480
V DC 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/125 - 200/250
Operating threshold 0.85 to 1.1 Un
Consumption (VA or W) 180
Motor overcurrent 2 to 3 In for 0.1 s
Charging time maximum 3 s for Masterpact MTZ1
maximum 4 s for Masterpact MTZ2, MTZ3
Operating frequency maximum 3 cycles per minute
CH contact 10 A at 240 V Electric motor MCH for Electric motor MCH for
Masterpact MTZ1 Masterpact MTZ2 and
MTZ3

D-21
 Customize your circuit breaker with accessories www.schneider-electric.com

Protection of people and property

Locking and interlocking

Safety is always the priority. Masterpact MTZ provides a high degree of safety to both people and property through
the following aspects:
b Locking and Interlocking
b Circuit Protection
b Operation Protection
b Mechanical Protection.
Locking and interlocking
It is of great importance to ensure that the breaker is only operated by a certified and authorized person.
It is for both the safety of the operator and the safety of the property. Another important aspect is to minimize the
chances of incorrect operation which may lead to high safety risk.
Locking and interlocking accessories ensure that the circuit breaker is operated by the right person at the right time
in accordance with local rules and regulations.

A B C D E

D
DB419914.ai

CT1
CT2 914
924 912
CT3 922 911
OF1 934 921
14 932
OF2 12 931
OF3 24 11
34 22
OF4 32 21
44 31
OF11 42
114 41
OF12 112
124 111
OF13 122
134 121
OF14 132
144 131
OF24 142
214 141
OF22 212
224 211
OF23 222
234 221
OF24 232
244 231
242
241
MCH
PF B2
254 B3
XF 252 B1
A2
2 MX1 C2 A3 251
MN/MX C3 A1
D2/C12
/C13 C1
D1/C11
CE1
CE2 314
324 312
CE3 322 311
334 321
SDE1
84 332
MC2 82 331
UC3 484 81
- 474
UC4 VN- 471
2 V3
es

- V2
SDE2/R
UC2M3/T1 184/K V1
T5 182/ 1
UC1M1 M2 AF3
T2
AF2
181/K
COM - T6 Z4 AF1
- - Z3 Z1
Z2
- F1-
CD1 F2+
CD2 814
824 812
CD3 822 811
834 821
832
831

SDE1
MC2
M2C
UC3
SDE2 UC4
UC2 /Res
UC1

K UC
1
UC
2

00000

Pull

-20 H3
MTZ2
Ig Op. Test
/ Reset

Isd
TRIP CAUSE

Ir I n
Ii

7.0 X
847604
0002LV
ID: 152752
198942

A
In 1600

J I H G F

A VPEC - door interlock catch E VCPO/VSPO - OFF position locking I IBPO - interlock between racking handle
and OFF pushbutton
B VO - Safety shutters F VBP - ON/OFF pushbutton locking
J 
b VSPD - Chassis locking in disconnected
C VIVC - shutter position indication G V DC - mismatch protection
position: by keylock
and locking b Chassis locking in disconnected position
H VPOC - racking interlock
D IPA - cable-type door interlock by padlock
K Shutter locking block
D-22
www.schneider-electric.com
Customize your circuit breaker with accessories
Protection of people and property
Locking and interlocking

Pushbutton locking VBP

PB116201_60.eps
Open and close pushbuttons can be blocked by using VBP. It consists of two
transparent covers which can be locked with any of the following:
bb padlock (not supplied), 5 to 8 mm,
bb lead seal,
bb two screws.
The opening button and the closing button can be locked independently.
Access to pushbuttons protected
by transparent cover VBP.
Device locking in the OFF position VCPO with

PB116202_60.eps
padlocks, VSPO with keylocks
The circuit breaker can be locked in the OFF position by physically maintaining the
opening pushbutton pressed down:
bb using padlocks (one to three padlocks, not supplied), shackle Ø5 to 8 mm
bb using keylocks (one or two different keylocks, supplied).
 
Keys may be removed only when locking is effective (Profalux or Ronis type locks).
The keylocks are available in any of the following configurations: Pushbutton locking with padlock VBP.
D
bb one keylock

PB116203_35.eps
bb one keylock mounted on the device + one identical keylock supplied separately for
interlocking with another device
bb two different keylocks for double locking.
Profalux and Ronis keylocks are compatible with each other.
A locking kit (without locks) is available for installation of one or two keylocks (Ronis,
Profalux, Kirk or Castell).
 
Accessory-compatibility
For Masterpact MTZ1: 3 padlocks or 1 keylock. OFF position locking with padlock VCPO.
For Masterpact MTZ2, MTZ3: 3 padlocks and/or 2 keylocks.
 
PB116204_40.eps

For MTZ1, either keylock or padlock can be used. For MTZ2 and 3, padlock will
always be available when keylock is selected. Padlock and keylock can be used at
the same time.

Disconnected position locking with padlocks

OFF position locking with keylock VSPO.
(standard) or keylocks (VSPD option)
Another way to lock the circuit breaker in the disconnected position is to use the
locks on the chassis. It is feasible only when the door is closed.
PB116205_60.eps

Two options are available:

bb using padlocks (standard), up to three padlocks (not supplied),
bb using keylocks (optional), one or two different keylocks are available.
Profalux and Ronis keylocks are available in different options: Disconnected position locking
vv one keylock, with padlocks.
vv two different keylocks for double locking,
vv one (or two) keylocks mounted on the device + one (or two) identical keylocks
supplied separately for interlocking with another device.
A locking kit (without locks) is available for installation of one or two keylocks (Ronis,
Profalux, Kirk or Castell).

Connected, disconnected and test position locking

PB116206_60.eps

The connected, disconnected and test positions are shown by an indicator and are
mechanically indexed. The exact position is obtained when the racking handle
blocks. A voltage release button is used to free it.
As standard, the circuit breaker can be locked only in disconnected position. Disconnected position locking
On request, the locking system may be modified to lock the circuit breaker in any of by keylocks VSPD.
the three positions: connected, disconnected or test.

D-23
 Customize your circuit breaker with accessories www.schneider-electric.com

Protection of people and property

Locking and interlocking

Safety shutters with padlocking VO

When the circuit breaker is in the disconnected or test position, there is a
possibility for an operator to accidentally touch the disconnected contact cluster or to
accidentally slide back to the connected position, causing a safety risk to the
PB116207_60.eps

operator and to the installation.

Mounted on the chassis, safety shutters close automatically when the breaker is
in disconnected or test position. It ensures the insulation distance and physical
segregation between the live parts and the compartment of the chassis
Safety shutters with padlocking VO (Degree of protection: IP 20).
The shutter-locking system locks the safety shutters in the closed position and
prevents the insertion of the device. For MTZ1, safety shutters can be padlocked
directly. For MTZ 2/MTZ3, the shutter-locking system is made up of separate parts
that can be padlocked.
There are in total 2 blocks for MTZ2 and 4 blocks for MTZ3.
For MTZ 2/MTZ3, a support at the back of the chassis is used to store the blocks
when they are not in use.
D
Shutter position indication and locking VIVC
PB116012.eps

Alternatively, shutter position indication and locking (VIVC) can also be used to lock
the safety shutters.
This device is installed on the chassis front plate and allows the locking operation to
be realized outside the chassis compartment. The upper and lower shutters can be
indicated independently and locked either independently or together.
One to three padlocks can be used. (padlocks are not supplied)
Note: This option is applicable for MTZ2/3 only.

Shutter position indication and locking VIVC

Cable-type door interlock IPA

DB419918.ai

This option prevents door opening when the circuit breaker is closed and prevents
circuit breaker closing when the door is open.
To implement this option, a special plate associated with a lock and a cable is
mounted on the right side of the circuit breaker.
This option is not compatible with the source changeover function.
This option is identical for fixed and drawout versions.

Cable-type door interlock IPA

D-24
www.schneider-electric.com
Customize your circuit breaker with accessories
Protection of people and property
Locking and interlocking

Racking interlock VPOC

DB419919.ai
This device prevents insertion of the racking handle when the cubicle door is open.

Racking interlock VPOC

Door interlock catch VPEC

PB116034_30.eps
Mounted on the right or left-hand side of the chassis, this device inhibits opening of
the cubicle door when the circuit breaker is in connected or test position.
If the breaker is put in the connected position with the door open, the door may be
closed without having to disconnect the circuit breaker.
D

Door interlock catch VPEC

DB421347.ai

Racking interlock between racking handle and

OFF pushbutton IBPO (for MTZ2, MTZ3 only)
This option makes it necessary to press the OFF pushbutton in order to insert the
racking handle and holds the device open until the handle is removed.

Racking interlock between racking handle and

OFF pushbutton IBPO (for MTZ2, MTZ3 only)

Mismatch protection V DC
PB100815-32R_SE.eps

Mismatch protection ensures that a circuit breaker is inserted only in a chassis with
compatible characteristics. It is made up of two parts (one on the chassis and one on
the circuit breaker) offering twenty different combinations that the user may select
from.

Mismatch protection V DC

D-25
 Customize your circuit breaker with accessories www.schneider-electric.com

Protection of people and property

Circuit protection

Micrologic X external sensors and voltage measurement inputs enlarge the protection functions of Micrologic X.
Instantaneous voltage release also prevents property from being damaged.

A B

D
DB419900.ai

Pull

-20 H3
MTZ2

M3
M2
M1

A TCE - external sensor for neutral and residual earth fault protection
B SGR - external sensor for source ground return protection
C Rectangular sensor for earth-leakage protection

D-26
www.schneider-electric.com
Customize your circuit breaker with accessories
Protection of people and property
Circuit protection

TCE external sensor for neutral and residual earth

LV833576SP_image.eps
fault protection
Installed on the neutral conductor,the external sensor enables circuit breaker to
perform:
bb neutral protection for 3P only
bb neutral current measurement
bb earth fault protection for 3P circuit breakers in TNS System.
 
The rating of the sensor (CT) must be compatible with the rating of the circuit External sensor for neutral and residual earth fault
breaker: protection (TCE)
bb MTZ1 06 to MTZ1 16: TC 400/1600
bb MTZ2 08 to MTZ2 20: TC 400/2000 N L1 L2 L3

DB421680.ai

AF1
AF2
AF3
bb MTZ2 25 to MTZ2 40: TC 1000/4000

VN
V1
V2
V3
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4
  b MTZ3 40 to MTZ3 63: TC 4000/6300.
b

For MTZ1 or MTZ2, a single sensor with a single wire is provided.

For MTZ3 both single sensor with single wire and double sensor with double wire
are available. D
Q
For oversized neutral protection the sensor rating must be compatible with the I
Micrologic 6.0 X
measurement range: 1.6 x In (available up to MTZ2 40 for MTZ2 and MTZ1 16 for U
MTZ1).

M1
M2
M3
T1
T2
T5
T6
F1‒
F2+
H2
H1

SGR External sensor for source ground return

06133779A.eps

protection
The sensor is installed around the connection of the transformer neutral point to
the earth and connected to the Micrologic 6.0 X control unit via an MDGF module
to provide the source ground return (SGR) protection.

Connection of the secondary circuit

Masterpact equipped with a Micrologic 6.0 X:
External sensor for source ground return protection
bb between external transformer and MDGF module:
(SGR)
vv unshielded cable with 1 twisted pair,
vv maximum length 150 meters,
DB421148.AI

vv cable cross-sectional area 0.4 to 1.5 mm2,

vv recommended cable: Belden 9409 or equivalent.
AF1
AF2
AF3
VN
V1
V2
V3
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4

bb between MDGF module and Micrologic X:

vv unshielded cable,
vv maximum length 10 meters,
vv cable cross-sectional area 0.8 to 2.5 mm2,
vv recommended cable: Belden 9409 or equivalent, Q
vv terminals 5 and 6 may not be used at the same time: I
-- use terminal 5 for MTZ1 and MTZ2, Micrologic 6.0 X
U
-- use terminal 6 for MTZ3.
M1
M2
M3
T1
T2
T5
T6
F1‒
F2+

or

H1 X1 12 5 6 7
1
H2 3 MDGF module
X2
PE

D-27
 Customize your circuit breaker with accessories www.schneider-electric.com

Protection of people and property

Circuit protection

Rectangular sensor for earth-leakage protection

PB100834-48.eps

Rectangular sensor enables the detection of zero-phase sequence current which is

required for the earth-leakage protection.
It is installed around the busbars (phases + neutral) and comes with two sizes to
cover different installation needs.
Inside dimensions (mm):
bb 280 x 115 up to 1600 A for Masterpact MTZ1 and MTZ2, MTZ3
Rectangular sensor for earth-leakage protection bb 470 x 160 up to 3200 A for Masterpact MTZ2, MTZ3.

N L1 L2 L3
DB419103.eps

AF1
AF2
AF3
VN
V1
V2
V3
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4

D Q

I
Micrologic 7.0X
U
M1
M2
M3
T1
T2
T5
T6
F1‒
F2+

M1
M2
M3

D-28
 www.schneider-electric.com
Customize your circuit breaker with accessories
Protection of people and property
Operation and mechanical protection

Operating protection
Adding safety check points and reducing the safety risk during daily operation to the minimum level is a primary
concern. The following accessories add safety especially when physical touching of the circuit breaker is required.
Mechanical protection
In addition to the protection using electrical components, these accessories use simple mechanical structures to
enhance the safety of both people and property.
DB424866.ai

A B C

D
CT1
CT2 914
924 912
CT3 922 911
OF1 934 921
14 932
OF2 12 931
OF3 24 11
34 22
OF4 32 21
44 31
OF11 42
114 41
OF12 112
124 111
OF13 122
134 121
OF14 132
144 131
OF24 142
214 141
OF22 212
224 211
OF23 222
234 221
OF24 232
244 231
242
241
MCH
PF B2
254 B3
XF 252 B1
MX1 A2 251
2 C2 A3
MN/MX C3 A1
D2/C12
/C13 C1
D1/C11
CE1
CE2 314
324 312
CE3 322 311
334 321
SDE1
84 332
MC2 82 331
UC3 484 81
- 474
UC4 VN- 471
2 V3
es

- V2
SDE2/R
UC2M3/T1 184/K V1
T5 182/ 1
UC1M1 M2 AF3
T2
AF2
181/K
COM - T6 Z4 AF1
- - Z3 Z1
Z2
- F1-
CD1 F2+
CD2 814
824 812
CD3 822 811
834 821
832
831

SDE1
MC2
M2C
UC3
SDE2 UC4
UC2 /Res
UC1

UC
UC 2
1

00000

Isd
Ig
I n
Op. Test
/ Reset
Pull
TRIP CAUSE

Ir Ii

7.0 X
-20 H3
MTZ2
847604
0002LV
ID: 152752
198942

A
In 1600

Pull

G Pull
F E D

Operation protection Mechanical protection

A CB - terminal block shield D CCP - transparent cover for escutcheon F CDP - escutcheon
B DAE - automatic spring discharge before E OP - blanking plate for escutcheon G Transparent cover for Micrologic X
breaker removal
C KMT - grounding kit

D-29
 Customize your circuit breaker with accessories www.schneider-electric.com

Protection of people and property

Operation and mechanical protection

Automatic spring discharge before breaker removal

DB424865.ai

DAE (for MTZ2, MTZ3 only)

This option automatically discharges the spring before the breaker is removed from
the chassis.

Automatic spring discharge DAE

Grounding kit KMT

DB419114.eps

This option allows the grounding of the breaker mechanism while the front cover is
removed. The grounding is made via the chassis for the drawout version and via the
fixation side plate for the fixed version.

Grounding kit KMT.

CB terminal block shield

DB419669.eps

Optional equipment mounted on the chassis, the shield prevents access to the
terminal block of the electrical auxiliaries.

CB terminal block shield

Blanking plate OP for escutcheon

Used with the escutcheon, this option closes off the door cut-out of a cubicle not yet
DB419923.ai

equipped with a device. It may be used with the escutcheon for both fixed and
drawout devices.

Blanking plate OP for escutcheon

DB419672.eps

Transparent cover CCP for escutcheon

Optional equipment mounted on the escutcheon, the cover is hinged and secured by
a screw. It increases the degree of protection to IP54, IK10. It only adapts to drawout
devices.

Transparent cover CCP for escutcheon.

D-30
www.schneider-electric.com
Customize your circuit breaker with accessories
Protection of people and property
Operation and mechanical protection

Door cut-out and escutcheon CDP

Optional equipment mounted on the door of the cubicle, the escutcheon increases
the degree of protection to IP40 (circuit breaker installed free standing: IP30).
It is available in fixed and drawout versions.

Door cut-out (see chapter F for more information)

MTZ1 MTZ2/MTZ3
Fixed Drawout Fixed Drawout

WIth or without escutcheon Without escutcheon WIth or without escutcheon Without escutcheon

WIth escutcheon WIth escutcheon

Escutcheon (see chapter F for more information)

MTZ1 MTZ2/MTZ3
Fixed Drawout Fixed Drawout

D-31
 Customize your circuit breaker with accessories www.schneider-electric.com

Power Availability and reliability

Power supplies

Power availability and reliability is crucial in all situations. These accessories make the different ways of powering up
Micrologic X possible.
DB419902.ai

A B C

G4
G3 N
L

ly 1A
er supp 5Vc
C Pow
AC/D54444 1.5A
LVA4
: 200/2
40V 5Vc
Input
ut 2.4A
0.25A
Hz Outp 5Vc
50/60 C
ut: 24VD
Outp
1A

ge
volta 4)
Over el (OVC
lev
High

SDE1
MC2
M2C
UC3
SDE2 UC4
UC2 /Res
UC1

UC
UC 2
1

-20 H3
MTZ2

00000

Ig Op. Test
/ Reset

Isd
I n
TRIP CAUSE

Ir Ii

7.0 X
847604
0002LV
ID: 152752
198942

A
In 1600

E D

FORE
T BE
NNEC ST
DISCOCTRIC TE
DIELE

A External 24 V DC power supply module

(AD)
B Power Pack for Micrologic X
C ABL8 24 V DC power supply
D Voltage power supply VPS module
E Spare internal battery

D-32
www.schneider-electric.com
Customize your circuit breaker with accessories
Power Availability and reliability
Power supplies

Micrologic X power supplies

bb The basic functions of protection performed by the Micrologic X (LSIG: Long-time
overload protection, Short-time short circuit protection, Instantaneous short circuit
protection, Earth fault protection) do not require external power supply.
They are self powered by the currents delivered by the current transformers
embedded in the MTZ circuit breaker, except the earth-leakage protection in
Micrologic 7.0 X which requires the installation of the VPS module.
bb When the circuit breaker load current is above 20 % of the rated current the proper
operation of all the functions processed by the Micrologic X is ensured.
This includes:
vv The functions of protection
vv All the measures with the accuracies specified on page B-21 of this catalogue
vv The diagnosis
vv The HMI (Embedded display and key pad)
vv The wireless features (Bluetooth and proprietary connectivity).
bb When the load current falls below 20 % of the rated current, the VPS module or
an external 24 V DC power supply is needed to maintain the operation of
Micrologic X with its specified performances.
bb The external 24 V DC is compulsory to supply power the following devices and
D
functions associated with Micrologic X:
vv EIFE module
vv IFE module
vv IFM module
vv I/O module
vv M2C programmable contact
vv ESM - ERMS switch module
vv FDM 128.
vv The optional protections provided by the optional digital modules
Two types of 24 V DC power supplies are offered to supply power to the Micrologic X
and its associated modules:
bb the 24 V DC power supply module (AD)
bb the 24 V DC Universal Phaseo ABL8 RPS 24050 and ABL8 RPS 24030 power supply.
In addition, a portable PowerPack battery can be used to supply power to the
Micrologic X through its mini USB port.

Voltage Power Supply VPS module for Micrologic X

PB115958_60.eps
When the current is below 20 % of the rated current providing presence of three-
phase or two-phase voltage downstream of the circuit breaker (circuit breaker
closed), the VPS module ensures the operation and performance of Micrologic X.
This includes:
bb All the measures with the accuracies specified page B-21 of this catalogue
bb The HMI (Embedded display and key pad)
bb The wireless features( Bluetooth and proprietary connectivity). Voltage Power Supply VPS module
The VPS module is provided as standard for Micrologic 7.0 X to perform earth
leakage protection. The input voltage of the VPS module is limited to 600 V.
Above 600 V it shall be supplied from an external voltage by means of the PTE
option and voltage transformers. Presence of 24 V on VPS output is signaled by a
green LED on the front face of the module. The VPS module can be easily installed
in the bottom part of the Micrologic X, with two positions:
bb First position: The VPS module is plugged and all connections are realized
(AC inputs and 24 DC output). A mechanical interlock locks the VPS in this position.
To unlock the VPS it is mandatory to open the battery cover and pull the locking handle
bb Second position: This is an intermediate position where no power is connected
(AC inputs and 24 DC output). In this position the VPS is completed isolated.
This position allows you to perform the switchboard dielectric tests without risks.
Power supply input
Three phase 208 - 600 V AC +10% -30% 2.6 W
Two phase 208 - 600 V AC +10% -15% 1.7 W

D-33
 Customize your circuit breaker with accessories www.schneider-electric.com

Power Availability and reliability

Power supplies

24 V DC power supply module (AD)

DB419722.ai

Characteristics
bb Power supply AC: 110/130, 200/240, 380/415 V AC, 50/60 Hz +10%, -15%.
bb Power supply DC: 24/30, 48/60, 100/125 V AC, ±20%.
G4
G3 N
L

ply
bb Output voltage: 24 V DC ±5%.
bb Output current: 1 A.
er sup
Pow
AC /DC
444
LVA454 /240V
t: 200
Inpu
0.25A t
Outpu
50/60Hz

bb Ripple: < 1%.

24VDC
Output:
1A

olta ge
Overv
level
(OVC4)

bb Dielectric withstand: 3.5 kV rms between input and output for 1 minute.
High

bb Overvoltage category: as per IEC/EN 60947-1 Cat. IV.

bb Maximum operating temperature surrounding the power supply when installed
External 24 V DC power supply module (AD)
inside a switchboard: 60 °C.
Connection
N L1 L2 L3
DB419092R.eps

bb The maximum length for each conductor supplying the power to Micrologic X
module is 10 m.
bb The positive terminal (F2+) on Micrologic X must not be connected to the earth.
bb The negative terminal (F1-) on Micrologic X must not be connected to the earth.
AF1
AF2
AF3
VN
V1
V2
V3
Z1
Z2
Z3
Z4

bb The output terminals (- and +) of the 24 V DC power supply must not be connected
D to the earth.
bb Reduce electromagnetic interference:
vv the input and output wires of the 24 V DC power supply must be physically
Q
separated as much as possible
I vv the 24 V DC wires (output of the 24 V DC power supply) shall be twisted together.
Micrologic X
U vv the 24 V DC wires (output of the 24 V DC power supply) must cross all power
cables perpendicularly
vv Power supply conductors must be cut to length. Do not loop excess conductor.
F2+
F1‒
M1
M2
M3
T1
T2
T5
T6

G1 G2
AD
module
G3 G4

110/415 V AC
24/125 V DC

D-34
www.schneider-electric.com
Customize your circuit breaker with accessories
Power Availability and reliability
Power supplies

24 V DC Universal Phaseo™ ABL8 power supplies

PF106349SE_ABL8RPS24050.eps
bb The Universal Phaseo ABL8 RPS 24050 and ABL8 RPS 24030 power supplies
can be connected phase-to-neutral or phase-to-phase.
bb They deliver a voltage that is precise to 3%, whatever the load and whatever the
value of the AC supply, within the ranges 85 to 132 V AC and 170 to 550 V AC.
bb To assist cooling there must be sufficient clearance around the Universal range
Phaseo power supplies:
vv 50 mm above and below
vv 10 mm on the side.
Characteristics
ABL8RPSpppp Module AD
Over Voltage Category Cat II Cat IV ABL8 RPS power supply
as per IEC/EN 60947-1
Degree of pollution 2 3
as per IEC 60664-1
Input supply voltage AC 100…120 V AC and 110/130 or 200/240

Input supply voltage DC

200…500 V AC
N/A
or 380/415 V AC
24/30 or 48/60 D
or 100/125 V DC
Dielectric Input/Output 4 kV rms -1 mn. 3,5 kV rms - 1 mn.
(380 V AC model)
3 kV rms - 1 mn.
(110/130 V AC and
200/240 V AC model)
3 kV rms - 1 mn.
(110/125 V DC model)
2 kV rms - 1 mn. (24/30 V DC
and 48/60 V DC model)
Input/Ground 3.5 kV rms -1 mn.
Ouput /Ground 0,5 kV rms - 1 mn.
Temperature bb 50 °C 70°C
bb 60 °C with 80 % of
the rated current
maximum
Output current 3 A (ABL8RPS24030) 1A
5 A (ABL8RPS24050)
Ripple 200 mV peak-peak 240 mV peak-peak
Output voltage setting 24 to 28,8 V DC N/A
for line loss compensation
Note: For the applications requiring an over voltage category higher than 2, a surge arrester
shall be associated to ABL8 RPS power supplies. The iQuick20prd type 2 surge arrester is
recommended.

D-35
 Customize your circuit breaker with accessories www.schneider-electric.com

Power Availability and reliability

Power supplies

Mobile Power Pack for Micrologic X

PB115956_60.eps

The mobile portable Power Pack battery is a manufactured & tested Schneider Electric
device that can energize the Micrologic X through its mini USB port.
It allows to use the embedded display & keypad for basic settings & reading or access
to complementary tripping information during shutdown.
Mobile Power Pack can be easily recharged by connecting it to a PC or a charger
Mobile Power Pack for Micrologic X equipped with a USB port.
The Remaining power available in Power Pack can be read when pressing the
power button for 1 second.
The Power Pack can also be used to charge a smartphone (a USB cable with a mini
Status Indicators
USB port is provided for this purpose ).
Battery capacity State explanation This item can be ordered as a spare part.
display
100 %
A
70 %
F

40 %
G H
D 15 %
< 15 %
I
0%
1A
5Vc
1.5A
5Vc
2.4A
5Vc

J H
Battery charging in progress

Internal fault E D C B

A Battery capacity display E Power button I Cable for power

B USB 5 V / 1 V output F Cable battery charging Micrologic X trip unit
C Micro-USB 5 V / 1.5 A G mini USB connector J Micro USB connector
input H USB connector
D USB 5 V / 2.4 V output
DB421457.ai

Spare internal battery

The Micrologic X control unit is equipped with an internal battery dedicated to the
supply of the trip causes LEDs and the internal clock. The battery can be replaced on
site when discharged.
Spare internal battery The battery is lithium type. Its service life is approximately ten years.
A test button on the front of the control unit is used to check the battery condition.
This item can be ordered as a spare part.

D-36
www.schneider-electric.com

Integrate in Smart panels -

Architecture and systems

Architecture overview............................................................. E-2

Components
ULP interface module......................................................................E-12
EIFE embedded Ethernet interface.................................................E-14
IFE Ethernet interface......................................................................E-16
IFM Modbus interface......................................................................E-18
I/O Application module....................................................................E-20
FDM128 Display Unit ......................................................................E-22

Customer engineering tool: Ecoreach software ........E-24

Other chapters
Select your circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors.............................. A-1
Select your Micrologic X control unit........................................................... B-1
Customize your Micrologic X with digital modules......................................C-1
Customize your circuit breaker with accessories........................................D-1
Integrate in switchboard............................................................................. F-1
Integrate in special applications - Source-changeover systems.................G-1
Services......................................................................................................H-1
Order your circuit breaker............................................................................ I-1

E-1
 Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and systems www.schneider-electric.com

Architecture overview

Ethernet-ready Smart Panels

Ethernet-ready Smart Panels enable electrical distribution control
and expertise. ‘Protect’ - ’Measure’ - ’Connect’ are the 3 pillars of
their technology.
PB115758.psd

4- Act

3- Connect
E
Give a voice to the panel
Secured Ethernet network data
transmission is now part of the intrinsic
design of protection and metering
devices.

2- Measure
Keeping a close eye
on energy flows
The switchboard plays a key role
in capturing building-related data,
by gathering the critical protection
and metering components.

1- Protect
Electrical protection is
at the core of Smart Panel
Reliable and high-performance
technology is present in every breaker
and every residual current device.

E-2
www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and systems
Architecture overview

Future savings, peace-of-mind

Access to Smart Panel status, values, is essential for taking advantages of monitoring and management services,
locally or remotely.

Act in small/medium buildings

with FDM 128, Com’X 510, Power View, EcoStruxure™ Facility Expert

Optimizing energy-efficiency
PB111801-60.eps

p Visualize, record energy consumption and WAGES.

p Comply with regulation.
E

Electrical device monitoring and control

with FDM 128, locally

Improving continuity of service

DD385918.ai

p Get instant notifications.

p Manage with assets-maintenance platform.
p Get and analyze data for quick crisis-recovery.

Com’X 510 web pages direct display, or Cloud

based pages from other devices with Power
View.

Increasing maintenance efficiency

DD385919.ai

p Operate preventive maintenance tools.

p Follow maintenance & planning.
p Provide business owner instant access
to maintenance reports.
DB423056.ai

Distance management with EcoStruxure™

Facility Expert on Smartphone, tablet, PC

E-3
 Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and systems www.schneider-electric.com

Architecture overview

Day-to-day energy management

>> Power availability & quality, energy performance
For simply dealing with building user’s needs and energy constraints.
EcoStruxure™ Building Management provides electrical management, monitoring and energy accounting.
Energy decisions are often crucial in large critical buildings, they must be informed.
EcoStruxure™ Power Monitoring Expert (software for PC) collects Smart Panels values to provide expert analysis.

Act in large non-critical buildings

with EcoStruxure™ Energy Expert

Managing equipment & key assets

DB425660.ai

p Check operating status, faults on custom

on-line diagrams.

Monitoring electrical network

DB425661.ai

p Observe voltage disturbances, harmonics on graphics.

E p Read power factor.

Accounting energy
p Record power meter data on dashboards.
DB425334.ai

p Allocate energy consumption with costs.

p Follow conservation goals.

Act in large critical buildings

with EcoStruxure™ Power Monitoring Expert [1]

Analysing Power Events

DB425657.ai

p Speed up downtime crisis recovery.

p Determine incident root cause, events sequence.
p Troubleshoot power quality issues.

Monitoring Power quality

DB425658.ai

p Be alerted of equipment affected by power quality issue.

p Compare power quality against industry standards.
p Collect facts for future discussion with Utility.

Analysing Energy Performance

DB425659.ai

p Evaluate building energy saving performance.

p Identify underperforming loads.
p Analyze Energy Conservation Measures (ECMs)
according to ISO 50001 program.
[1] EcoStruxure™ Power Monitoring Expert, http://pmedemo.biz/web/
ID: demo & Password: demo

E-4
 www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and systems

Masterpact MTZ with Micrologic X

improves Enerlin'X digital system
By collecting circuit breaker and actuator status, electrical and counting
values, Enerlin'X provides a simple and reliable access to local LCD displays
and expert applications.

Energy management and

electrical asset monitoring
DB419708.ai

have never been simpler

Masterpact MTZ
drawout circuit breaker E

With its embedded Enerlin'X EIFE

MN MX1 XF
MX2
PF MCH
module Masterpact MTZ is ready
to be connected to Ethernet
MC2 SDE1
SDE2 UC4
UC3
UC2 /Res
UC1
COM

act
Masterp
HA10 12kV
NW40 Uimp
Ui 1250V V
Ue 1150V 690/1000
Ue 50kA/1s
peak
Icw 105kA
Icm 50/60Hz NEMA

MICROLOGIC
AS
60947-2CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE 55°C
UTE
Ie
Ith 4000A Ue
(A)
(V)
4000
1000
AC23A 50/60Hz
60947-3CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE
UTE

"IP connected" switchboards have

Home
Quickview

VPS
Measures

become a key factor of evolution in energy

Power
Aux

In 1000
A ! Alarms & H...
Maintenan...
OK

management and continuity of service.

> Masterpact MTZ
mobile App
All your circuit breakers
TRIP CAUSE

Ir Isd Ig Op.
Ii I n

7.0 X
> EcoStruxure™
and energy data
ID:
1989421527520002LV847604

DISCONNECT BEFORE
Facility Expert
available via Ethernet
DIELECTRIC TEST

> EcoStruxure™
In 1600 A

and Modbus SL Facility Advisor

> EcoStruxure™ Power
Monitoring Expert
> EcoStruxure™ Power
SCADA Operation
> Any power
management system
with Modbus TCP
protocol

E-5
 Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and systems www.schneider-electric.com

Architecture overview

Ethernet has become the universal link between switchboards, computers and communicating devices inside
buildings. The large amount of information which can be transferred makes the connection of Enerlin'X digital system
to hosted web services of Schneider Electric a reality.

General architecture
DB430626.ai

Possible
connection of Internet
Micrologic X control units with its interfaces offer the following
an I/O module communication channels:
Local
on the RJ45 Supervisor
bb Connection to an Ethernet network through either an EIFE or IFE
Test

ULP connector interface module. The EIFE and IFE modules are connected to the
IFM [1] 100-230V
POWER
POWER

Micrologic X control unit by means of a ULP port and a prefabricated

ULP cord. The EIFE is dedicated to drawout circuit breakers.
POWER

OR
200
Com’X

The IFE is dedicated to fixed circuit breakers.

Com’X bb Connection to a Modbus SL RS 485 bus through an IFM interface
module. The IFM module is connected to the Micrologic X control unit
FDM128 by means of a ULP port and a prefabricated ULP cord
EIFE Module bb Communication with a smartphone via a wireless powered Bluetooth
channel or a wireless powerless NFC channel.
bb Communication with a PC via a USB port.
0V 24V

NFC
bb Connection to Internet. The connection to Internet can be performed
0V 24V

through a Com'X module connected to internal Ethernet network.

E ULP Port
Smart Phone via
Bluetooth and
In addition Micrologic X offers a wireless proprietary connectivity
interface for communication with a Com'X module.
NFC wireless
PF MCH
MN MX1 XF

To improve the capabilities of monitoring and control, one or two I/O

MX2

MC2 SDE1
SDE2 UC4
UC3
UC2 /Res
UC1
COM

Masterpact
NW40

Ue
Icw
Icm
IEC
UTE

AC23A
IEC
UTE
HA10

Ui 1250V
Ue 1150V

VDE

Ith 4000A
BS
Uimp

50kA/1s
105kA

55°C
Ue
(V)
1000
50/60Hz
60947-3CEI UNE
BS
VDE
12kV

690/1000V

peak

50/60Hz NEMA
60947-2CEI UNE
AS

Ie
(A)
4000 modules connected to the ULP bus can be associated to IFE, EIFE,
Aux

In 1000
Power

A
VPS

and IFM modules.

The EIFE is designed to monitor the three positions of the circuit
PC via
breaker when inserted in its chassis:
USB cable
bb Circuit breaker racked IN (CE contact),
Drawout circuit breaker
bb Circuit breaker racked OUT (CD contact),
bb Circuit breaker in test position (CT contact),
bb No additional I/O module is required to monitor these three positions.
DB430628.ai

The connection of an FDM 128 display unit on the Ethernet internal bus
Internet is possible for any configuration.
Local The following control orders, information and data, are made available
Supervisor
Test
on Ethernet and Modbus SL:
IFM [1] 100-230V
POWER
POWER
bb Control orders:
vv MX diag&com opening voltage release control
POWER

200
Com’X

vv XF diag&com closing voltage release control

OR Com’X bb Events:
vv All the events logged in the event logbooks of Micrologic X
FDM128
bb Status indications:
24VDC

ETH2
ETH2
ETH1
ETH1

IFE vv ON/OFF (0/F)

set)
(factory
Y.ZZ
IFE-XX.Y

IFE
C
I6 in'X
I4
I5 Enerl
C
I3
I2
C
I1
+
24VDC

vv Spring charged CH
A1

O1
I1
O2
I2
O3
I3
APP
I4
I5
I6

vv Ready to close
3
LV43406

IO
24V 0V

T2
O3 T1
34
O2 33
24
O1 23
14
13

I/O module NFC

vv Fault trip SDE
vv Connected / disconnected / test position CE/CD/CT
ULP Port
Smart Phone via
bb Measurements
Bluetooth and vv Instantaneous measurement information
NFC wireless vv Averaged measurement information
PF MCH
MN MX1 XF
MX2

SDE1
MC2
SDE2 UC4
UC3
UC2 /Res
UC1
COM
24V 0V

vv Maximeter / minimeter
vv Energy metering
Masterpact
HA10 12kV
NW40 Uimp
Ui 1250V
Ue 1150V 690/1000V
Ue 50kA/1s
peak
Icw 105kA
Icm 50/60Hz
AS NEMA
60947-2CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE 55°C
UTE
Ie
Ith 4000A Ue
(A)
(V)
4000
1000
AC23A 50/60Hz
60947-3CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE
UTE

Aux
Power VPS

vv Power quality...
ULP Port
A
In 1000

PC via
bb Operating assistance:
USB cable vv Protection settings and alarm
Fixed circuit breaker vv Histories
vv Maintenance indicators
bb Availability:
vv access control by password like existing offer. To be initialized by the user.
Ethernet Internet
ULP Wireless proprietary connectivity
Modbus SL
[1] Connection to a Modbus Network through a IFM interface.

E-6
www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and systems
Architecture overview

A Micrologic X control unit can be easily incorporated in Enerlin'X digital system by means of EIFE and IFE interface
modules. Enerlin’X provides a simple and reliable link to local LCD displays and expert applications over Ethernet.
It makes available on Ethernet most of the information collected in the circuit breakers and other electrical devices
installed in a low voltage switchboard: Status, measurements, counters and alarms etc.

DB419762.ai
System Security
Operational security is an important concern for electrical installations when it comes

y
alit
to local and remote interaction.

nti

Int
de
Confidentiality, integrity and availability (also known as the AIC triangle) is a model

eg
nfi

rity
designed to guide policies for information security within an organization and these

Co
elements are considered as the three crucial components of security.
Availability

In this context, confidentiality is a set of rules that limits access information

(equivalent to privacy), integrity is the assurance that the information is trustworthy
and accurate, and availability is a guarantee of reliable access to the information by
authorized people. Confidentiality
bb Bluetooth Smart: Wireless
Bluetooth Smart connectivity Encrypted (AES-128)
communication (IEEE 802.15.1)
Micrologic X control units are equipped with Bluetooth 4.0 Smart wireless
communication which allows to establish a connection with a smartphone equipped bb Proprietary connectivity:
Wireless encrypted
with the same technology. Bluetooth Smart complies with the IEEE 802.15.1
standard. (AES-128) internal
communication (IEEE 802.15.4)
E
NFC connectivity bb NFC: operates in very short
range (few centimeters)
Micrologic X control units are equipped with a near field communication (NFC) which
bb Compliant with NIST 800-121
allows data exchange with a smartphone equipped with the same technology and
follow the standard ISO/IEC 15693-3. concerning pairing method and
encryption.

Proprietary connectivity
Micrologic X control unit are natively equipped with a proprietary connectivity means Integrity
based on IEEE 802.15.4 standard which allows a connection with a Com'X module. bb Only Schneider Electric
firmwares can be installed in
ULP connectivity the Micrologic X control unit
ULP is a fast communication link dedicated to circuit breaker monitoring and control. bb Only Schneider Electric
It connects the circuit breaker to an Ethernet interface or to an I/O module. digital modules can be installed
ULP operates at a speed of 1 Mb/s and is plug & play. in the Micrologic X control unit.

Ethernet connectivity
Ethernet is a data link and physical layer protocol complying with the IEEE 802.3 Availability
standard. It operates at a speed of 10, 100 or 1000 Mbps. The maximum length of bb Access control done by
Ethernet cable between two devices is 100 meters. password. To be initialized by
IFE and EIFE Ethernet interfaces can be connected to a PC, a laptop or a PLC over the user to change the default
Ethernet. values.
IFE Ethernet switchboard server provides a Modbus TCP/IP gateway over Ethernet bb Restricted USB usage for
to enable Modbus TCP communication from a Modbus TCP master to any Modbus
communication profile only
slave devices connected to it. The maximum active Modbus TCP client connection is
twelve. (no mass storage).
IFE and EIFE Ethernet interfaces have an embedded web server (web page).

Modbus connectivity
Modbus SL is a communication protocol widely used in industrial networks.
It operates according to a “master-slave” mode. The slaves communicate one
at a time with the master. This is an RS 485 open bus on which communicating
Modbus devices are connected. All types of PLCs and microcomputers may be
connected on to the bus.
The maximum number of devices that may be connected to a bus depends on the
type of devices, the baud rate (19200 is recommended), the volume of data
exchanged, and the expected response time. The RS 485 physical layer offers up to
32 connection points on the bus (1 master, 31 slaves).
The maximum recommended length for the Modbus SL bus is 1200 meters.

E-7
 Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and systems www.schneider-electric.com

Architecture overview

example of digitized
switchboard architecture

c t M TZ
h i t e cture
terp
a n arc
Internet
Mas unicatio EcoStruxure™ Facility Expert
m
Com
EcoStruxure™ Facility Advisor
POWER

0V
100-23
POWER

R
POWE

200
Com’X

On site control
and monitoring system
K

E E
J

24VDC

ETH2
ETH2
ETH1
ETH1

B
set)
(factory
YY.ZZ
IFE-XX.

IFE
lin'X
I6
Ener
C
I5
I4
C
I3
I2
C
I1
+
24VDC

A1

O1
I1
O2
I2
O3
I3
APP
I4

C
I5
I6

63
LV4340

IO
T2
O3 T1
34
O2 33
24
O1 23
14
13

Compact NSX
L Compact NSX
0V
D1 D0

Compact NSX
ACT COM
LK/10-100/
NETWORK R

L
T
STATUS

M
COM ETHERNE

STATUS

F
AI2 24V
7 0V AI1 V
Q 24V +24V0
I2
6 0V
I1

Q 24V
5 0V
I1
I2 8
Q 24V
4 I1
I2 7
0V
Q 24V
3 I1
I2 6
0V
Q 24V
2 I1
I2 5
0V
Q 24V
1 I1
I2 4
0V
Q 24V
I1
I2 3
0V

2
1

PF MCH
MN MX1 XF

G
MX2

SDE1
MC2
SDE2 UC4
UC3
UC2 /Res
UC1
COM

0V
D1 D0
ACT COM
LK/10-100/
NETWORK R T
COM STATUS ETHERNE

STATUS

H
8
AI2 24V
7 0V AI1 V
Q 24V +24V0
I2
6 0V
I1

Q 24V
5 0V
I1
I2 8
Q 24V
4 I1
I2 7
0V
Q 24V
3 I1
I2 6
0V
Q 24V
2 I1
I2 5
0V
Q 24V
1 I1
I2 4
0V
Q 24V
I1
I2 3
0V

2
1

rpact
Maste HA10
12kV
NW40 Uimp
Ui 1250V
00V
Ue 1150V 690/10
s
Ue 50kA/1
peak
Icw 105kA
PF MCH
z
Icm 2 50/60H
AS NEMA
MN MX1 XF IEC
60947- CEI UNE
BS
VDE 55°C
MX2 UTE
Ie
Ith 4000A Ue
(A)
(V)
MC2 SDE1
4000
1000
SDE2 UC4
UC3 z
AC23A 3 50/60H
UC2 /Res IEC
60947- CEI UNE
UC1 VDE
BS
COM UTE

Aux
Power VPS

I
act
Masterp
HA10 12kV
NW40 Uimp
Ui 1250V A
V In 1000
Ue 1150V 690/1000
Ue 50kA/1s
peak
Icw 105kA
Icm 50/60Hz
AS NEMA
60947-2CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE 55°C
UTE
Ie
Ith 4000A Ue
(A)
(V)
4000
1000
AC23A 50/60Hz
60947-3CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE
UTE

Masterpact fixed
+24VDC
CMD
SDOF
0V

Aux

In 1000
Power

A
VPS

circuit breaker

Masterpact drawout
circuit breaker
ULP is a fast communication
link dedicated to circuit A Com'X H Acti9 Smartlink Ethernet
breaker monitoring and control
B FDM128 I Acti9 Smartlink Modbus
24 V DC ULP C EIFE J IFM
Ethernet Internet D IFE K Switch
Modbus SL Wireless proprietary connectivity
E I/O L ULP port

Note: For every Masterpact MTZ the 24 V DC supply of all the associated interface modules F Acti9 Smartlink SIB M ULP cord
(ULP port, IFE, IFM, I/O) must be delivered from the same 24 V DC power supply. Ethernet
G Powertag with radio
frequency communication
E-8
www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and systems
Architecture overview

Enerlin'X digital devices for Masterpact connection and monitoring

Name Function Protocol Bin. Analog. Bin. Cat. No.
Input Input Output
(to device) (to server)
b Com'X 200 Energy data logger Modbus Web 6 2 - EBX200
A (230 V AC, with Ethernet SL & services
24 V DC supply) Gateway [1] function TCP/IP
b Com'X 210
(24 V DC supply) EBX210
Com'X 510 Ethernet server with Modbus Web 6 2 - EBX510
Ethernet Gateway [1] SL & services
function TCP/IP
FDM128 Ethernet LCD Modbus - - - - LV434128
colour touch display TCP/IP
B

EIFE Embedded ULP Modbus - - - LV851001

Ethernet interface [2] TCP/IP
C

IFE
switchboard
Ethernet interface [2] ULP
& Gateway Modbus
Modbus
TCP/IP
- - - LV434002 E
server SL &
D TCP/IP
IFE Ethernet interface ULP Modbus - - - LV434001
interface for circuit breakers TCP/IP

IFM Modbus interface ULP Modbus - - - LV434000

interface for circuit breakers SL

I/O Input/Output ULP - 6 1 3 LV434063

application module
E for circuit breaker

[1] Gateway: transfers data from one network to another (i.e.: Ethernet to Internet or Modbus serial link to Ethernet).
[2] Interface: transfers data from a device to a network.(i.e.: ULP to Ethernet).

Commissioning / maintenance tools

Plug and play commissioning tools give real added value to panel builders as
their panels can be functionally checked before delivery.

Ecoreach engineering tool allows:

bb to set up and test a switchboard,
bb to install digital modules,
bb to reduce commissioning time and speed-up Factory Acceptance Tests (FAT)
and Site Acceptance Tests (SAT),
bb to improve preventive maintenance work.

E-9
 Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and systems www.schneider-electric.com

Architecture overview
DB425729.ai

C
PF MCH
MN MX1 XF
MX2

MC2 SDE1
SDE2 UC4
UC3
UC2 /Res
UC1
COM

Masterpact
HA10 12kV
NW40 Uimp
Ui 1250V
Ue 1150V 690/1000V
Ue 50kA/1s
peak
Icw 105kA
Icm 50/60Hz
AS NEMA
60947-2CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE 55°C
UTE
Ie
Ith 4000A Ue
(A)
(V)
4000
1000
AC23A 50/60Hz
60947-3CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE
UTE

Aux
Power VPS

A
In 1000

B
PF MCH
MN MX1 XF
MX2

SDE1
MC2
SDE2 UC4
UC3
UC2 /Res
UC1
COM

0V
D1 D0
COM

F
8

E
7
6
ct 5
Masterpa
HA10 12kV
NW40 Uimp 4
Ui 1250V
3
Ue 1150V 690/1000V
50kA/1s
Ue peak 2
Icw 105kA
Icm 50/60Hz NEMA
AS 1
60947-2CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE 55°C
UTE
Ie
Ith 4000A Ue
(A)
(V)
4000
1000
AC23A 50/60Hz
60947-3CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE
UTE

VPS

G
Power
Aux

A
In 1000

0V
D1 D0
COM

8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

H
I6
C
I5
I4
C
I3
I2
C
I1
+
24VDC

I
A1

O1
I1
O2
I2
O3
I3
APP
I4

E
I5
I6

LV434063

IO

+24VDC
CMD
SDOF0V

J
24VDC

ETH2
ETH2
ETH1
ETH1

set)
set)
(factory
(factory
IFE-XX.YY.ZZ
IFE-XX.YY.ZZ
CT
IFE LK/10-100/A
ETH1 CT
IFE
Enerlin'X
LK/10-100/A
ETH2 Status
Module
Status
Network
Modbus-SL

D
LV434002

A
POWER

100-230V
POWER

POWER

200
Com’X

G
K COM
D1 D0
0V

F
/ACT
LK/10-100
K
NETWOR R T
COM STATUS ETHERNE

STATUS

0V
+24V

8
7
6
5
4
3

A B C D E J K
2
1

0V
D1 D0
COM

H
/ACT
LK/10-100
K
NETWOR R T
COM STATUS ETHERNE

STATUS

0V
+24V
24VDC
8
C
I6 7
I5
I4
ETH2
I3
C 6
ETH2 I2
C
ETH1 I1 5
ETH1
+
24VDC 4
3
2
1
POWER
A1
0V
100-23
POWER set)
(factory
.YY.ZZ O1
IFE-XX I1
T O2
R IFE 100/AC I2
LK/10-
POWE lin'X ETH1 T I3
O3
Ener 100/AC

I
LK/10- APP
ETH2 I4
e Status
Modul I5
rk Status I6
Netwo
s-SL
Modbu
200
Com’X 063
02 LV434
LV4340

IO
T2
O3 T1
34
O2 33
24
O1 23
14
13

Ethernet A Com'X G Powertag with radio Breaker ULP cord: ULP cable:
Modbus SL B FDM128 frequency communication bb 0.3 m bb 0.3 m
ULP C EIFE H Acti9 Smartlink Ethernet bb 1.3 m bb 0.6 m
D IFE I Acti9 Smartlink Modbus bb 3 m bb 1 m
E I/O J IFM bb 3 m
F Acti9 Smartlink SIB Ethernet K Switch bb 5 m

E-10
 www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and systems
Architecture overview

ULP Wiring system

The wiring system is designed for low-voltage power switchboards. Installation requires no tools or special skills.
The prefabricated wiring ensures both data transmission and power supply for the communications modules
associated with Micrologic X control units.

Communication architecture
Possible connection of
MTZ Drawout circuit breaker an I/O module on the
RJ45 ULP connector.
DB419630.ai

B ULP system
C
I6

D
A
I5
I4
C
I3
I2
C
I1

ULP system is a fast

+ C
24VD

A1

communication link dedicated

O1
I1
O2
I2
O3
I3
APP
I4
I5
I6

to circuit breaker monitoring

4063
LV43

IO
T2
O3 T1
34
O2 33
24
O1 23

and control.
14
13

It is well adapted to severe

MN MX1 XF
PF MCH
environments.
B
MX2

MC2 SDE1
SDE2 UC4
UC3

A choice of preconized cables

UC2 /Res
UC1
COM

OF1
OF4
OF11

E with different lengths is

OF14
OF21
OF24

Ue
Icw
Icm
IEC
rpact
Maste HA10
NW40
Ui 1250V
Ue 1150V
Uimp
12kV

690/100
50kA/1s
105kA

60947-2CEI UNE
VDE
BS
0V

peak
z
50/60H NEMA
AS
OR provided for the connection of
A
UTE 55°C
Ie
Ith 4000A Ue
(A)
(V)
4000

ULP port to EIFE, IFE and I/O

1000

E
z
AC23A 50/60H
60947-3CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE
UTE

Aux
Power VPS
module.
A
In 1000

EIFE / IFE interfaces

Test

Pull
IC
LOG

A
MICRO

EIFE/IFE interfaces provide

an IP address to any circuit
breaker fitted with a ULP port.
MTZ Fixed circuit breaker MTZ Fixed circuit breaker The EIFE / IFE interfaces make
without I/O module with additional I/O module all available data from the
circuit breaker accessible from
DB425731.ai
DB430631.ai

an Ethernet compatible display

24VDC
D 24VDC (FDM128), a PC with common
browser, or a Modbus TCP/IP
ETH2
ETH2
ETH1
ETH2 ETH1
ETH2
ETH1
ETH1

client.
ry set)
ZZ (facto

C
X.YY.
IFE-X
ry set)
ZZ (facto
X.YY.
'X IFE
Enerlin
IFE-X

'X IFE
Enerlin

EIFE / IFE interfaces generate

I6
C
I5
I4
C
I3
I2
C
I1
+ C

OR
24VD

A1

their own web pages.

F
O1
I1
O2
I2
O3
I3
APP
I4
I5
I6

4063
LV43

IO

C
T2
O3 T1
34
O2 33
24
O1 23
14
13

Test

E I/O application module

E
I/O is dedicated to circuit
breakers with ULP link.
A A It may ensure:
PF MCH
MN MX1 XF

b the control of the circuit

MX2

PF MCH SDE1
MN MX1 XF UC3
MC2
SDE2 UC4
MX2
UC2 /Res
UC1
COM
SDE1
MC2
SDE2 UC4
UC3
UC2 /Res
UC1
COM

breaker
b the control of applications
act
Masterp
HA10 12kV
NW40 Uimp
Ui 1250V V
Ue 1150V 690/1000
act Ue 50kA/1s
peak
Masterp
HA10 Icw 105kA
12kV
NW40 Uimp Icm 50/60Hz NEMA
AS
60947-2 UNE
Ui 1250V V IEC CEI
BS
VDE 55°C
Ue 1150V 690/1000 UTE
Ie
Ue 50kA/1s Ith 4000A Ue
(A)
peak (V)
Icw 105kA 4000
50/60Hz NEMA 1000
Icm AS
60947-2 UNE AC23A 50/60Hz
IEC CEI
BS
VDE 55°C 60947-3 UNE
UTE IEC BS CEI
Ie VDE
Ith 4000A Ue
(A)
UTE

around the circuit breaker:

(V)
4000
1000
AC23A 50/60Hz
60947-3 UNE
IEC BS CEI
VDE
UTE

cooling system, load control,

Aux
Power VPS

Aux
Power VPS A

Ethernet
In 1000

A
In 1000

ULP lighting and pulse metering

24 V DC acquisition.
A ULP port D I/O module
Modbus SL
B EIFE communiation module E Breaker ULP cord
C IFE communiation module F IFM interface Note: For every Masterpact MTZ the 24 V DC supply of all the associated interface modules
(ULP port, IFE, IFM, I/O) must be delivered from the same 24 V DC power supply.

E-11
 Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and systems www.schneider-electric.com

Components
ULP interface module

In the new generation of Masterpact MTZ circuit breakers, an internal communication protocol (ULP port) is
systematically embedded in the Micrologic X control unit (no longer a need for BCM module as in previous
generations), as well as the microswitch contacts to obtain complementary circuit breaker status information
(OF, SDE, PF, CH).

Masterpact MTZ Fixed circuit breaker

DB421308.ai

Masterpact MTZ Drawout circuit breaker

DB421309.ai

A
In 1600

Micrologic X
ULP port
Microswitch contact (OF, SDE, PF, CH)

Note: Reminder: Masterpact MTZ Switch Disconnector ranges (HA, NA) have no
communication capabilities. They are not compatible with any communication architecture.

E-12
 www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and systems
Components
ULP interface module

Depending on the type of the device (Masterpact MTZ1, MTZ2, MTZ3, fixed or drawout version), the ULP port and its corresponding wiring kit is
supplied as standard or as an option as shown in the following chart :

ULP port versions

MTZ1/2/3 fixed MTZ1 Drawout MTZ2/3 Drawout

24 V DC power supply

DB421313.eps
DB421312.eps
DB421311.eps

RJ45 ULP connector

RJ45 ULP connector for I/O - IFM connection
for I/O - IFM connection
EIFE connector
24V 0V

EIFE connector
24 V DC power supply

24 V DC

0V 24V
power supply

RJ45 ULP connector

for IFE - I/O - IFM connection
E
Optional Optional Standard

ULP port generalities

The targets of the ULP port are:
bb to interconnect the Micrologic X with EIFE, IFE, IFM and I/O module.
bb to supply power to the trip unit and the EIFE module.
bb to integrate the ULP bus line termination.
Note:
DB430632.ai

b Possible connection of an I/O module

I6
C
I5
I4
C
I3
I2
C
I1
+
24VDC

I1
A1

O1
on the RJ45 ULP connector.
b When the ULP port is installed the 24 V DC
O2
I2
O3
I3
APP
I4
I5
I6

power supply shall be disconnected from

063
LV434

IO
T2
O3 T1
34
O2 33
24
23

the terminals F1/F2 of the control unit.

O1
14
13

24VDC

IO Module ETH1
ETH1
ETH2
ETH2

b The connection of the +/- of the power

Ener
lin'X
IFE
IFE-XX

ETH1
.YY.ZZ

LK/10-

LK/10-
(factory

100/AC

100/AC
set)

T
supply either on terminals F1/F2 of
Micrologic X or on the +/- terminals of the ULP
ETH2
e Status
Modul
rk Status
Netwo
s-SL
Modbu

02
LV4340

port must be strictly respected. Crossing the

IFE polarities may damage the device.
b For every Masterpact MTZ the 24 V DC
supply of all the associated interface modules
Test
(ULP port, IFE, IFM, I/O) must be delivered
from the same 24 V DC power supply.
IFM Interface

EIFE
ULP port

Circuit Breaker
informations (status...)

PF MCH
MN MX1 XF
MX2

SDE1
MC2
SDE2 UC4
UC3
G4
G3 N UC2 /Res
UC1
L COM

or
t
Outpu

act
Masterp
12kV
Uimp
Ui 1250V V
Ue 1150V 690/1000
Ue 50kA/1s
peak
Icw 105kA
Icm 50/60Hz NEMA

24 V DC
AS
60947-2 UNE
IEC CEI
BS
VDE 55°C
UTE
Ie
Ith 4000A Ue
(A)
(V)
4000
1000
AC23A 50/60Hz
60947-3 UNE
IEC BS CEI
VDE
UTE

Power supply ABL8 RPS Information data

(AD)
Aux
Power VPS

Power supply 24 V DC power supply

A
In 1000

E-13
 Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and systems www.schneider-electric.com

Components
EIFE embedded Ethernet interface
PB115959_36.eps

EIFE embedded Ethernet interface description

Introduction
The EIFE embedded Ethernet interface module enables drawout Masterpact MTZ
circuit breakers to be connected to an Ethernet network.
It provides a digital access to all the data delivered by the Masterpact control unit
Micrologic X. In addition it monitors the three positions of the circuit breaker when
inserted in its chassis:
bb Circuit breaker racked IN,
EIFE embedded Ethernet interface bb Circuit breaker racked OUT,
bb Circuit breaker in test position.
EIFE becomes then the best solution for high uptime demanding switchboards.
EIFE interface: ref. LV851001
Provides an Ethernet access to a single drawout Masterpact MTZ circuit breaker.
Function
One circuit breaker is connected to the EIFE interface via its ULP port.
EIFE interface features
bb Dual 10/100 Mbps Ethernet port for simple daisy chain connection.
bb Device profile web service for discovery of the EIFE interface on the LAN.
bb Ethernet interface for drawout Masterpact circuit breakers.
bb Embedded set-up web pages.
bb Embedded monitoring web pages.
bb Embedded control web pages.

E bb Chassis status management (CE, CD, CT)

bb Built-in e-mail alarm notification
bb RBAC (Role Base Access Control).
Mounting
The EIFE interface is mounted on the chassis of the Drawout circuit breaker.
There are two types of dedicated ULP cable, one for the MTZ1 and one for
MTZ2/MTZ3.
24 V DC power supply
The EIFE power supply is provided by the ULP port through the dedicated ULP
cable.
EIFE interface firmware update
The firmware can be updated using Ecoreach software.
Required circuit breaker communication accessory
The connection to EIFE interface requires a ULP communication port on the chassis
of the drawout Masterpact MTZ circuit breakers.

B
DB421474.ai

PF MCH
MN MX1 XF
MX2

MC2 SDE1
SDE2 UC4
UC3
UC2 /Res
UC1
COM

OF1

B
OF4
OF11
OF14
OF21
OF24

C
act
Masterp
HA10 12kV
NW40 Uimp
Ui 1250V V
Ue 1150V 690/1000
Ue 50kA/1s
peak
Icw 105kA
Icm 50/60Hz NEMA
AS
60947-2CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE 55°C
UTE
Ie
Ith 4000A Ue
(A)
(V)
4000
1000
AC23A 50/60Hz
60947-3CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE
UTE

Aux
Power VPS A
A
In 1000

A ULP circuit breaker port

Ethernet
ULP B EIFE interface
Pull

24 V DC C ULP cable

EIFE mounting and cabling

E-14
www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and systems
Components
EIFE embedded Ethernet interface

A B

DB419373.eps
General characteristics
Environmental characteristics
Conforming to standards IEC 60950, IEC 60947-6-2, UL 508,
UL 60950, IACS E10
Certification c UL us, CE, EAC, FCC marking
Ambient storage -40 to +85 °C
temperature operation -25 to +70 °C
Relative humidity 5 - 85 %
Level of pollution Level 3
Protective treatment ULV0 conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-30
C
Mechanical characteristics
Shock resistance As the EIFE is mounted on the circuit A Ethernet port 1.
Resistance to sinusoidal vibrations breaker it complies with its mechanical B Ethernet port 2.
characteristics C ULP port.
Electrical characteristics
Consumption 100 mA at 24 V DC
Resistance to electrostatic discharge IEC/EN 61000-4-2:
bb 8 kV air discharge
bb 6 kV contact discharge
Immunity to radiated fields IEC/EN 61000-4-3: 20 V/m
Immunity to fast transient perturbations IEC/EN 61000-4-4: 2 kV
Immunity to surges
Immunity to conducted radio
IEC/EN 61000-4-5: 2 kV common mode
IEC/EN 61000-4-6: 10 V
E
frequency field
Physical characteristics
Dimensions 51 x 51 x 52.5 mm
Mounting Breaker DIN rail of MTZ1 & MTZ2/MTZ3
Weight 75 g EIFE alone
Degree of protection of the installed bb IP20 for connectors
module bb IP30 for other areas
Connections bb RJ45 for Ethernet
bb Industrial USB connector for ULP

EIFE web page description

Monitoring web page: Setup web page:
bb Real time data bb Device localization/name
bb Device logging. bb Ethernet configuration (dual port)
Control web page: bb IP configuration
bb Single device control. bb Modbus TCP/IP filtering
bb Date and time
Diagnostics web page: bb E-mail server configuration
bb Statistics bb Alarms to be e-mailed
bb Device information bb Device logging
bb IMU information bb Device log export
bb Read device registers bb SNMP parameters
bb Communication check. bb Preferences
Maintenance web page: bb Advanced services control
bb Circuit breaker heath status bb User accounts
bb Maintenance log bb Web page access.
bb Maintenance counters

E-15
 Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and systems www.schneider-electric.com

Components
IFE Ethernet interface
PB115852.eps

IFE interface, IFE switchboard server description

Introduction
The IFE interface and the IFE switchboard server enable LV circuit breakers to be
connected to an Ethernet network. The IFE switchboard server incorporates a
Modbus gateway. The IFE interface and IFE switchboard server are both equipped
with two ULP ports and two Ethernet ports. The IFE switchboard server is equipped
with a Modbus RS 485 serial connection. The following circuit breakers can be
connected to IFE interface and to IFE switchboard server: Fixed type Masterpact
MTZ, Compact NSX or Powerpact.
IFE interface, ref.: LV434001 IFE interface: ref. LV434001
Provides an Ethernet access to a single LV circuit breaker. The circuit breaker is
connected to the IFE interface via its ULP port and a prefabricated ULP cord [1].
PB119096.eps

IFE switchboard server: ref. LV434002

Provides an Ethernet access to one or several LV circuit breakers. It allows to
interface to Ethernet:
bb One single circuit breaker connected to the IFE interface via its ULP port and
a prefabricated ULP cord,
bb Up to 12 Compact NSX connected through the Modbus serial line interface.
Each Compact NSX is connected to Modbus by means of a dedicated IFM interface
module performing the ULP/Modbus conversion.
The connection between each Compact NSX and its associated IFM interface is
realized by a prefabricated ULP cord connected to ULP ports.
IFE switchboard server, ref.: LV434002 IFE interface, IFE switchboard server
bb Dual 10/100 Mbps Ethernet port for simple daisy chain connection.

E bb Device profile web service for discovery of the IFE interface and IFE switchboard
server on the LAN.
bb ULP compliant for localization of the IFE interface in the switchboard.
bb Ethernet interface for Masterpact, Compact and Powerpact circuit breakers.
bb Gateway for Modbus-SL connected devices (IFE switchboard server only).
bb Embedded set-up web pages.
bb Embedded monitoring web pages.
bb Embedded control web pages.
bb Built-in e-mail alarm notification.
bb Internal real-time clock with battery back-up.
bb RBAC (Role Base Access Control)
Mounting
The IFE interface and the IFE switchboard server are DIN rail mounting devices.
A stacking accessory enables the user to connect several IFMs (ULP to Modbus
serial line interfaces) to an IFE switchboard server without additional wiring.
24 V DC power supply
The IFE interface and the IFE switchboard server must be supplied either with
a 24 V DC AD or with a 24 V DC ABL8 RPS power supply.
The IFMs stacked to an IFE switchboard server are supplied by the IFE, thus it is not
necessary to supply them separately.
Note: The connection of the +/- of the power supply on +/- terminals of the IFE device must be
strictly respected. Crossing the polarities may damage the device.

IFE interface, IFE switchboard server firmware update

The firmware can be updated using the Ecoreach software.
Required circuit breaker communication modules
The connection to IFE interface or to IFE switchboard server requires ULP
communication ports. Every Masterpact MTZ, fixed type circuit breakers is equipped
with a ULP port connected to its associated IFE Ethernet interface module by a
prefabricated ULP cord. The IFE Ethernet interface modules are equipped with two
ULP RJ45 connectors.When one is not used, it must be closed with a ULP
terminator.

E-16
www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and systems
Components
IFE Ethernet interface

DB419230.eps
General characteristics 24VDC

Environmental characteristics
Conforming to standards IEC 60950, IEC 60947-6-2, UL 508,
UL 60950, IACS E10 ETH1 ETH2

Certification c UL us, CE, EAC, FCC marking

Ambient storage -40 to +85 °C
temperature operation -25 to +70 °C
Relative humidity 5 - 85 %
A B
Level of pollution Level 3
Protective treatment ULV0 conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-30 J K L

DB425732.eps
Mechanical characteristics
Shock resistance Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-27 ETH1 ETH2

15 g / 11 ms, 1/2 sinusoidal

Resistance to sinusoidal vibrations Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 Enerlin'X IFE
5 Hz < f < 8.4 Hz
IFE-XX.YY.ZZ (factory set)
C
ETH1 LK/10-100/ACT

Electrical characteristics ETH2 LK/10-100/ACT

Module Status
D
Modbus-SL

Consumption 150 mA at 24 V DC Network Status

E
T
Resistance to electrostatic discharge IEC/EN 61000-4-2:
LV434001

F
bb 8 kV air discharge
bb 6 kV contact discharge R

Immunity to radiated fields IEC/EN 61000-4-3: 10 V/m

Immunity to fast transient perturbations IEC/EN 61000-4-4: 2 kV
Immunity to surges IEC/EN 61000-4-5: 2 kV common mode I H G E
Immunity to conducted radio IEC/EN 61000-4-6: 10 V DB425733.eps

frequency field
Physical characteristics
Dimensions 72 x 105 x 71 mm
Mounting DIN rail
Weight 182.5 g (0.41 lb)
Degree of protection bb On the front panel (wall mounted
of the installed I/O enclosure): IP4x
bb Connectors: IP2x
bb Other parts: IP3x
M
Connections Screw type terminal blocks
A Ethernet 1 and Ethernet 2 communication port.
B 24 V DC power supply terminal block.

IFE web page description C Ethernet communication LEDs:

yellow: 10 Mb
Monitoring web page: bb Setup web page: green: 100 Mb.
bb Real time data bb Device localization/name D Module status LED:
bb Device logging. bb Ethernet configuration
steady off: no power
Control web page: (dual port)
steady green: device operational
bb Single device control. bb IP configuration
steady red: major fault
bb Modbus TCP/IP filtering
Diagnostics web page: bb Date and time flashing green: standby
bb Statistics bb E-mail server configuration flashing red: minor fault
bb Device information bb Alarms to be e-mailed flashing green/red: self-test.
bb IMU information bb Device logging E Network status LED:
bb Read device registers bb Device log export steady off: no power/no valid IP address
bb Communication check. bb SNMP parameters steady green: connected, valid IP address
Maintenance web page: bb Preferences steady orange: default IP address
bb Circuit breaker health status bb Advanced services control steady red: duplicated IP address
bb Maintenance log bb User accounts flashing green/red: self-test.
bb Maintenance counters. bb Web page access. F Sealable transparent cover.
G QR code to product information.
H ULP status LED.
I Test button (accessible with cover closed).
J Locking pad.
K Modbus traffic status LED (LV434002 only).
L Device name label.
M ULP ports.

E-17
 Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and systems www.schneider-electric.com

Components
IFM Modbus interface

Function
PB119111.eps

IFM - Modbus communication interface - is required for connecting

Masterpact MTZ, NT/NW or Compact NS and NSX to Modbus network whenever the
circuit breaker has an ULP port (Universal Logic Plug). The port is available
on BCM ULP for Masterpact range and BSCM module for Compact range.
Note: IFM is defined as an IMU (Intelligent Modular Unit) within the ULP connection System
documentation.

Once connected to IFM, the circuit breaker is considered as a slave by the Modbus
master. Its electrical values, alarm status, open/close signals car be monitored
or controlled by a Programmable Logic Controller or any other system.

Characteristics
IFM Modbus communication interface. ULP port
Ref.: LV434000. 2 RJ45 sockets, internal parallel wiring.
bb Connection of a single circuit breaker.
bb An ULP line terminator must be connected to the second RJ45 ULP socket.
The RJ45 sockets deliver a 24 V DC supply fed from the Modbus socket.
A B Built-in test function, for checking the correct connection to the circuit breaker.
DB425796.eps

Modbus slave port

bb Modbus Serial RJ45 port - RJ45 connector provides fast and reliable wiring.
bb Lateral socket, for DIN rail stackable connector.
Mo
bb Both top and lateral sockets are internally parallel wired.
dbu
s
0V
bb Multiple IFM can be stacked, thus sharing a common power supply and Modbus
24V
line without individual wiring.
bb On the front face:
E vv Modbus address setting (1 to 99): 2 coded rotary switches
vv Modbus locking pad: enables or disable the circuit breaker remote control
and modification of IFM parameters.
4
3
5 6
7
8
C bb Self adjusting communication format (Baud rate, parity).
x10

2 9

24 V DC power supply
1 0

5 6
4 7

bb Screw clamp terminal block

3 8

D
x1

2 9
1 0

COM
E bb High electrical insulation between Modbus and 24 V DC connectors
1 bb Separated lines provides improved communication robustness.
COM

F
G

J I H

A Modbus Serial RJ45 port.

B 0-24 V DC power supply.
C Modbus address switches.
D Modbus traffic LED
E Modbus locking pad.
F ULP activity LED.
G Test button.
H Mechanical lock and locking seal.
I ULP RJ45 connectors.
J Stacking accessory connection

E-18
 www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and systems
Components
IFM Modbus interface

General characteristics
Environmental Characteristics
Conforming to standards IEC 61010, IEC 60950, UL 61010, UL 60950,
CISPRR 22, 24, 11, IACS E10
Certification c UL us, CE, EAC, FCC marking
Ambient temperature -20 to +70 °C
Relative humidity 5 - 85 %
Level of pollution Level 3
Protective treatement ULV0 conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-30
Mechanical characteristics
Shock resistance Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-27
15 g / 11 ms, 1/2 sinusoidal
Resistance to sinusoidal Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6
vibrations 5 Hz < f < 8.4 Hz
Electrical characteristics
Consumption 30 mA at 24 V DC
Resistance to electrostatic IEC/EN 61000-4-2: 8 kV AD
discharge
Immunity to radiated fields IEC/EN 61000-4-3: 10 V/m
Immunity to surges IEC/EN 61000-4-5: class 2
Physical characteristics
Dimensions 109 x 73 x 18 mm
Mounting DIN rail
Weight 120 g
Degree of protection bb IP20 for connectors
of the installed module
Connections
bb IP30 for other areas
bb RJ45 for ULP and Modbus SL E
bb Screw type terminals for Power

Recommended IFM installation

Stacking IFM
DB425813.eps
DB425861.ai

Test

Test
Test

Stacking accessories Up to 12 stacked IFM

Stacking an IFE switchboard server with IFMs
DB425811.eps

Test Test

Test Test

Test Test

IFE
lin'X
Ener

002
LV434

E-19
 Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and systems www.schneider-electric.com

Components
I/O Application module
DB416829.eps

I/O application module description

Description
The I/O input/output application module for LV breaker is one of the components of
ULP architecture. Built in functionalities and applications enhance control and
monitoring needs.
ULP system architecture including I/O modules can be built without any restrictions
using a wide range of circuit breakers:
bb Masterpact MTZ1/MTZ2/MTZ3/NT/NW,
bb Compact NS1600b-3200,
bb Compact NS630b-1600,
bb Compact NSX100-630 A.
I/O application module
The I/O application module is compliant with the ULP system specifications.
Two I/O application modules can be connected in the same ULP architecture.

I/O input/output interface for LV breaker resources

The I/O application module resources are the following:
bb 6 digital inputs that are self powered for either NO and NC dry contact or pulse
counter,
bb 3 digital outputs that are bistable relay (5 A maximum),
bb 1 analog input for Pt100 temperature sensor.

Pre-defined applications
5 Pre-defined applications improve the IMU approach (Intelligent Modular Unit)
DB419578.eps

E
4 6
in a simple way.
3 7
A 9-position rotary switch on the front of the I/O module allows to select the pre-defined
2 8 applications. Each position is assigned to a pre-defined application except position 9
1 9 which allows the user to define a specific application by means of the customer
APP
engineering tool. The switch is set in factory to the pre-defined application 1.
For each application the input/output assignment and the wiring diagram are
pre-defined. No additional setting with the customer engineering tool is required.
DB419579.eps

DB419580.eps

The I/O and other resources not assigned to the pre-defined applications are free for
user specific applications.
User applications
The user applications with the corresponding resources are defined by means of
Ecoreach engineering tool. They use the resources not assigned to the predefined
applications. User applications may be required for:
bb Protection improvement,
bb Circuit breaker control,
bb Motor control,
bb Energy management,
bb Monitoring.
24 V DC power supply
The I/O module must be supplied either with a 24 V DC AD or with a 24 V DC ABL8
RPS power supply.
Note: The connection of the +/- of the power supply on +/- terminals of the I/O module must be
strictly respected. Crossing the polarities may damage the device.

Mounting
The I/O is a DIN rail mounting device.

Setting locking pad

The setting locking pad on the front panel of the I/O enables the setting of the I/O
by Ecoreach engineering tool.

E-20
www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and systems
Components
I/O Application module

DB419233.eps
General characteristics
Environmental characteristics
Conforming to standards IEC 60950, IEC 60947-6-2, UL 508,
UL 60950, IACS E10 I1 C I2 I3 C I4 I5 C I6

Certification c UL us, CE, EAC, FCC marking

Ambient storage -40 to +85 °C
temperature operation -25 to +70 °C
Relative humidity 5 - 85 %
Level of pollution Level 3 A B
Protective treatment ULV0 conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-30
Mechanical characteristics

DB419234.eps
Shock resistance Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-27
15 g / 11 ms, 1/2 sinusoidal 24VDC I1 C I2 I3 C I4 I5 C I6

Resistance to sinusoidal vibrations Conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 C

5 Hz < f < 8.4 Hz
Electrical characteristics M I1
AI
D
I2

Consumption 165 mA at 24 V DC L I3

I4
O1

O2
E
Resistance to electrostatic discharge IEC/EN 61000-4-2:
I5

K
O3

T
I6
F
bb 8 kV air discharge
J IO G
bb 6 kV contact discharge LV434063

Immunity to radiated fields IEC/EN 61000-4-3: 10 V/m

Immunity to fast transient perturbations IEC/EN 61000-4-4: 2 kV
E
O1 O2 O3 A1
13 14 23 24 33 34 T1 T2

Immunity to surges IEC/EN 61000-4-5: 2 kV common mode

Immunity to conducted radio IEC/EN 61000-4-6: 10 V
frequency field
Physical characteristics I H
Dimensions 71.7 x 116 x 70.6 mm
Mounting DIN rail
DB419235.eps

Weight 229.5 g (0.51 lb)

Degree of protection of the installed On the front panel (wall mounted 13 14 23 24 33 34 T1 T2

I/O application module enclosure): IP4x

I/O parts: IP3x
Connectors: IP2x 1

Connections Screw type terminal blocks

2

Digital inputs
Digital input type Self powered digital input with current limitations as
per IEC 61131-2 type 2 standards (7 mA) O N
Input limit values at state 1 19.8 - 25.2 V DC, 6.1 - 8.8 mA
(close)
A 24 V DC power supply terminal block.
Input limit values at state 0 0 - 19.8 V DC, 0 mA
(open) B Digital input terminal block: 6 inputs,
Maximum cable length 10 m 3 commons and 1 shield.
Note: for a length greater than 10 m and up to 300 m, it is mandatory to use a shielded twisted C 6 input status LEDs.
cable. The shield cable is connected to the I/O functional ground of the I/O application module. D Analog input status LED.
Digital outputs E 3 output status LEDs.
Digital output type Bistable relay F I/O application module identification labels.
Rated voltage 250 V AC maximum [1] / 30 V DC G Sealable transparent cover.
Rated carry current 5A H Analog input terminal block.
Contact resistance 30 mΩ I Digital output terminal blocks.
Maximum operating 18000 operations/hr (Mechanical) J ULP status LED.
frequency 1800 operations/hr (Electrical) K Test/reset button (accessible with cover closed).
Digital output relay protection External fuse of 5 A or less L Setting locking pad.
by an external fuse
M Application rotary switch: 1 to 9.
Maximum cable length 10 m
N Switch for I/O addressing (I/O 1 or I/O 2).
Analog inputs
O ULP connectors.
I/O application module analog input can be connected to a Pt100 temperature sensor.
Range -30 to 200 °C -22 to 392 °F
[1] 250 V AC OVC 2 according IEC/EN 60947-2 .
Accuracy ±2 °C from -30 to 20 °C ±3.6 °F from -22 to 68 °F For OVC 3 and 4 surge arresters are required
±1 °C from 20 to 140 °C ±1.8 °F from 68 to 284 °F on the polarizing voltage of the output contacts.
±2 °C from 140 to 200 °C ±3.6 °F from 284 to 392 °F
Refresh interval 5s 5s

E-21
 Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and systems www.schneider-electric.com

Architecture components
FDM128 Display Unit

Micrologic X measurement capabilities come into full play with the FDM128 switchboard display. It connects to
Ethernet communication via RJ45 port and displays Micrologic X information.
PB111806.eps

FDM128 switchboard display

The FDM128 is an intelligent Ethernet touch screen. It collects the data from devices
via Ethernet network. It is designed to manage up to 8 devices such as:
bb Masterpact MTZ1,MTZ2, MTZ3,
bb Compact NS,
bb Compact NSX,
bb Smartlink.
The FDM128 switchboard display unit can be connected to a Micrologic X via an IFE
FDM128 display. or an EIFE interface module. It is easy to use and requires no special software or
programming.
The FDM128 has a large screen. It requires very little depth. The anti-glare graphic
DB421324.ai

screen has a backlight for very easy reading even under poor ambient lighting and at
sharp angles.

Display of Micrologic X measurements and trips

The FDM128 is intended to display Micrologic X measurements, trips and operating

E information. It cannot be used to modify the protection settings.

Measurements are easily accessed via a menu.
Trips are automatically displayed.
A pop-up window displays the time-stamped description of the trip.
General view

Status indications
DB421325.ai

When the circuit breaker is equipped with the Command Module, the FDM128
display can also be used to view circuit breaker status conditions:
bb OF: ON/OFF
bb CH: spring charged
bb SDE: Fault-trip indication (overload, short-circuit, earth fault)
bb CE, CD, CT chassis management with EIFE.

Remote control
Role base access control When the circuit breaker is equipped with Communicating voltage releases,
the FDM128 display can also be used to control the circuit breaker (Emission of
open/close commands).
DB421326.ai

Main characteristics
bb 115.2 x 86.4 mm with 5.7" QVGA display 320 x 240 pixels.
bb Color TFT LCD, LED backlight.
bb Wide viewing angle: vertical ±80°, horizontal ±70°.
bb High resolution: excellent reading of graphic symbols.
bb Operating temperature range -10 °C to +55 °C.
bb CE / UL / CSA marking.
bb 24 V DC power supply.
Editing devices
bb Consumption y 6.8 W.
bb One RJ45 Ethernet jack.
DB421327.ai

Mounting and Protection

bb The FDM128 is easily installed in a switchboard.
bb Standard door hole Ø22 mm.
bb The FDM128 degree of protection is IP65.

General setting

E-22
www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and systems
Architecture components
FDM128 Display Unit

DB421328.ai
Main menu
General view
Provides in one shot the information about the status of each monitored
device

Role base access control

Manage logins and passwords.

Quick view
Editing devices
Specify the devices monitored by the FDM128.

DB421329.ai
Communication setting
Set the communication parameters.

General setting
Select the language and to set the other parameters of FDM128.

E
Measures

Sub menus
DB421330.ai

Quick view
Provides access to five screens that display a summary of essential operating
information (I, U, f, P, E, THD, circuit breaker On/off), protection settings.

Measures
Display all the measurements (I, U, V, f, P, Q, S, E, THD, PF) with the corresponding
min/max values.

Alarms history alarm history

Display tripping and alarms histories.
DB421331.ai

Control
Display the status of the devices (Open/Closed) and to initiate control commands
(Open/Close/Reset)

Maintenance
Display all circuit breaker health status indications and all the information generated
by the diagnostic functions (number of operations, contact wear, operating time,
internal temperature etc.)

Control
DB421332_1.ai

Maintenance

E-23
 Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and systems www.schneider-electric.com

Customer engineering tool:

Ecoreach software

Ecoreach Experience
Key Features
Build Project
I want to test & deliver a
“ready to commission”
Discover
Lifecycle
panel Design
gn
bbDevice Discovery
bbSwitchboard setting
Calculate
Calculatte
& testing
bbCommunication
E
Ecodia
Ecodial
Test & Reports Selectt Renew

bbSave my project
& reports Configure

Ecoreal
al
te
Quote

E Commission
Buy
uy
Ecoreach
Update
I want to “shorten” my
Buy
commissioning time
bbDevice Discovery
Operate
bbMulti Device
Configuration
bbCommunication
Test & Reports
bbSave my project
& reports
Build Commission Maintain

Maintain
I want to ensure
“continuity” of services
in “safe conditions”
bbSettings consistency
check
bbDevice checkup
bbFirmware upgrade
bbStandard Diagnostic data
bbSave my project
& reports

Panel builders Electrical contractors Facility managers

Simple & easy software
& system integrator Software to track
to set up and test Shorten commissioning time installation changes &
a panelboard and speed up SAT delivery diagnostic features for
with easy-to-use software preventive maintenance

E-24
www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and systems
Customer engineering tool:
Ecoreach software

Ecoreach Software
Definition
Ecoreach software helps the user to manage a project as part of the testing, site commissioning, and maintenance
phases of the project life cycle.
With Ecoreach, you will get your electrical devices configured, tested and commissioned in the simplest way.
Ecoreach drastically reduces the commissioning time of Smart Panels and supports the system during maintenance.
Ecoreach offers value added features like automatic discovery of connected devices. It performs communication
tests, generates reports as part of FAT reports. It generates comprehensive reports as part of SAT reports, upgrade
firmware etc.
Description
Ecoreach enables the user to perform the following actions for the devices and modules listed in the table below:
bb create projects by device discovery .
bb perform a communication test and generate reports.
bb configuration or settings download and upload for multiple devices.
bb install digital modules.
bb compare settings between the project (original settings) and device (current settings).
bb generate comprehensive project reports.
bb check system level firmware status and upgrade devices.
bb secured repository of projects in Cloud.
bb read information (alarms, measurements, parameters) & display diagnostic information.
bb waveform capture.

USB and Ethernet interfaces

Ecoreach provides access to Masterpact MTZ through USB and Ethernet interfaces. The following table indicates E
the features that are accessible through each interface:
Features USB Ethernet
Protection/Alarm settings Yes Yes
Firmware upgrade Yes No
Digital modules installation Yes No
Device Checkup Yes Yes
I/O Module Configuration Yes Yes

Key Features:
Device Discovery:
Ecoreach helps the user to discover the communicating devices in a switchboard either through Ethernet or
a serial network. Once the devices in the switchboard are discovered, the user can add those devices to
the project area.
Device settings:
Ecoreach helps the user to set the protection settings and the alarms of the Masterpact MTZ including dual
settings and I/O module configuration.
Communication Test:
When a user has installed communicating devices in a switchboard, Ecoreach offers the capability to test the
communication network. Once a communication test is done, the user can generate a time stamped
communication test report.
Reports
Ecoreach offers the following reports to the users
bb Communication Test Report.
bb Comprehensive project report.
bb Logs and trip history reports.
Firmware Upgrade
Ecoreach offers the compatibility check and firmware upgrade for the following devices.
bb Micrologic X control units,
bb EIFE / IFE,
bb I/O modules.
Digital Modules Support
Ecoreach helps the user to buy digital modules which allow digital customization of the devices.
Ecoreach directs the user to the GoDigital platform to purchase digital modules.
After purchase, Ecoreach helps to install/ uninstall the digital modules in the Micrologic X control unit in a secured way.
Sharing with Ecostruxure™ Facility Expert
Ecoreach offers the possibility to share project with Facility Expert. A digital logbook is then automatically created
for the Masterpact MTZ.

E-25
 Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and systems www.schneider-electric.com

Customer engineering tool:

Ecoreach software

Screen: Device homepage

E
The user can connect to the device from the device home page and do the settings configuration, do a device check up,
view maintenance information, upgrade the device with the latest firmware & install/uninstall digital modules.

Screen: general view

Through the welcome screen, a user can create a project, have access to devices and discover them.
The welcome screen allows the user to open reports to have view of his projects, to modify them, to check if they
are synchronized with the cloud and if they are shared with EcoStrucxure Facility expert.
The user can change the language and have access to the help files and to device firmware baseline file.

E-26
www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and systems
Customer engineering tool:
Ecoreach software

Screen: protections

E
Once the user clicks on configuration, this screen appears, through which the user can read/ write different
settings and check the settings discrepancies.

Screen: measures

Once the user clicks on Device Checkup section from the device home page, this screen appears and the user
can view the measurement parameters, IO status , Alarms logs, maintenance parameters etc.

E-27
 Integrate in Smart Panels - Architecture and systems www.schneider-electric.com

Screen: Digital modules

E
Once the user clicks on Digital modules, this screen appears and the user can buy the desired digital module
specific to the device & install the digital module to the device.

Screen: Firmware upgrade

Through the Firmware Upgrade screen, a user can check the compatibility of the firmware versions of the devices
and modules connected and upgrade them when needed with the device firmware baseline file.

E-28
www.schneider-electric.com

Integrate in switchboard

Operating conditions.............................................................. F-2

Installation rules
Installation in switchboard.................................................................F-6
Door interlock catch...........................................................................F-8
Power connection............................................................................F-10
Recommended busbar drilling Masterpact MTZ1.........................F-12
Recommended busbar drilling Masterpact MTZ2 - MTZ3.............F-13
Temperature derating......................................................................F-14
Busbar sizing Rear vertical connection...........................................F-17
Circuit breaker derating ..................................................................F-18

Dimensions
Masterpact MTZ1 Fixed 3/4-pole devices......................................F-25
Masterpact MTZ1 Drawout 3/4-pole devices..................................F-30
Masterpact MTZ2 08 to MTZ2 32 Fixed 3/4-pole devices..............F-34
Masterpact MTZ2 08 to MTZ2 32 Drawout 3/4-pole devices.........F-36
Masterpact MTZ2 40 Fixed 3/4-pole devices.................................F-38
Masterpact MTZ2 40 Drawout 3/4-pole devices.............................F-40
Masterpact MTZ3 Fixed 3/4-pole devices......................................F-42
Masterpact MTZ3 Drawout 3/4-pole devices..................................F-44
Accessories.....................................................................................F-46
External modules.............................................................................F-48

Installation
Clusters............................................................................................F-53

Electrical diagrams
Masterpact MTZ1 Fixed and drawout devices...............................F-54
F
Masterpact MTZ2/MTZ3 Fixed and drawout devices.....................F-56

Other chapters
Select your circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors.............................. A-1
Select your Micrologic X control unit........................................................... B-1
Customize your Micrologic X with digital modules......................................C-1
Customize your circuit breaker with accessories........................................D-1
Integrate in Smart panels - Architecture and systems................................ E-1
Integrate in special applications - Source-changeover systems.................G-1
Services......................................................................................................H-1
Order your circuit breaker............................................................................ I-1

F-1
 Integrate in switchboard www.schneider-electric.com

Operating conditions

Masterpact MTZ test conditions reproduce different customer environments, in accordance with product and
installation standards and relevant maintenance operations [1] to maximize the product lifespan.
[1] F
 or full details, please read the Masterpact maintenance guide.

Introduction
Masterpact MTZ is designed for specified operating conditions in terms of
temperature, humidity, vibration, altitude, corrosion, and electromagnetic
disturbances.
Beyond the limits defined here, the circuit breakers suffer accelerated aging that may
rapidly result in malfunctions.
Please refer to the Masterpact Maintenance Guide for additional information and
consult us to confirm mechanical and electrical performances in severe conditions.
Example of application with severe operating conditions:
bb wind turbines
bb power frequency converters installed in the same switchboard or close to the
Masterpact circuit breaker
bb emergency generators
DB419117.eps

bb high vibration marine applications such as thrusters, anchor positioning systems,

etc.

Safety of operation
Masterpact MTZ front face provides reinforced insulation (Class 2) according
to IEC 60664-1. It allows Class 2 installation with breaker control from outside.

Ambient temperature
Masterpact MTZ is designed to operate in ambient temperature between -25 °C and
+70 °C, providing that the temperature around the breaker inside the switchboard
does not exceed +70 °C. If this condition cannot be fulfilled, dedicated measures
such as HVAC must be taken.
Masterpact devices have succesfully passed the tests defined by the following
standards for extreme atmospheric conditions:
F bb IEC 60068-2-1: dry cold at -40 °C
bb IEC 60068-2-2: dry heat at +85 °C
bb IEC 60068-2-30: damp heat (temperature +55 °C, relative humidity 95 %).
Shipping & Storage Installation & Operation inside the
Commissioning switchboard surrounding
the circuit breaker [2]
Masterpact MTZ
Temperature Relative Temperature Relative Temperature Relative
(°C) Humidity (%) (°C) Humidity (%) (°C) Humidity (%)
-40 °C/+85 °C 0...95 % -25°C/+70°C 0...95 % -25°C/+70°C 0...95 %
DB419119.eps

[2]

[2] Manual closing of circuit breaker (using pushbutton) is possible down to -35 °C.

Vibrations
Masterpact devices have successfully passed testing in compliance with
IEC 60068-2-6 and IEC 60068-2-27 for the following vibration levels:
bb 2 to 13.2 Hz: amplitude ±1 mm
bb 13.2 to 100 Hz: constant acceleration 0.7 g.
Vibration testing to these levels is required by merchant marine inspection
organisations (such as Veritas, and Lloyd’s).

Profile Reference
Vibrations, shocks and shakes in operational 3M4 IEC 60721-3-3 compliant
conditions

F-2
www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in switchboard
Operating conditions

Industrial environmental atmospheric conditions

DB419118.eps
Masterpact devices have successfully passed the tests defined by the following
standards for extreme atmospheric conditions:
bb IEC 60068-2-52 level 2: salt mist.
Masterpact devices can operate in the industrial environments defined by standard
IEC/EN 60947-1 (pollution degree up to 3).
It is nevertheless advised to check that the devices are installed in suitably cooled
switchboards without excessive dust.

Profile Pollutions Active substances

Corrosive industrialCategory 3C3
atmospheres compliant with
IEC 60721-3-3
Sea salts Compliant with 0.8 to 8 mg/(m2. day)

DB419120.eps
IEC 60721-2-5 Average over the year
Mechanically active Category 3S3
substances compliant with
IEC 60721-3-3

Beyond these conditions, Masterpact MTZ must be installed inside switchboards

with an IP rating equal to or greater than IP54.

Altitude
At altitudes above 2000 meters, the characteristics of the ambient air (electrical
resistance, cooling capacity) lower the product characteristics as follows:
Altitude (m) 2000 3000 4000 5000 F

DB419121.eps
Impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 12 11 10 8
Rated insulation voltage (Ui) 1000 900 780 700
Maximum rated MTZ1 except H3, 690 690 630 560
operational MTZ2 except H10,
voltage 50/60 Hz Ue (V) MTZ3
MTZ2 H10 1000 890 795 700
Rated current 40 °C 1 x In 0.99 x In 0.96 x In 0.94 x In
Note: Intermediate values can be obtained by interpolation.

Electromagnetic disturbances
Masterpact devices are protected against:
bb overvoltages caused by devices that generate electromagnetic disturbances
bb overvoltages caused by atmospheric disturbances or by a distribution-system
outage (for example, failure of a lighting system)
bb devices emitting radio waves (radios, walkie-talkies, radar, etc.)
bb electrostatic discharges produced by users.
Masterpact devices have successfully passed the electromagnetic compatibility
tests (EMC) defined by the following international standards:
bb IEC/EN 60947-2, Annex F
bb IEC/EN 60947-2, Annex B (trip units with earth-leakage function).
The above tests ensure that:
bb no nuisance tripping occurs
bb tripping times are respected.
Immunity: ability of a device to operate without damage in the presence of an
electromagnetic disturbance.
Susceptibility: inability of a device to operate without damage in the presence of an
electromagnetic disturbance.
Conducted interference: disturbances generated by the device and transmitted by
the conductors (of power supply, signalling, or control) in the form of electrical
voltage.
Radiated interference: disturbances generated by the device and radiated in the
enironment in the form of electromagnetic waves.

F-3
 Integrate in switchboard www.schneider-electric.com

Operating conditions

Immunity
DB421459.ai

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Standard Level

To conducted disturbances
MN MX1 XF
MX2
PF MCH
Electrical fast transient/ burst (EFBT/B) IEC 61000-4-4 -
MC2 SDE1
SDE2 UC4
UC3
UC2 /Res
UC1
COM

Masterpact
NW40
HA10

Ui 1250V
Ue 1150V
Ue
Uimp
12kV

690/1000V
50kA/1s
peak
Surges IEC 61000-4-5 4
Icw 105kA
Icm 50/60Hz
AS NEMA
60947-2 UNE
IEC CEI
BS
VDE 55°C
UTE
Ie
Ith 4000A Ue
(A)
(V)
4000
1000
AC23A 50/60Hz
60947-3 UNE
IEC BS CEI
VDE
UTE

Aux
Power VPS

A
In 1000

Conducted disturbances induced by radio-frequency fields IEC 61000-4-6 4

Voltage dips, voltage sags, voltage interruption (AC supply) IEC 61000-4-11 -

Conducted low frequency IACS - E10 (§15) -

Harmonics and Interharmonics including mains signalling IEC 61000-4-13 3

at a.c. power ports
Immunity to conducted, common mode disturbances IEC 61000-4-16 -
of main frequencies

Oscillatory wave IEC 61000-4-18 -

Voltage dips, voltage sags, voltage interruption (DC supply) IEC 61000-4-29 -

F
To radiated disturbances
Electrostatic discharge IEC 61000-4-2 3

Radiated radio-frequency IEC 61000-4-3 3

electromagnetic fields

Power frequency magnetic fields IEC 61000-4-8 -

Impulse magnetic field IEC 61000-4-9 5

Oscillatory magnetic field IEC 61000-4-10 -
Emission
To conducted disturbances
Limits for harmonic current emissions IEC 61000-3-2 A
Conducted emission CISPR 11/22 A
B
DB421460.ai

To radiated disturbances
Radiated emission CISPR 11/22 A
B

UC3
MC2 SDE1
MN MX1 XF
MX2
PF MCH

EMC and ERM tests compliant with: Directive RTTE -

b ETSI EN 300 328 and ERC Recommendation 70-03.
SDE2 UC4
UC2 /Res
UC1
COM

Masterpact
NW40
HA10

Ui 1250V
Ue 1150V
Uimp
12kV

690/1000V
b FCC CFR47 Part 15, Subpart B and C, RSS-210 Issue 8
b ETSI EN 300 440-1 /-2
Ue 50kA/1s
peak
Icw 105kA
Icm 50/60Hz
AS NEMA
60947-2 UNE
IEC CEI
BS
VDE 55°C
UTE
Ie
Ith 4000A Ue
(A)
(V)
4000
1000
AC23A 50/60Hz
60947-3 UNE
IEC BS CEI
VDE
UTE

Aux

In 1000
Power

A
VPS

b ETSI EN 302 291-1 /-2.

 dditional EMC Tests not mandatory by IEC 60947-2 and

A
extra EMC performances.

Radiated
Conducted

F-4
www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in switchboard
Operating conditions

Test values required by IEC/EN 60947-2 Masterpact MTZ tested extra EMC performances

4 kV ; 5 kHz on poles and all AC supplies 4 kV ; 5 kHz and 100 kHz on poles and all AC supplies
2 kV ; 5 kHz on auxiliaries DC supply and signal ports 2 kV ; 5 kHz and 100 kHz on auxiliaries DC supply and signal ports
4 kV CM, 2 kV DM on poles and AC supply > 100 V 6.6 kV CM, 4.4 kV DM on poles.
2 kV CM, 1 kV DM on AC supply < 100 V 4 kV CM, 2 kV DM on MX-XF-MN voltage releases for supply > 100 V.
2 kV CM, 1 kV DM on MX-XF-MN voltage releases for supply < 100 V.
2 kV CM, 1 kV DM on 24 V DC supply.
2 kV CM, on all signals ports.
10 V CM; 0.15…80 MHz 20 V CM; 0.15...80 MHz
40 % (10/12 cycles); 70 % (25/30 cycles); 80 % (250/300 cycles)
0% (0.5 cycle); 0 % (1 cycle); 0 % (250/300 cycles)
External power supply failure:
b 3 interruptions during 5 minutes;
b switching-off time 30 s each case
Combined voltage and frequency variations
b AC: 50 Hz to 10 kHz ; 10 % of the rated voltage supply up to
harmonic 15. Then reduction at 1 % up to harmonic 100,
min 3 V RMS.
b DC: 50 Hz to10 kHz; Test voltage 10 % of the maximum voltage
supply 2 W.
AC supply of devices < 16 A

Only on pole accesses:

30-3 V; CM; 15-150 Hz; 3 V; CM; 150-1.5 kHz
3-30 V; CM; 1.5-15 kHz; 30 V; CM; 15-150 kHz
2.5 kV CM, 2,5 kV DM; 1 MHz
40 % (10/12 cycles); 70 % (25/30 cycles)
0 % (0.5 cycle); 0 % (50 ms); 0 % (250/300 cycles)
variations on DC : U ±20 %; 10 s.
External power supply failure:
b 3 interruptions during 5 minutes;
b switching-off time 30 s each case
Voltage continuous ±10 %; Voltage cyclic variation 5 %; Voltage ripple 10 %
F
8 kV air ; 8 kV contact

10 V/m ; 80 MHz…1 GHz; 1.4…2 GHz 20 V/m; 80 MHz…3 GHz

400 A/m permanently asked by IEC 61557-12 500 A/m permanently, 1000 A/m during 3 s

1000 A/m (8/20 µs wave)

100 A/m (100 kHz and 1 MHz)

- Tested on MX, XF, MN voltage releases for 240 V AC / 380 V AC

- A
B- Without VPS and with additional filters on MX, XF, MN voltage releases.
When VPS is connected 24 V DC supply is needed.

A
B- Without 24 V DC supply.
When 24 V DC supply is used additional external filtering is required.
The tests are applied to the following functions:
bb Bluetooth (Low Energy and Modulation DSSS)
bb Proprietary connectivity
bb NFC (Near Field Communication)

F-5
 Integrate in switchboard www.schneider-electric.com

Installation rules
Installation in switchboard
DB419125.eps

Top and bottom power supply

Masterpact devices can be supplied either from the top or from the bottom without
degrading performance, in order to facilitate connection when installed in a
switchboard.
DB419126.eps

DB419127.eps

Mounting the circuit breaker

It is important to distribute the weight of the device uniformly over a rigid mounting
surface such as rails or a base plate.
This mounting plane must be perfectly flat (tolerance on support flatness: 2 mm).
This eliminates any risk of deformation which could interfere with correct operation of
the circuit breaker.
Masterpact devices can also be mounted on a vertical plane using the special
Mounting on rails brackets.
DB419128.eps

F Mounting with vertical brackets

DB419122.eps

DB419123.eps

Circuit breaker possible positions

Only one position is autorized.
DB419124.eps

Possible positions

F-6
www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in switchboard
Installation rules
Installation in switchboard

Partitions

DB419131.eps
Sufficient openings must be provided in partitions to ensure good air circulation
around the circuit breaker. Any partition between top and bottom connections of the
device must be made of non-magnetic material.
For high currents, 2500 A and above, the metal supports or barriers in the immediate
vicinity of a conductor must be made of non-magnetic material [1].
Metal barriers [2] through which a conductor passes must not form a magnetic loop.
[1]

[1] non magnetic material

[2]

DB419129.eps
DB419130.eps
[2]

DB419132.eps

[3]

F
Busbars (MTZ1, MTZ2/MTZ3) [3]
[4] [4]
Creating a magnetic loop around a conductor, (via the busbar support for example),
must be strictly avoided.
To avoid this, either the supports [3] and/or the fixing screws [4] must be made of
non-magnetic materials.
65

100
DB419133.eps

Interphase barrier
DB419134.eps

If the insulation distance between phases is not sufficient (y 14 mm), it is advised to

install interphase barriers (taking into account the safety clearances).
Mandatory for Masterpact MTZ1 for operational voltage Ue u 500 V not compatible
with spreaders.

351 (MTZ1)
453 (MTZ2/MTZ3)

F-7
 Integrate in switchboard www.schneider-electric.com

Installation rules
Door interlock catch

Y Door interlock VPEC

DB424892.eps

Mounted on the right or left-hand side of the chassis, this device inhibits opening of
61 the cubicle door when the circuit breaker is in “connected” or “test” position.
If the breaker is put in the “connected” position with the door open, the door may be
X closed without having to disconnect the circuit breaker.
11.4 Dimensions (mm)
Type [1] [2]
Catch not
[1] [2]
supplied MTZ1 08-16 (3P) 135 168
MTZ1 MTZ1 08-16 (4P) 205 168
MTZ2 08-40 (3P) 215 215
MTZ2 08-40 (4P) 330 215
Y
DB424893.eps

MTZ3 40-63 (3P) 660 215

MTZ3 40-63 (4P) 775 215
Ø5
a
Ø8

X
8

5 15

[1] [2]
Catch not
supplied
MTZ2 - MTZ3

F [1] Breaker in “connected” or “test” position

DB419137R.eps

DB419138.eps

Door cannot be opened

Type [1] [2]

MTZ1 08-16 (3P) 5 23
[1] F MTZ1 08-16 (4P) 5 23
F
[2] MTZ2 08-40 (3P) 87 103
[2]
Door Door MTZ2 08-40 (4P) 87 103
MTZ1 06-16 MTZ2 08-40 MTZ3 40-63 (3P) 37 53
MTZ3 40-63 (4P) 37 53
DB419139.eps

[1]

[2] F
Door
MTZ3 40-63

F-8
www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in switchboard
Installation rules
Door interlock catch

Breaker in “disconnected” position

DB419141.eps
DB419140.eps
Door can be opened
Mounted on the right or left-hand side of the chassis, this device inhibits opening of
the cubicle door when the circuit breaker is in “connected” or “test” position.
It the breaker is put in the “connected” position with the door open, the door may be
closed without having to disconnect the circuit breaker.

MTZ1 06-16 MTZ2 08-40

DB419142.eps
MTZ3 40-63

Cable-type door interlock IPA

DB419144.eps

This option prevents opening the door when the circuit breaker is closed and
prevents circuit breaker closing when the door is open.
For this, a special plate associated with a lock and a cable is mounted on the right
side of the circuit breaker.
With this interlock installed, the source changeover function cannot be implemented. F
DB419143.eps

Db419447.eps

F-9
 Integrate in switchboard www.schneider-electric.com

Installation rules
Power connection

Cable connections
DB419154.eps

DB419155.eps

[1] If cables are used for the power connections, make sure that their weight is not
applied to the circuit breaker power terminals, but is supported by the panel
[2] structure.
For this, make the connections as follows:
bb extend the device terminals using short bars designed and installed according to
the recommendations for bar-type power connections:
vv for a single cable, use solution [1]
vv for a multiple cables, use solution [2].
bb in all cases, follow the general rules for connections to busbars:
vv position the cable lugs before inserting the bolts
vv the cables must be firmly secured to the framework [3].
[3] [3]
DB419156.eps

Busbar connections
[4] [5] [4]
Maximum distance A between busbar to circuit breaker connection and the
DB419157.eps

DB419213.eps

first busbar support or spacer with respect to the value of the prospective
short-circuit current.
Isc (kA) Distance A (mm)
30 350
50 300
65 250
A 80 150
100 150
150 150
bb The busbars must be suitably adjusted to ensure that the connection points are
[4] positioned on the power terminals before the bolts [4] are inserted.
DB419212.eps

bb The busbars weight must be supported by the busbar supports [5] that are solidly
fixed to the switchboard framework and not by the circuit breaker power terminals.

= Electrodynamic stresses
The first busbar support must be situated within a maximum distance (A) from the
power terminal of the circuit breaker. This distance must be respected so that the
= busbar can withstand the electrodynamic stresses between phases in the event of a
short circuit.The table above gives the maximum distance (A) according to the
prospective short-circuit current Isc.

F-10
 www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in switchboard
Installation rules
Power connection

A B C D E
DB419145.eps

A Terminal screw factory-tightened to 13 Nm (MTZ1)

and 16 Nm (MTZ2/MTZ3)
B Breaker terminal
C Busbar
D Bolt
E Washer
F Nut

Clamping

DB419149.eps
DB419148.eps
Correct clamping of busbars depends amongst other factors, on the tightening
torques used for the nuts and bolts. Over-tightening may have the same
consequences as under-tightening.
For connecting busbars (Cu ETP-NFA51-100) to the circuit breaker, the tightening
torques to be used are shown in the table below.
These values are for use with copper busbars and steel nuts and bolts, Class 8.8.
The same torques can be used with AGS-T52 quality aluminium bars (French

DB419150.eps
standard NFA 02-104 or American National Standard H-35-1).
Tightening torques
Ø (mm) Ø (mm) Tightening torques (Nm) Tightening torques (Nm)
Nominal Drilling with grower or flat washers with contact or corrugated
washers
10 11 37.5 50

Busbar drilling
DB419153.eps
DB419151.eps

DB419152.eps

Isolation distance
DB419146.eps

Ui X min (mm)
600 V 8
1000 V 14

Busbar bending
When bending busbars maintain the radius indicated below (a smaller radius would
cause cracks).
DB419147.eps

e (mm) Bending radius r (mm)

Min Recommended
5 5 7.5
10 15 18 to 20

F-11
 Integrate in switchboard www.schneider-electric.com

Installation rules
Recommended busbar drilling Masterpact MTZ1

Rear connection Rear connection with spreaders

50 50 63 80
DB418708.eps

DB418708.eps

DB418709.eps

DB418710.eps
15 15
12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 25.5 12.5
12 max. 12 max. 12 max. 12 max.

25 12.5 25 12.5 25 12.5 25 25 12.5

Middle left or middle Middle spreader Left or right spreader Left or right spreader
right spreader for 4P for 3P for 4P for 3P

44 77 77 77 77
DB419465.eps

DB419466.eps

DB419467.eps

DB419469.eps

DB419469.eps
25 9.5 12.5 38.5 38.5 38.5 38.5
13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5
25 = = 25 = = 25 = = 25 = =
60
30 30 30 30
12.5
82 52 15 82 52 15 82 52 15 82 52 15
2 11
5 11 5 11 5 11 5 11
25 25 25 25
52 52 52 52

Vertical rear connection

32 40 50 63 80
DB419214.eps

12 max. 12 max. 12 max. 12 max. 12 max.

F 25 25 25 25 25

12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5

60
12.5
12.5
DB419470.eps

9.5

25 44

2 11

Front connection Front connection via vertical connection adapters

50 50 63 80
DB418708.eps

DB418709.eps

DB418710.eps

15 15
DB418708.eps

12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 25.5 12.5

12 max. 12 max. 12 max. 12 max.

25 12.5 25 12.5 25 12.5 25 25 12.5

Top connection Bottom connection

44 2 11 89 12.5
DB419471.eps

DB419472.eps

DB419473.eps

25 9.5 25 = = 15
13

21
13 25 101
21
9.5 3 11
2 11 44

15 20

F-12
 www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in switchboard
Installation rules
Recommended busbar drilling Masterpact MTZ2 - MTZ3

Horizontal rear connection MTZ2 08 to 32 MTZ3 40 to 50

50 63 80 100 100
DB418708.eps

DB418709.eps

DB418710.eps

DB419215.eps

DB419216.eps
15 15 22 28 28 22
12.5 12.5 25.5 12.5
12 max. 12 max. 12 max.
12 max. 12 max.

25 12.5 25 12.5 25 25 12.5 25 25 12.5 25 25 12.5

76
DB419474.eps

DB419217.eps
38 13
25 = = 12.5

47

3 11.5 14.5
Y

Vertical rear connection MTZ2 08 to 32, MTZ3 40 to 50

40 50 60 80 100
DB419218.eps

25 25 25 25 25
12 max. 12 max. 12 max. 12 max. 12 max.
25 25 25 25 25

12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5
F
47
DB419475.eps

14.5 12.5
13

=
76
= 38

3 11.5 25

Front connection MTZ2 08 to 32

50 63 80
DB418709.eps
DB418708.eps

DB418710.eps

15 15
12.5 12.5 25.5 12.5
12 max. 12 max. 12 max.

25 12.5 25 12.5 25 25 12.5

Top connection Bottom connection

76
DB419477.eps
DB419476.eps

25 25 13

3 11.5
12.5
12.5
3 11.5

25 25 13

F-13
 Integrate in switchboard www.schneider-electric.com

Installation rules
Temperature derating

The current rating of a high-ampere frame circuit breaker is highly dependent on the actual conditions of installation and
connection.
In addition to the cross-section of the connecting busbars, there are other strongly influencing factors like their orientation
(affecting convection efficiency), their length, their layout (number of bars, shape, spacing, etc. affecting conduction
efficiency in a.c.), but also the ventilation and the presence of other devices in the vinicity. Thus it is not possible, for ratings
above 1600 A, to give strict values of current rating without performing a temperature rise test in the actual swichboard
configuration, as indicated in clause 10.10.4 of IEC 61439-1 (Low Voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies - Part 1:
General rules). Nevertheless, the following pages give guidelines for a first approach of connection sizing, installation
conditions, and current rating:
b Pages F-14 and F-15: indicates the maximum current rating depending on the ambient temperature around Masterpact,
with standard busbar sizes as per IEC 60947-2 and IEC 61439-1.
For other busbar sizes, see page F-16 and F-17.
These values are based on tests performed on the circuit breaker alone in free air, as per IEC 60947-2, and give a first
approach of the thermal performance of the device in standard conditions. lt cannot be fully representative of the actual
performance of the device in a switchboard. For derating in switchboards, see Pages F-18 to F-24.
b Page F-16 and F-17: suggests dimension of busbars to reach a given current in a given ambient temperature around the
breaker.
b Pages F-18 to F-24: gives the current rating (or derating) of Masterpact in a switchboard, depending on:
v the ambient temperature around the switchboard
v the ventilation (IP31, IP54)
v the number of breakers in the same column and the position of the breaker considered
v the busbar size and connection orientation (vertical or horizontal).
PB115714.eps

Evaluation and verification of the temperature Ti surrounding the circuit breakers installed
in low-voltage switchgear or controlgear assemblies
Requirements for the temperature rise in low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies with associated calculations and tests are
specified in IEC 61439-1/2 [1].
These two IEC standards lay down the definitions, the service conditions, and the requirements for construction, performance and
verification of low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies.
F The requirements dedicated to the design, the verifications and the test of the low voltage equipment covered by the scope of
IEC 61439-1/2 can be summarized as follows:
bb the design of every low-voltage switchgear shall be verified to prove its full compliance with IEC 61439-1/2.
bb this is mandatory for all the constructional and performance requirements specified in the standards. Extrapolations or
analogies with similar assemblies are not allowed.
bb concerning the temperature rise inside an assembly, type tests are mandatory for rated currents above 1600 A.
bb for currents up to and including 1600 A, the verification of temperature rise may be performed by calculation following the
method defined in IEC 60890 technical report [1].
The IEC 60890 technical report proposes a method to determine the temperature rise of the air inside the low-voltage enclosure
without forced ventilation. The method is applicable to enclosed assemblies or partitioned sections of assemblies.
Thus, for low-voltage assemblies with a rated current up to 1600 A, the internal temperature Ti surrounding the circuit breakers and
their connections may be evaluated following the method given in IEC 60890 technical report.

According to chapter 10.10.4.3.1 of IEC 61439-1, the method for the evaluation of the temperature Ti surrounding the circuit
breaker is applicable if the following conditions are fulfilled:
bb The power loss data for all built-in components is available from the component manufacturer.
bb There is an approximately even distribution of power losses inside the enclosure;
bb The rated current of the circuits of the assembly to be verified shall not exceed 80 % of the rated conventional free air thermal
PB115713.eps

current (Ith) if any, or the rated current (In) of the switching devices and electrical components included in the circuit.
bb The mechanical parts and the installed equipment are arranged so that air circulation is not significantly impeded.

The following data is needed to calculate the temperature rise of the air inside an enclosure:
bb Dimensions of the enclosure: height/width/depth;
bb Type of installation of the enclosure;
bb Design of enclosure, i.e. with or without ventilation openings;
bb Number of internal horizontal partitions;
bb Effective power loss of equipment installed in the enclosure;
bb Effective power losses (Pn) of conductors installed in the enclosure.

Note: Experience shows that for external ambient temperatures up to 35 °C, the internal temperature inside IP 31 low-voltage
switchgear and controlgear assemblies does not exceed 60 °C. For degrees of protection above IP 31 the internal temperature
reaches 70 °C.
[1] IEC 61439-1: Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies-Part 1: General rules
IEC 61439-2: Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies-Part 2: Power switchgear and controlgear assemblies
IEC/TR 60890: A method of temperature-rise verification of low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies by
calculation.

F-14
www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in switchboard
Installation rules
Temperature derating

Power dissipation (W)

bb Total power dissipation is the value measured at In, 50/60 Hz, for a 3-pole or 4-pole breaker,
in steady state temperature as per IEC/EN 60947-2.

Type of MTZ1 MTZ2 MTZ3

Masterpact
06 08 10 12 16 08 10 12 16 20 25 32 40 40 50 63
H1 L1 H1 L1 H1 L1 H1 H1 N1 H1 N1 H1 N1 H1 N1 H1 N1 H1 H1 H1 H1 H1 H1
H2 H2 H2 H2 H2 H2 H2 H2 H2 H1 H2 H2 H2 H2 H2 H2
H3 H3 H3 H3 H3 L1 L1 L1 L1 H2 L1 L1 L1
H10 H10 H10 H10 L1 H10 H10 H10
H10
Drawout
55 115 90 140 150 230 250 460 137 100 220 150 330 230 480 390 470 600 670 900 550 950 1200

Fixed
30 45 50 80 80 110 130 220 62 42 100 70 150 100 220 170 250 260 420 650 390 660 1050

Temperature derating
bb The table below indicates the maximum current rating, for each connection type, as a function
of Ti around the circuit breaker and the busbars. Circuit breakers with mixed connections have
the same derating as horizontally connected breakers.
bb Ti: temperature around the circuit breaker and its connection.

Drawout
Type of Masterpact MTZ1 H1 - H2 - H3 -L1 MTZ2 N1 - H1 - H2 - H3 -L1 -H10 MTZ3 H1 - H2
[2] [3]
06 08 10 12 16 08 10 12 16 20 20 25 32 40 40 50 63
Ti [1] (°C) In max. (A)
In front or rear 40 630 800 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2000 2500 3200 4000 4000 5000 –
horizontal 45 1560 3900
50 1520 3100 3800
55 1480 3030 3700
60
65 1200
1440
1400
1900
1830 1950 2450
2950
2880
3600
3500
F
70 1140 1360 1520 1750 1900 2370 2800 3400
In rear vertical 40 630 800 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2000 2500 3200 4000 4000 5000 6300
45
50
55 1560 3900
60 1520 3800 6200
65 1480 3700 6000
70 1440 3100 3600 5800
Fixed
Type of Masterpact MTZ1 H1 - H2 - H3 -L1 MTZ2 N1 - H1 - H2 - H3 -L1 -H10 MTZ3 H1 - H2
[2] [3]
06 08 10 12 16 08 10 12 16 20 20 25 32 40 40 50 63
Ti [1] (°C) In max. (A)
In front or rear 40 630 800 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 – 2500 3200 4000 4000 5000 –
horizontal 45
50
55 3900
60 1560 1920 3140 3800
65 1520 1850 3050 3700
70 1480 1770 2960 3600
In rear vertical 40 630 800 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 – 2500 3200 4000 4000 5000 6300
45
50
55
60
65 3900
70 1560 3800 6200
[1] Ti: temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections
[2] Type: H1/H2/H3
[3] Type: L1
In. max. admissible.

F-15
 Integrate in switchboard www.schneider-electric.com

Installation rules
Busbar sizing, front or rear horizontal connection

Masterpact Max. Ti : 40 °C Ti : 50 °C Ti : 60 °C Ti : 70 °C
service No. of No. of No. of No. of No. of No. of No. of No. of
current 5 mm 10 mm 5 mm 10 mm 5 mm 10 mm 5 mm 10 mm
thick bars thick bars thick bars thick bars thick bars thick bars thick bars thick bars
MTZ1 06 400 2b.30 x 5 1b.30 x 10 2b.30 x 5 1b.30 x 10 2b.30 x 5 1b.30 x 10 2b.40 x 5 1b.40 x 10
MTZ1 06 630 2b.40 x 5 1b.40 x 10 2b.40 x 5 1b.40 x 10 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 5 1b.60 x 10
MTZ1 08 or MTZ2 08 800 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 2b.60 x 5 1b.60 x 10 3b.50 x 5 2b.40 x 10
MTZ1 10 or MTZ2 10 1000 2b.60 x 5 1b.60 x 10 2b.60 x 5 1b.60 x 10 2b.80 x 5 2b.40 x 10 3b.60 x 5 2b.50 x 10
MTZ1 12 or MTZ2 12 1250 3b.50 x 5 2b.40 x 10 3b.50 x 5 2b.40 x 10 3b.60 x 5 2b.50 x 10 3b.80 x 5 2b.60 x 10
MTZ1 12 or MTZ2 12 1250 2b.80x5 2b.80x5
MTZ1 16 or MTZ2 16 1400 3b.60 x 5 2b.50 x 10 3b.60 x 5 2b.50 x 10 3b.80 x 5 2b.60 x 10 3b.80 x 5 3b.50 x 10
MTZ1 16 or MTZ2 16 1600 3b.80 x 5 2b.60 x 10 3b.80 x 5 2b.60 x 10 3b.100 x 5 3b.50 x 10 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10
MTZ2 20 1800 3b.80 x 5 2b.60 x 10 3b.80 x 5 2b.60 x 10 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10 4b.100 x 5 3b.60 x 10
MTZ2 20 2000 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10 4b.100 x 5 3b.60 x 10 4b.100 x 5 2b.100 x 10
MTZ2 25 2200 4b.80 x 5 2b.80 x 10 4b.80 x 5 2b.80 x 10 4b.100 x 5 2b.100 x 10 5b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10
MTZ2 25 2500 4b.100 x 5 2b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 5 2b.100 x 10 5b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10 6b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10
MTZ2 32 2800 5b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10 5b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10 6b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10 7b.100 x 5 4b.80 x 10
MTZ2 32 3000 6b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10 6b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10 7b.100 x 5 4b.80 x 10 8b.100 x 5 4b.100 x 10
MTZ2 32 3200 7b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10 7b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10 8b.100 x 5 4b.100 x 10 5b.100 x 10
MTZ2 40 3800 4b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 10 5b.100 x 10 6b.100 x 10
MTZ2 40 4000 5b.100 x 10 5b.100 x 10 6b.100 x 10 7b.100 x 10
MTZ3 40 4000 5b.100 x 10 5b.100 x 10 6b.100 x 10 7b.100 x 10
MTZ3 50 4500 6b.100 x 10 6b.100 x 10 7b.100 x 10 8b.100 x 10

F
MTZ3 50 5000 7b.100 x 10 7b.100 x 10 8b.100 x 10
With Masterpact MTZ1, it is recommended to use 50 mm-wide bars (see “Busbar drilling” in page F-12).
DB419228.eps

Factors in tables
bb maximum permissible busbar temperature: 100 °C
bb Ti: temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections
bb busbar material is unpainted copper

Example
Conditions:
bb drawout version
bb horizontal busbars
bb Ti: 50 °C
bb service current: 1800 A
Solution:
For Ti = 50 °C, use an MTZ2 20 which can be connected with three 80 x 5 mm bars
or two 60 x 10 mm bars.
Note: For Masterpact NT/NW, 63 mm wide bars were recommended.
For Masterpact MTZ, 63 mm wide bars have been replaced by 60 mm wide bars which are
more standard. However 63 mm wide bars can be used instead of 60 mm.

Note: The values indicated in these tables are extrapolated from test data and theoretical
calculations. These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot replace industrial
experience or a temperature rise test.

F-16
 www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in switchboard
Installation rules
Busbar sizing Rear vertical connection

Masterpact Maximum Ti : 40 °C Ti : 50 °C Ti : 60 °C Ti : 70 °C
service Nb. of Nb. of Nb. of Nb. of Nb. of Nb. of Nb. of Nb. of
current 5 mm 10 mm 5 mm 10 mm 5 mm 10 mm 5 mm 10 mm
thick bars thick bars thick bars thick bars thick bars thick bars thick bars thick bars
MTZ1 06 400 1b.40 x 5 1b.30 x 10 1b.40 x 5 1b.30 x 10 1b.50 x 5 1b.30 x 10 1b.50 x 5 1b.30 x 10
MTZ1 06 630 1b.60 x 5 1b.30 x 10 1b.60 x 5 1b.30 x 10 2b.40 x 5 1b.40 x 10 2b.40 x 5 1b.40 x 10
MTZ1 08 or MTZ2 08 800 2b.40 x 5 1b.40 x 10 2b.40 x 5 1b.40 x 10 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10
MTZ1 10 or MTZ2 10 1000 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 2b.60 x 5 1b.60 x 10 2b.60 x 5 1b.60 x 10
MTZ1 12 or MTZ2 12 1250 2b.60 x 5 1b.60 x 10 2b.60 x 5 1b.60 x 10 3b.50 x 5 2b.40 x 10 2b.80 x 5 2b.50 x 10
MTZ1 16 or MTZ2 16 1400 2b.80 x 5 1b.80 x 10 2b.80 x 5 1b.80 x 10 3b.60 x 5 2b.50 x 10 2b.100 x 5 2b.50 x 10
MTZ1 16 or MTZ2 16 1600 3b.60 x 5 2b.50 x 10 3b.60 x 5 2b.50 x 10 2b.100 x 5 2b.60 x 10 3b.80 x 5 2b.60 x 10
MTZ2 20 1800 2b.100 x 5 1b.100 x 10 2b.100 x 5 1b.100 x 10 3b.80 x 5 2b.60 x 10 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10
MTZ2 20 2000 3b.80 x 5 2b.60 x 10 3b.80 x 5 2b.60 x 10 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10 3b.125 x 5 2b.100 x 10
MTZ2 25 2200 3b.100 x 5 2b.60 x 10 3b.100 x 5 2b.60 x 10 4b.80 x 5 2b.80 x 10 4b.100 x 5 2b.100 x 10
MTZ2 25 2500 4b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10 4b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10 4b.100 x 5 2b.100 x 10 5b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10
MTZ2 32 2800 4b.100 x 5 2b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 5 2b.100 x 10 5b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10 6b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10
MTZ2 32 3000 5b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10 5b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10 6b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10 3b.100 x 10
MTZ2 32 3200 6b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10 6b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10 4b.80 x 10 3b.120 x 10
MTZ2 40 3800 4b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 10 4b.120 x 10
MTZ2 40 4000 4b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 10 5b.100 x 10 5b.120 x 10
MTZ3 40 4000 4b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 10 5b.100 x 10 5b.100 x 10
MTZ3 50 4500 5b.100 x 10 5b.100 x 10 6b.100 x 10 6b.120 x 10
MTZ3 50 5000 6b.100 x 10 6b.100 x 10 7b.100 x 10 7b.120 x 10
MTZ3 63
MTZ3 63
5700
6300
7b.100 x 10
8b.100 x 10
7b.100 x 10
8b.100 x 10
8b.100 x 10 8b.120 x 10
F
DB419229.eps

Factors in tables
bb maximum permissible busbar temperature: 100 °C
bb Ti: temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections
bb busbar material is unpainted copper

Example
Conditions:
bb drawout version
bb vertical connections
bb Ti: 40 °C
bb service current: 1100 A
Solution:
For Ti = 40 °C use an MTZ1 12 or MTZ2 12 which can be connected with two
60 x 5 mm bars or with one 60 x 10 mm bar
Note: For Masterpact NT/NW, 63 mm wide bars were recommended.
For Masterpact MTZ, 63 mm wide bars have been replaced by 60 mm wide bars which are
more standard. However 63 mm wide bars can be used instead of 60 mm.

Note: The values indicated in these tables are extrapolated from test data and theoretical
calculations. These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot replace industrial
experience or a temperature rise test.

F-17
 Integrate in switchboard www.schneider-electric.com

Installation rules
Circuit breaker derating

2000 x 400 x 400 area of outlet vents: 150 cm2

> Masterpact MTZ1 06-16 H1/H2/H3/L1
Type MTZ1 06 MTZ1 08 MTZ1 10 MTZ1 12 MTZ1 16
H1/H2/H3/L1 H1/H2/H3/L1 H1/H2/H3/L1 H1/H2/H3 H1/H2/H3
Switchboard composition
4
3
2
1

Connection type

Busbar dimensions (mm) 2b. 40 x 5 2b. 50 x 5 3b. 60 x 5 3b. 60 x 5 3b. 80 x 5

3b. 50 x 5 3b. 60 x 5
Ventilated switchboard 4 H1/L1 H1/L1
(➡ IP31) 3 630 630 800 800 1000/1000 1000/1000 1250 1250 1400 1520
[1] Ta = 35 °C 2
DB419219.eps

1
4
3 630 630 800 800 1000/950 1000/1000 1250 1250 1330 1440
Ta = 45 °C
2
1
4
3 630 630 800 800 1000/890 1000/960 1200 1250 1250 1340
Ta = 55 °C
2
[2] 1

[1] Area of outlet vents: 150 cm2

F [2] Area of inlet vents: 150 cm²

Non ventilated switchboard
(➡ IP54)
4
3 630 630 800 800 1000/960 1000/1000 1250 1250 1330 1400
Ta = 35 °C 2
DB419220.eps

1
4
3 630 630 800 800 1000/910 1000/980 1220 1250 1260 1330
Ta = 45 °C
2
1
4
3 630 630 800 800 1000/860 1000/930 1150 1230 1200 1260
Ta = 55 °C 2
1

Factors in tables Factors affecting switchboard design

bb switchboard dimensions bb The temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections is used to define the type of circuit breaker to be used and its
bb number of circuit breakers connection arrangement.
installed bb Vents at the top and bottom of the cubicles considerably reduce the temperature inside the switchboard, but must be designed
bb type of breaker so as to respect the degree of protection provided by the enclosure. For weatherproof heavy-duty cubicles, a forced ventilation
connections system may be required.
bb drawout versions bb The heat dissipated by the devices installed in the switchboard is the heat dissipated by the circuit breakers under normal
bb ambient temperature conditions (service current).
outside the switchboard: bb The size of the enclosure determines the volume for cooling calculations.
Ta (IEC 61439-1) bb Switchboard installation mode: free-standing, against a wall, etc.
bb Horizontal partitions can obstruct air circulation within the enclosure.

Note: The values indicated in these tables are extrapolated from test data and theoretical calculations.
These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot replace industrial experience or a temperature rise test.
The values indicated for the cross-sectional area of the vents should be considered as general indications only, given that
the thermal performance of a switchboard with natural ventilation depends on many parameters, including shape, porosity,
and location of vents and air flow within the switchboard.

F-18
 www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in switchboard
Installation rules
Circuit breaker derating

2300 x 1100 x 500 area of outlet vents: 300 cm2

> Masterpact MTZ1 06-08 H1/H2/H3/L1
Type MTZ1 06 H1/H2/H3/L1 MTZ1 08 H1/H2/H3/L1
Switchboard composition
5
4
3
2
1

Connection type

Busbar dimensions (mm) 2b. 40 x 5 2b. 50 x 5

Ventilated switchboard (➡ IP31) 5 630 630 800

[1] 4 630 630 630 800 800
DB419221.eps

[1]
3 630 630 630 630 800 800 800
Ta = 35 °C
2 630 630 630 630 630 630 800 800 800 800 800
1 630
5 630 630 800
4 630 630 630 800 800
Ta = 45 °C 3 630 630 630 630 800 800 800
2 630 630 630 630 630 630 800 800 800 800 800
1 630
5 630 630 800
[2] 4 630 630 630 800 800
[2]
Ta = 55 °C 3 630 630 630 630 800 800 800
2 630 630 630 630 630 630 800 800 800 800 800

[1] Area of outlet vents: 300 cm²

[2] Area of inlet vents: 300 cm²
1 630
F
Non ventilated switchboard 5 630 630 800
(➡ IP54) 4 630 630 630 800 800
Ta = 35 °C 3 630 630 630 630 800 800 800
DB419222.eps

2 630 630 630 630 630 630 800 800 800 800 800
1 630
5 630 630 800
4 630 630 630 800 800
Ta = 45 °C 3 630 630 630 630 800 800 800
2 630 630 630 630 630 630 800 800 800 800 800
1 630
5 630 630 800
4 630 630 630 800 800
Ta = 55 °C 3 630 630 630 630 800 800 800
2 630 630 630 630 630 630 800 800 800 800 800
1 630

Factors in tables Factors affecting switchboard design

bb switchboard dimensions bb The temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections is used to define the type of circuit breaker to be used and its
bb number of circuit breakers connection arrangement.
installed bb Vents at the top and bottom of the cubicles considerably reduce the temperature inside the switchboard, but must be designed
bb type of breaker so as to respect the degree of protection provided by the enclosure. For weatherproof heavy-duty cubicles, a forced ventilation
connections system may be required.
bb drawout versions bb The heat dissipated by the devices installed in the switchboard is the heat dissipated by the circuit breakers under normal
bb ambient temperature conditions (service current).
outside the switchboard: bb The size of the enclosure determines the volume for cooling calculations.
Ta (IEC 61439-1) bb Switchboard installation mode: free-standing, against a wall, etc.
bb Horizontal partitions can obstruct air circulation within the enclosure.

Note: The values indicated in these tables are extrapolated from test data and theoretical calculations.
These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot replace industrial experience or a temperature rise test.
The values indicated for the cross-sectional area of the vents should be considered as general indications only, given that
the thermal performance of a switchboard with natural ventilation depends on many parameters, including shape, porosity,
and location of vents and air flow within the switchboard.

F-19
 Integrate in switchboard www.schneider-electric.com

Installation rules
Circuit breaker derating

2300 x 1100 x 500 area of outlet vents: 300 cm2

> Masterpact MTZ1 10-16 H1/H2/H3/L1
Type MTZ1 10 H1/H2/H3/L1 MTZ1 12 H1/H2/H3 MTZ1 16 H1/H2/H3
Switchboard composition
5
4
3
2
1

Connection type

Busbar dimensions (mm) 3b. 60 x 5 3b. 60 x 5 3b. 80 x 5

2b. 60 x 5 3b. 50 x 5 3b. 60 x 5
Ventilated switchboard (➡ IP31) 5 H1/L1 H1/L1 H1/L1
H1/L1
4 1000/1000 1250
DB419221.eps

[1]
[1]
3 1000/10001000/1000 1250 1250 1500
Ta = 35 °C
2 1000/10001000/1000 1000/10001000/1000 1250 1250 1250 1250 1460 1600 1550
1
5
4 1000/1000 1250
Ta = 45 °C 3 1000/10001000/1000 1250 1250 1420
2 1000 /960 1000/1000 1000/10001000/1000 1250 1250 1250 1250 1400 1500 1480
1
5
[2]
4 1000/920 1250
[2]
Ta = 55 °C 3 1000/950 1000/930 1250 1250 1330
2 1000/900 1000/1000 1000/970 1000/950 1250 1250 1250 1250 1300 1400 1370

F [1] Area of outlet vents: 300 cm²

[2] Area of inlet vents: 300 cm²
1

Non ventilated switchboard 5

(➡ IP54) 4 1000/950 1250
Ta = 35 °C 3 1000/10001000/960 1250 1250 1370
DB419222.eps

2 1000/10001000/1000 1000/10001000/970 1250 1250 1250 1250 1400 1500 1400

5
4 1000 /900 1180
Ta = 45 °C
3 1000 /950 1000 /910 1250 1190 1300
2 1000/950 1000/1000 1000 /960 1000 /930 1250 1250 1250 1220 1350 1430 1320
5
4 1000/850 1120
Ta = 55 °C
3 1000/900 1000/860 1200 1130 1210
2 1000/880 1000/970 1000/910 1000/870 1210 1250 1210 1150 1250 1350 1250

Factors in tables Factors affecting switchboard design

bb switchboard dimensions bb The temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections is used to define the type of circuit breaker to be used and its
bb number of circuit breakers connection arrangement.
installed bb Vents at the top and bottom of the cubicles considerably reduce the temperature inside the switchboard, but must be designed
bb type of breaker so as to respect the degree of protection provided by the enclosure. For weatherproof heavy-duty cubicles, a forced ventilation
connections system may be required.
bb drawout versions bb The heat dissipated by the devices installed in the switchboard is the heat dissipated by the circuit breakers under normal
bb ambient temperature conditions (service current).
outside the switchboard: bb The size of the enclosure determines the volume for cooling calculations.
Ta (IEC 61439-1) bb Switchboard installation mode: free-standing, against a wall, etc.
bb Horizontal partitions can obstruct air circulation within the enclosure.

Note: The values indicated in these tables are extrapolated from test data and theoretical calculations.
These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot replace industrial experience or a temperature rise test.
The values indicated for the cross-sectional area of the vents should be considered as general indications only, given that
the thermal performance of a switchboard with natural ventilation depends on many parameters, including shape, porosity,
and location of vents and air flow within the switchboard.

F-20
 www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in switchboard
Installation rules
Circuit breaker derating

2300 x 800 x 900 area of outlet vents: 350 cm2

> Masterpact MTZ2 08-10 N1/H1/H2/L1/H10
Type MTZ2 08 N1/H1/H2/L1/H10 MTZ2 10 N1/H1/H2/L1/H10
Switchboard composition
4
3
2
1

Connection type

Busbar dimensions (mm) 2b. 50 x 5 3b. 60 x 5

2b. 60 x 5
Ventilated switchboard (➡ IP31) 4 800
3 800 800 1000
DB419223.eps

[1]
Ta = 35 °C 2 800 800 800 1000 1000
1 800 800 800 800 800 1000 1000 1000 1000
4 800
3 800 800 1000
Ta = 45 °C
2 800 800 800 1000 1000
1 800 800 800 800 800 1000 1000 1000 1000
4 800
3 800 800 1000
Ta = 55 °C
[2] 2 800 800 800 1000 1000
1 800 800 800 800 800 1000 1000 1000 1000

[1] Area of outlet vents: 350 cm².

[2] Area of inlet vents: 350 cm².
Non ventilated switchboard 4 800
(➡ IP54)
Ta = 35 °C
3
2 800
800
800
800
800 1000
1000
1000
F
DB419224.eps

1 800 800 800 800 800 1000 1000 1000 1000

4 800
3 800 800 1000
Ta = 45 °C
2 800 800 800 1000 1000
1 800 800 800 800 800 1000 1000 1000 1000
4 800
3 800 800 1000
Ta = 55 °C
2 800 800 800 1000 1000
1 800 800 800 800 800 1000 1000 1000 1000

Factors in tables Factors affecting switchboard design

bb switchboard dimensions bb The temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections is used to define the type of circuit breaker to be used and its
bb number of circuit breakers connection arrangement.
installed bb Vents at the top and bottom of the cubicles considerably reduce the temperature inside the switchboard, but must be designed
bb type of breaker so as to respect the degree of protection provided by the enclosure. For weatherproof heavy-duty cubicles, a forced ventilation
connections system may be required.
bb drawout versions bb The heat dissipated by the devices installed in the switchboard is the heat dissipated by the circuit breakers under normal
bb ambient temperature conditions (service current).
outside the switchboard: bb The size of the enclosure determines the volume for cooling calculations.
Ta (IEC 61439-1) bb Switchboard installation mode: free-standing, against a wall, etc.
bb Horizontal partitions can obstruct air circulation within the enclosure.

Note: The values indicated in these tables are extrapolated from test data and theoretical calculations.
These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot replace industrial experience or a temperature rise test.
The values indicated for the cross-sectional area of the vents should be considered as general indications only, given that
the thermal performance of a switchboard with natural ventilation depends on many parameters, including shape, porosity,
and location of vents and air flow within the switchboard.

F-21
 Integrate in switchboard www.schneider-electric.com

Installation rules
Circuit breaker derating

2300 x 800 x 900 area of outlet vents: 350 cm2

> Masterpact MTZ2 12-16 N1/H1/H2/L1/H10
Type MTZ2 12 N1 MTZ2 12 H1/H2/L1/H10 MTZ2 16 N1 MTZ2 16 H1/H2/L1/H10
Switchboard composition
4
3
2
1

Connection type

Busbar dimensions (mm) 3b. 60 x 5 3b. 60 x 5 3b. 80 x 5 3b. 80 x 5

3b. 50 x 5 3b. 50 x 5 3b. 60 x 5 3b. 60 x 5
Ventilated switchboard (➡ IP31) 4
3 1250 1250
DB419223.eps

[1]
Ta = 35 °C 2 1250 1250 1250 1250 1600 1600
1 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1550 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600
4
3 1250 1250
Ta = 45 °C
2 1250 1250 1250 1250 1500 1600
1 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1470 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600
4
3 1250 1250
Ta = 55 °C
[2] 2 1250 1250 1250 1250 1380 1470
1 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1380 1500 1500 1520 1600 1600

[1] Area of outlet vents: 350 cm²

[2] Area of inlet vents: 350 cm²
Non ventilated switchboard 4
F (➡ IP54)
Ta = 35 °C
3
2 1250
1240
1250 1250
1250
1250 1425 1600
1 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1440 1550 1550 1600 1600 1600
4
DB419224.eps

3 1170 1250
Ta = 45 °C
2 1210 1210 1250 1250 1360 1500
1 1200 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1360 1470 1470 1500 1600 1600
4
3 1100 1250
Ta = 55 °C
2 1140 1170 1250 1250 1280 1400
1 1130 1200 1200 1200 1250 1250 1250 1250 1280 1380 1380 1400 1520 1520

Factors in tables Factors affecting switchboard design

bb switchboard dimensions bb The temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections is used to define the type of circuit breaker to be used and its
bb number of circuit breakers connection arrangement.
installed bb Vents at the top and bottom of the cubicles considerably reduce the temperature inside the switchboard, but must be designed
bb type of breaker so as to respect the degree of protection provided by the enclosure. For weatherproof heavy-duty cubicles, a forced ventilation
connections system may be required.
bb drawout versions bb The heat dissipated by the devices installed in the switchboard is the heat dissipated by the circuit breakers under normal
bb ambient temperature conditions (service current).
outside the switchboard: bb The size of the enclosure determines the volume for cooling calculations.
Ta (IEC 61439-1) bb Switchboard installation mode: free-standing, against a wall, etc.
bb Horizontal partitions can obstruct air circulation within the enclosure.

Note: The values indicated in these tables are extrapolated from test data and theoretical calculations.
These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot replace industrial experience or a temperature rise test.
The values indicated for the cross-sectional area of the vents should be considered as general indications only, given that
the thermal performance of a switchboard with natural ventilation depends on many parameters, including shape, porosity,
and location of vents and air flow within the switchboard.

F-22
 www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in switchboard
Installation rules
Circuit breaker derating

2300 x 800 x 900 area of outlet vents: 350 cm2

> Masterpact MTZ2 20-40 N1/H1/H2/L1/H10
Type MTZ2 20 MTZ2 20 MTZ2 25 MTZ2 32 MTZ2 40
N1/H1/H2/H3/H10 L1 H1/H2/H3/H10 H1/H2/H3/H10 H1/H2/H3/H10
Switchboard composition
4
3
2
1

Connection type

Busbar dimensions (mm) 3b. 100 x 5 3b. 100 x 5 4b. 100 x 5 3b. 100 x 10 4b. 100 x 10
Ventilated switchboard (➡ IP31) 4
3 2000 1830
Ta = 35 °C 2 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2375 2500 3040 3200 3320 3700
DB421285.ai

1
4
3 2000 1750
Ta = 45 °C
2 2000 2000 2000 1810 1960 1920 2250 2380 2880 3100 3160 3500
1
4
3 2000 1640
Ta = 55 °C
2 2000 2000 2000 1700 1850 1800 2100 2250 2690 2900 2960 3280
1

[1] Area of outlet vents: 350 cm².

[2] Area of inlet vents: 350 cm².
Non ventilated switchboard 4
(➡ IP54)
Ta = 35 °C
3
2 2000 2000
2000
2000 1800 1900
1750
1890 2125 2275 2650 2850 3040 3320
F
1
DB421286.ai

4
3 1900 1660
Ta = 45 °C
2 1900 1960 1960 1680 1810 1800 2000 2150 2550 2700 2880 3120
1
4
3 1780 1550
Ta = 55 °C
2 1800 1920 1920 1590 1700 1700 1900 2020 2370 2530 2720 2960
1

Factors in tables Factors affecting switchboard design

bb switchboard dimensions bb The temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections is used to define the type of circuit breaker to be used and its
bb number of circuit breakers connection arrangement.
installed bb Vents at the top and bottom of the cubicles considerably reduce the temperature inside the switchboard, but must be designed
bb type of breaker so as to respect the degree of protection provided by the enclosure. For weatherproof heavy-duty cubicles, a forced ventilation
connections system may be required.
bb drawout versions bb The heat dissipated by the devices installed in the switchboard is the heat dissipated by the circuit breakers under normal
bb ambient temperature conditions (service current).
outside the switchboard: bb The size of the enclosure determines the volume for cooling calculations.
Ta (IEC 61439-1) bb Switchboard installation mode: free-standing, against a wall, etc.
bb Horizontal partitions can obstruct air circulation within the enclosure.

Note: The values indicated in these tables are extrapolated from test data and theoretical calculations.
These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot replace industrial experience or a temperature rise test.
The values indicated for the cross-sectional area of the vents should be considered as general indications only, given that
the thermal performance of a switchboard with natural ventilation depends on many parameters, including shape, porosity,
and location of vents and air flow within the switchboard.

F-23
 Integrate in switchboard www.schneider-electric.com

Installation rules
Circuit breaker derating

2300 x 1400 x 1500 area of outlet vents: 500 cm2

> Masterpact MTZ3 40-63 H1/H2
Type MTZ3 40 H1/H2 MTZ3 50 H1/H2 MTZ3 63 H1/H2
Switchboard composition
4
3
2
1

Connection type

Busbar dimensions (mm) 5b. 100 x 10 7b. 100 x 10 8b. 100 x 10

Ventilated switchboard (➡ IP31) 4
3
DB419226.eps

Ta = 35 °C 2 4000 4000 4700 5000 5850

[1]
[1] 1
4
3
Ta = 45 °C
2 4000 4000 4450 4850 5670
1
4
3
Ta = 55 °C
2 4000 4000 4200 4600 5350
1
[2]
[2]

[1] Area of outlet vents: 500 cm²

[2] Area of inlet vents: 500 cm²
F Non ventilated switchboard
(➡ IP54)
4
3
Ta = 35 °C 2 4000 4000 4350 4650 5290
DB419227.eps

1
4
3
Ta = 45 °C
2 4000 4000 4100 4400 5040
1
4
3
Ta = 55 °C
2 3840 3840 3850 4150 4730
1

Factors in tables Factors affecting switchboard design

bb switchboard dimensions bb The temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections is used to define the type of circuit breaker to be used and its
bb number of circuit breakers connection arrangement.
installed bb Vents at the top and bottom of the cubicles considerably reduce the temperature inside the switchboard, but must be designed
bb type of breaker so as to respect the degree of protection provided by the enclosure. For weatherproof heavy-duty cubicles, a forced ventilation
connections system may be required.
bb drawout versions bb The heat dissipated by the devices installed in the switchboard is the heat dissipated by the circuit breakers under normal
bb ambient temperature conditions (service current).
outside the switchboard: bb The size of the enclosure determines the volume for cooling calculations.
Ta (IEC 61439-1). bb Switchboard installation mode: free-standing, against a wall, etc.
bb Horizontal partitions can obstruct air circulation within the enclosure.

Note: The values indicated in these tables are extrapolated from test data and theoretical calculations.
These tables are only intended as a guide and cannot replace industrial experience or a temperature rise test.
The values indicated for the cross-sectional area of the vents should be considered as general indications only, given that
the thermal performance of a switchboard with natural ventilation depends on many parameters, including shape, porosity,
and location of vents and air flow within the switchboard.

F-24
 www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in switchboard
Dimensions
Masterpact MTZ1 Fixed 3/4-pole devices

Dimensions
105 (3P)
175 (4P) 105

DB419589.eps
178
136
105
DB419588.eps

301 X X
210

123

7 27 188
9.5 165.5 138 (3P) 138
208 (4P)
209 276 (3P)
346 (4P)
Y

Mounting on base plate or rails Mounting detail

6 Ø6.5 4 Ø6.5

DB419592.eps
DB419591.eps
DB419590.eps

25 100

125 154
X X
F 62.5 77
125 (3P) 125
195 (4P)
250 (3P)
320 (4P) 125 (3P) 125
42 195 (4P)
18 mini
39 maxi
100
Y 250 (3P)
320 (4P) F
150 Y
F

Safety clearances Door cutout Rear panel cutout

A[3] B A[3] B u 194 (3P) u 194
DB419596.eps

DB419593.eps

DB419594.eps

u 264 (4P)

62
44
216 [1]
266 [2]
DB419595.eps

X X

40 130 108 [1] 62

106
133 [2]
F 100 (3P)
170 (4P) 100
194 [1] 97 [1]
244 [2] 122 [2] Y

Insulated Metal Energized [1] Without escutcheon.

parts parts parts [2] With escutcheon.
[3] An overhead clearance of 50 mm is required to remove the arc chutes.
A 0 0 100
An overhead clearance of 20 mm is required to remove the terminal block.
B 0 0 60
Note: F Datum, circuit breaker or chassis mounting hole.
X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.

F-25
 Integrate in switchboard www.schneider-electric.com

Dimensions
Masterpact MTZ1 Fixed 3/4-pole devices

Connections
Horizontal rear connection Details
43.5 70 70 70

DB419599.eps
DB419598.eps
DB419597.eps

123
15 67.5
X

15 67.5 N
123 Y

167.5
44
F
25 9.5 12.5

DB419600.eps
60
12.5

2 Ø11

Vertical rear connection Details

43.5 70 70 70
15
DB419603.eps
DB419602.eps
DB419601.eps

97
X

97
N
Y
F 167.5 60
F 12.5
DB421343.eps

12.5 9.5

25 44

2 11

Front connection Details

12 70 70 70
DB419605.eps

DB419606.eps
DB419604.eps

150

N
X
Y
326
150
Top connection Bottom connection
44 2 Ø11
164 25 9.5
DB419607.eps

DB419608.eps

F 13

13
25
9.5
2 Ø11 44
Notes: R
 ecommended connection screws: M10 Class 8.8.
Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.

F-26
 www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in switchboard
Dimensions
Masterpact MTZ1 Fixed 3/4-pole devices

Connections
Front connection with spreaders Details
95 95
DB419636.eps

70 70 15

DB419638.eps
DB419637.eps

202

X
434
Y
202
DB419635.eps

95 95 95
12.5 12.5

DB419639.eps
70 70 70 15
179
F

N
Y

Rear connection with spreaders Details

98 95 95
DB419636.eps

70 70
DB419640.eps

DB419641.eps

15 123
82.5
X
15 52.5
123

F
DB419635.eps

219.5
Y
234.5
F 95 95 95
12.5 12.5
DB419642.eps

70 70 70

N
Y

Spreader detail
Middle left or middle right Middle spreader for 3P Left or right spreader for 4P Left or right spreader for 3P
spreader for 4P
77 77 77 77
DB419643.eps

DB419644.eps

DB419645.eps

DB419646.eps

38.5 38.5 38.5 38.5

13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5
25 = = 25 25 25

30 30 30 30
82 52 15 82 52 15 82 52 15 82 52 15
5 Ø11 5 Ø11 5 Ø11 5 Ø11
25 25 25 25
52 52 52 52

Note: F Datum, circuit breaker or chassis mounting hole.

X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.

F-27
 Integrate in switchboard www.schneider-electric.com

Dimensions
Masterpact MTZ1 Fixed 3/4-pole devices

Connections
Front connection via vertical connection adapters Details
oriented to the rear
116.5 70 70 70
15

DB419648.eps
DB419647.eps
DB419706.eps

21 221

X
472
N
Y
21 221

89 12.5 [1] 2
 connection possibilities
on vertical connection
25 15

DB419649.eps
adapters (21 mm between
190.5 centers).
253 21 [1]
101
F 21
3 Ø11

15 20

Front connection via vertical connection adapters fitted

with cable-lug adapters oriented to the rear Details
221 15 70 70 70
15
DB419650.eps

DB419651.eps
DB419707.eps

50

F 271
21 221

X
572 N
Notes: R
 ecommended connection
screws: M10 Class 8.8. Y
Tightening torque: 50 Nm with 21 221 184
contact washer. 271 17 50 50 50
DB419652.eps

50 80 50

340.5 15
5 Ø13 5 Ø11
357.5
F

Spacers (kit 04691)

Spacers must be mounted
DB425322.eps
DB425321.eps

between the cable lug

adapters to withstand the
electrodynamic stresses in
the event of a short-circuit.

F-28
 www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in switchboard
Dimensions
Masterpact MTZ1 Fixed 3/4-pole devices

Connections
Front connection via vertical connection adapters Details
oriented to the front
47.5 70 70 70
15

DB425331.eps
DB425330.eps
DB419706.eps

21
221
N
X
472 Y
221
Notes: For this connection the arc chute 89 12.5 [1] 2
 connection possibilities
screen is mandatory. 21 on vertical connection
25 15

DB419649.eps
adapters (21 mm between
centers).
21 [1]
101
42 157.5 21
3 Ø11
184
F 15 20

Front connection via vertical connection adapters fitted

with cable-lug adapters oriented to the front Details
A 47.5 70 70 70
y 65 15
DB425333.eps

DB425332.eps
DB419707.eps

F
21 N
221
Y
X
Notes: 522 184
b For this connection the arc chute 221 17 50 50 50
DB419652.eps

screen is mandatory.
b Third party cable-lug adapters 21
mounted on front-facing vertical
connection adapters above arc 80 50
chutes must not exceed the maximum 271
distance A. 50
b Recommended connection screws: 5 Ø13 5 Ø11
M10 Class 8.8.
Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact 42 157.5
washer. 174.5
F

Spacers (kit 04691)

Spacers must be mounted
DB425323.eps

between the cable lug

adapters to withstand the
DB425324.eps

electrodynamic stresses in
the event of a short-circuit.

F-29
 Integrate in switchboard www.schneider-electric.com

Dimensions
Masterpact MTZ1 Drawout 3/4-pole devices

Dimensions

127.5 (3P) Safety clearances

u 210 197.5 (4P) 160.5
B B

DB419610.eps
DB419609.eps

DB419616.eps

DB419617.eps
46 [1] 188 37 A C C

94

199
322
X 250 X
209
40
5 123 180
F

u 60 Insulated Metal Energized

248 parts parts parts
288 (3P)
291 358 (4P) A 0 0 30
Y B 10 10 60
C 0 0 30

Mounting on base plate or rails Mounting detail

4 Ø6.5
DB419612.eps

DB419613.eps
DB419611.eps

6 Ø6.5

25 100 150 X
X
50

F 90 (3P)
160 (4P)
90
F

24 25 180 (3P) 109 (3P) 109

100 250 (4P) 179 (4P)
218 (3P)
216 Y 288 (4P)
231 Y
F

Door cutout without escutcheon Door cutout with escutcheon Rear panel cutout
u 170 (3P) u 170 (3P)
DB425320.eps

u 230 u 230
DB419614.eps

DB419615.eps

u 240 (4P) u 240 (4P)

259 303 234

X X X

109 130.8 117

102.5 (3P)
102.5 172.5 (4P)
18 45 183
205 (3P)
98 98 307 275 (4P)
Y Y Y

[1] Disconnected position.

Note: F Datum, circuit breaker or chassis mounting hole.
X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.

F-30
 www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in switchboard
Dimensions
Masterpact MTZ1 Drawout 3/4-pole devices

Connections
Horizontal rear connection Details
70 70 70
49

DB419619.eps
DB419618.eps
DB419597.eps

114
15 67.5
X
N
15 67.5 Y
114

267.5 44
25 9.5 12.5

DB419600.eps
F

60
12.5

2 Ø11

Vertical rear connection Details

70 70 70
49 15
DB419621.eps
DB419620.eps
DB419601.eps

97
X

97 N
Y

267.5
60
F
12.5
DB421343.eps

F
12.5 9.5

25 44

2 11

Front connection Details

15 12.5 70 70 70
DB419622.eps

DB419624.eps

DB419625.eps

171 N
336 Y
X

140
DB419623.eps

Top connection Bottom connection

235 12.5
44 37.9 9.5
F
9.5 25
DB419626.eps

DB419627.eps

2 Ø11
26
100
52
83
131
2 Ø11
26 25
9.5
44
Notes: Recommended connection screws: M10 Class 8.8. 37.9 9.5
Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.

F-31
 Integrate in switchboard www.schneider-electric.com

Dimensions
Masterpact MTZ1 Drawout 3/4-pole devices

Connections
Front connection with spreaders Details
95 95
DB419636.eps

70 70

DB419654.eps
DB419653.eps

238
223

X
Y

207
DB419635.eps

192 95 95 95
12.5 12.5

DB419655.eps
70 70 70

250
F

N
Y

Spreader detail
Middle left or middle right Middle spreader for 3P Left or right spreader for 4P Left or right spreader for 3P
spreader for 4P
77 77 77 77
DB419643.eps

DB419644.eps

DB419645.eps

DB419646.eps
38.5 38.5 38.5 38.5
13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5
25 = = 25 25 25

30 30 30 30
82 52 82 52 82 52 82 52
F 15
5 Ø11
15
5 Ø11
15
5 Ø11
15
5 Ø11
25 25 25 25
52 52 52 52

Note: F Datum, circuit breaker or chassis mounting hole.

X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.

F-32
 www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in switchboard
Dimensions
Masterpact MTZ1 Drawout 3/4-pole devices

Connections
Vertical connection adapters fitted
with cable-lug adapters oriented to the front Details
15 70 70 70
15

DB419657.eps
DB419656.eps
DB419707.eps

50

71

21 292

171
N Y
X
583
Notes:
Recommended connection screws: 140
184
M10 Class 8.8. 21
Tightening torque: 50 Nm 261 17 50 50 50

DB419652.eps
with contact washer.
71

50 80 50

193.5 15 5 Ø13 5 Ø11

F

Spacers (kit 04691)

Spacers must be mounted
DB425323.eps

between the cable lug adapters

to withstand the electrodynamic
DB425324.eps

stresses in the event of a

short-circuit.

F
Vertical connection adapters fitted
with cable-lug adapters oriented to the rear Details
15 70 70 70
15
DB425326.eps
DB425325.eps
DB419707.eps

50

71

21 292

171
Notes:
Recommended connection screws: X
M10 Class 8.8. 583 N Y
Tightening torque: 50 Nm
with contact washer. 140
184
21
261 17 50 50 50
DB419652.eps

71

50 80 50

17 261.5 167 15 5 Ø13 5 Ø11

F

Spacers (kit 04691)

Spacers must be mounted
DB425322.eps
DB425321.eps

between the cable lug adapters

to withstand the electrodynamic
stresses in the event of a
short-circuit.

F-33
 Integrate in switchboard www.schneider-electric.com

Dimensions
Masterpact MTZ2 08 to MTZ2 32 Fixed 3/4-pole devices

Dimensions
189 (3P)
304 (4P) 189
DB418642.eps

DB418643.eps
191
150
352
X X
260

161

7 60 233 308
300 211 (3P) 211
326 (4P)
422 (3P)
537 (4P)

Mounting on base plate or rails Mounting detail

2 Ø9.5
25
DB418645.eps
DB418644.eps

124
X 162

F
4 Ø9.5
F 200 (3P)
315 (4P) 200
75 38
15 mini 162 400 (3P)
60 maxi 515 (4P)
218.5
F
Y

Door cutout Safety clearances

u 295 (3P)
u 295 A[3] B A[3] B
u 410 (4P)
DB418646.eps

DB418647.eps

270 [1]
316 [2] O I

X
DB418648.eps

135 [1]
158 [2]

15 205
162.5 [1] F
182 [2]
325 [1]
364 [2]

[1] Without escutcheon. Insulated Metal Energized

[2] With escutcheon. parts parts parts
[3] An overhead clearance of 110 mm is required to remove
A 0 0 100
the arc chutes.
An overhead clearance of 20 mm is required to remove the B 0 0 60
terminal block.
Note: F Datum, circuit breaker or chassis mounting hole.
X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.

F-34
 www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in switchboard
Dimensions
Masterpact MTZ2 08 to MTZ2 32 Fixed 3/4-pole devices

Connections
Horizontal rear connection Details
27 115 115 115

DB418683.eps

DB418651.eps
DB418711.eps

20
20 150
X

93
N
161 Y

20
47
75 233.5
12.5

DB418623.eps
F

25
76
25

3 Ø11.5 13

Vertical rear connection Details

27 115 115 115
20
DB418686.eps
DB418654.eps
DB418712.eps

68
X

141
N
Y
F
75 233.5 47
12.5
DB418623.eps

25
76
25

3 Ø11.5 13

Front connection Details

20 115 115 115
12.5
DB418658.eps
DB418657.eps
DB418656.eps

230.5
N
Y
475
X

Top connection Bottom connection

219.5 76
25 25 13
DB419628.eps

DB419629.eps

159
12.5
219 12.5 3 Ø11.5
3 Ø11.5
F 12.5
242.5

Note: Recommended connection screws: M10 Class 8.8. 25 25 13

Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer. 76

F-35
 Integrate in switchboard www.schneider-electric.com

Dimensions
Masterpact MTZ2 08 to MTZ2 32 Drawout 3/4-pole devices

Dimensions

u 400 Safety clearances

DB418660.eps
DB418652.eps

66.5 [1]
308
A

DB418664.eps
238.5 Ø5
a
Ø5 Ø8
a
Ø8

439 X 260 X

200.5

128 38.5
B B
220.5 (3P) 220.5
383 335.5 (4P)
u 60 441 (3P) Insulated Metal Energized
403
556 (4P) parts parts parts
Y A 0 0 0
B 0 0 60
The safety clearances take into account the
space required to remove the arc chutes.

Mounting on base plate or rails Mounting detail

DB421274.eps
DB418662.eps
DB418661.eps

F
Ø11.5
Ø11.5 175
100
X x10 Ø10.5
See
F view A
100
103

View A
167.5 (3P) 162.5
282.5 (4P) F
330 (3P)
103 175 445 (4P)
283.5 Y
F

Door cutout without escutcheon Door cutout with escutcheon

u 300 (3P) u 300 (3P)
u 300 u 300
u 415 (4P) u 415 (4P)
DB418665.eps

DB418666.eps

270
X X
379
135 153.3 222

162.5 47 182
325 364

Y Y

[1] Disconnected position.

Note: F Datum, circuit breaker or chassis mounting hole.
X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.

F-36
 www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in switchboard
Dimensions
Masterpact MTZ2 08 to MTZ2 32 Drawout 3/4-pole devices

Connections
Horizontal rear connection Details
115 115 115
27

DB418668.eps
DB418667.eps
DB418711.eps

20
20
X
93 296
N
184
Y
20

100 298.5 12.5 25 25 13

DB421344.eps
F
47
3 Ø11.5
76

Vertical rear connection Details

27 115 115 115
20
DB418682.eps
DB418670.eps
DB418712.eps

68 X

141
N
Y

100
F
298.5 47
12.5
F
DB418623.eps

25
76
25

3 Ø11.5 13

Front connection Details

20 115 115 115
12.5
DB418673.eps

DB418674.eps
DB418672.eps

151
X
N
400
Y
224

Top connection Bottom connection

25 25 13
100 284 12.5
DB418659.eps

DB421345.eps

F
12.5
3 Ø11.5 180

180 3 Ø11.5
12.5

25 25 13

Note: Recommended connection screws: M10 Class 8.8.

Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.

F-37
 Integrate in switchboard www.schneider-electric.com

Dimensions
Masterpact MTZ2 40 Fixed 3/4-pole devices

Dimensions
189 (3P)
304 (4P) 189

DB418643.eps
DB418642.eps

191
150
352
X X
260

161

7 60 233 308
300 211 (3P) 211
326 (4P)
422 (3P)
537 (4P)

Mounting on base plate or rails Mounting detail

2 Ø9.5
25
DB418645.eps
DB418644.eps

124
X 162

F
4 Ø9.5

F 75 38
200 (3P)
315 (4P) 200
15 mini 162 400 (3P)
60 maxi 515 (4P)
218.5
F Y

Door cutout Safety clearances

u 295 (3P)
u 295 A[3] B A[3] B
u 410 (4P)
DB418648.eps

DB418646.eps

DB418647.eps

270 [1]
316 [2] O I

135 [1]
158 [2]

15 205
162.5 [1] F
182 [2]
325 [1]
364 [2]

[1] Without escutcheon. Insulated Metal Energized

[2] With escutcheon. parts parts parts
[3] An overhead clearance of 110 mm is required to remove
A 0 0 100
the arc chutes.
An overhead clearance of 20 mm is required to remove B 0 0 60
the terminal block.
Note: F Datum, circuit breaker or chassis mounting hole.
X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.

F-38
 www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in switchboard
Dimensions
Masterpact MTZ2 40 Fixed 3/4-pole devices

Connections
Horizontal rear connection
27
DB418683.eps
DB418675.eps

20
20 150
X

93
161

20

75 233.5
F

Details
150 150 150 25 25 25 47.5
14.5
115 115 115
DB430746.eps

DB418678.eps
52.5 17.5 17.5 52.5 47
182.5 (3P) 12.5

4 Ø11.5 135

25 25 25 12.5
14.5
DB418679.eps

N
332.5 (4P) 217.5 47
12.5
Y 4 Ø11.5 100
F
Vertical rear connection
27
DB418680.eps

DB418685.eps

117.5
X

190.5

75 233.5
F

Details
115 115 115 47
20 35 12.5
DB418686.eps

DB418630.eps

25
20
=
=
125
=
=
N
Y
Note: Recommended connection screws: M10 stainless steel A4-80. 5 Ø11.5 12.5
Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer. 14.5
For 4000 A and above standard steel screws can generate additional
temperature rise at connection point.

F-39
 Integrate in switchboard www.schneider-electric.com

Dimensions
Masterpact MTZ2 40 Drawout 3/4-pole devices

Dimensions

u 400 Safety clearances

DB418660.eps
DB418652.eps

66.5 [1]
308
A

DB418664.eps
238.5
Ø5
a
Ø8 Ø5
a
Ø8

439 X 260 X

200.5

128 38.5

220.5 (3P) B B
383 220.5
335.5 (4P)
u 60 441 (3P)
403 Insulated Metal Energized
556 (4P)
parts parts parts
Y A 0 0 0
B 0 0 60
The safety clearances take into account the
space required to remove the arc chutes.

Mounting on base plate or rails Mounting detail

DB421274.eps
DB418662.eps
DB418661.eps

F
Ø11.5
Ø11.5 175
100
X x10 Ø10.5

F See
view A
100
103

View A
167.5 (3P) 162.5
282.5 (4P) F
330 (3P)
103 175 445 (4P)
283.5 Y
F

Door cutout without escutcheon Door cutout with escutcheon

u 300 (3P) u 300 (3P)
u 300 u 300
u 415 (4P) u 415 (4P)
DB418665.eps

DB418666.eps

270 [2]
379 [3]
X X
135 [2] 379
222 [3] 153.3 [2] 222

162.5 [2] 47 [2] 182

182 [3]
325 [2] 364
364 [3]
Y Y

[1] Disconnected position.

Note: F Datum, circuit breaker or chassis mounting hole.
X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.

F-40
 www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in switchboard
Dimensions
Masterpact MTZ2 40 Drawout 3/4-pole devices

Connections
Horizontal rear connection

27
DB418675.eps

DB418676.eps

20
20
X
93 296
184
20

100 298.5
F

Details
150 150 150 25 25 25 47.5
14.5
115 115 115
DB430745.eps

DB418678.eps
52.5 17.5 17.5 52.5 47
12.5
182.5 (3P)
4 Ø11.5 135

N 25 25 25 12.5
14.5
332.5 (4P) 217.5
DB418679.eps

Y 12.5
47
F
4 Ø11.5 100

Vertical rear connection Details

47
27 35 12.5
DB418630.eps
DB418681.eps
DB418680.eps

25
20
117.5 =
X =
125
=
190.5
=

5 Ø11.5 12.5
100 298.5 14.5
F

115 115 115

20
DB418682.eps

N
Y
Note: Recommended connection screws: M10 stainless steel A4-80.
Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.
For 4000 A and above standard steel screws can generate additional
temperature rise at connection point.

F-41
 Integrate in switchboard www.schneider-electric.com

Dimensions
Masterpact MTZ3 Fixed 3/4-pole devices

Dimensions
533 (3P) 189
763 (4P)
DB418642.eps

DB418687.eps
191
150
352
X X
260

161

7 60 233 308
556 (3P) 211
300 786 (4P)
767 (3P)
997 (4P)
Y

Mounting on base plate or rails Mounting detail

2 Ø9.5
25
DB418688.eps
DB418644.eps

124
X 162

F
4 Ø9.5
545 (3P)
775 (4P) 200

F 15 mini
60 maxi
75 38
162
218.5
Y

Door cutout Safety clearances

u 639 (3P) A[3] B A[3] B
u 295
u 839 (4P)
DB418646.eps

DB418689.eps
DB418690.eps

270 [1]
316 [2]
X

135 [1]
158 [2]

15 205
F
162.5 [1]
182 [2]
325 [1]
364 [2]

[1] Without escutcheon. Insulated Metal Energized

[2] With escutcheon. parts parts parts
[3] An overhead clearance of 110 mm is required to remove the
A 0 0 100
arc chutes.
An overhead clearance of 20 mm is required to remove the B 0 0 60
terminal block.
Note: F Datum, circuit breaker or chassis mounting hole.
X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.

F-42
 www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in switchboard
Dimensions
Masterpact MTZ3 Fixed 3/4-pole devices

Connections
Horizontal rear connection Details
47 115 115 115 115 115 115 115

DB418694.eps
DB418692.eps

DB418697.eps
20
20 150

X N
Y
20 93
161
12.5 25 25 13

DB421344.eps
47
75 253.5
3 Ø11.5
F
76

Vertical rear connection Details

47 115 115 115 115 115 115 115
20
DB418698.eps
DB418695.eps
DB418691.eps

68
X
N
141 Y

47
12.5
F
DB418623.eps

75 253.5
F
25
76
25

3 Ø11.5 13

Front connection Details

47 115 115 115 115 115 115 115
20
DB418698.eps
DB418696.eps
DB418693.eps

117.5
X
N
Y
190.5
47
35 12.5
DB418630.eps

25
75 253.5 20
F =
=
125
=
=

5 Ø11.5 12.5
14.5
Note: Recommended connection screws: M10 stainless steel A4-80.
Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.
For 4000 A and above standard steel screws can generate additional
temperature rise at connection point.

F-43
 Integrate in switchboard www.schneider-electric.com

Dimensions
Masterpact MTZ3 Drawout 3/4-pole devices

Dimensions
u 400
66.5 [1]

DB425367.eps
308
DB418613.eps

238.5
Ø5
a
Ø8

439 X 479 X
260

200.5
128
38.5
40

u 60 383.5 565.5 (3P) 220.5

795.5 (4P)
403 786 (3P)
1016 (4P)
Y

Mounting on base plate or rails Mounting detail

DB421280.eps
F
DB418616.eps
DB418615.eps

6 Ø11x23
250
X 50
See
view A F 53

View A

F 151 (3P)
162.5 (4P)
50

53 250 325 (3P) 174 (3P)

450 (4P) 287.5 (4P)
333
Y
F

Door cutout Door cutout

Safety clearances without escutcheon with escutcheon
u 646(3P) u 646 (3P)
A u 876(4P) u 300 u 300
u 876 (4P)
DB425327.eps

DB425328.eps

DB425329.eps

Ø5
a
Ø8

270
X X
379
135 153.3 222

162.5 47 182
B B
325 364

Y Y
[1] Disconnected position.
Insulated Metal Energized
parts parts parts The safety clearances take into account the space required to remove the arc chutes.
A 0 0 0 Note: F Datum, circuit breaker or chassis mounting hole.
X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.
B 0 0 60

F-44
 www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in switchboard
Dimensions
Masterpact MTZ3 Drawout 3/4-pole devices

Connections
Horizontal rear connection (MTZ3 40 to 50) Details
115 115 115 115 115 115 115
27

DB418622.eps
DB418711.eps

DB418621.eps

20
20
296 X

93 N
184 Y
20
47
12.5

DB418623.eps
50 348.5
F 25
76
25

3 Ø11.5 13

Vertical rear connection (MTZ3 40 to 50) Details

115 115 115 115 115 115 115
27 20
DB418626.eps
DB418625.eps
DB418712.eps

68 X

141
N
Y
47 F
12.5
DB418623.eps

50 348.5
F
25
76
25

3 Ø11.5 13

Vertical rear connection (MTZ3 63) Details

115 115 115 115 115 115 115
27 20
DB418629.eps
DB418628.eps
DB418713.eps

117.5
X

190.5 N
Y
47
35 12.5
DB418630.eps

50 348.5
25
F 20
=
=
125
=
=

5 Ø11.5 12.5
Note: Recommended connection screws: M10 stainless steel A4-80. 14.5
Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.
For 4000 A and above standard steel screws can generate additional
temperature rise at connection point.

F-45
 Integrate in switchboard www.schneider-electric.com

Dimensions
Accessories

Mounting on backplate with special brackets (Masterpact MTZ2 08 to 32 fixed)

429 (3P)
544 (4P) 384 (3P)
407 (3P)
DB421461.ai

499 (4P)

DB421463.ai
DB421462.ai
522 (4P)
203.5 192

4 Ø12
287
X X X

159
113 96 125 161 180

218.5 4.5 200 F

F F 200
Y
Y

Front-connection adapter (Masterpact MTZ2 08 to 32 fixed)

Horizontal rear connection Detail
67 115 115 115
DB421464.ai

20
DB421466.ai

DB421467.ai

183

N
X Y

F 12.5 25 25 13
DB421465.ai

172
DB421344.eps

47
3 Ø11.5
76
253.5 20

Disconnectable front-connection adapter (Masterpact MTZ2 08 to 32 fixed)

Vertical rear connection Detail
67 115 115 115
DB421468.ai

20
DB421470.ai

DB421471.ai

231

X
N
Y
DB421469.ai

47
220
12.5
DB418623.eps

25
253.5 76
25
F

3 Ø11.5 13
Note: Recommended connection screws: M10 Class 8.8.
Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer.
F Datum, circuit breaker or chassis mounting hole.
X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.

F-46
 www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in switchboard
Dimensions
Accessories

Rear panel cutout (drawout devices)

MTZ1 MTZ2 08 to MTZ2 40
Rear view Rear view
DB421475.eps

DB421476.ai

DB421477.ai

DB421478.ai
234 X X X
X

117 302
187

216
102.5 (3P)
102.5 172.5 (4P) F 200.5 (3P)
200.5 264
205 (3P) 315.5 (4P)
275 (4P) 403 (3P) F
518 (4P)
Y
Y

MTZ3 40 to MTZ3 63
Rear view
DB421479.ai

DB421480.ai

X X
297
182

545.5 (3P)
200.5 775.5 (4P) 314
746 (3P) F
976 (4P)
Y
F
Escutcheon
Masterpact MTZ1
Fixed device Drawout device
DB421481.ai

DB421482.ai

275 313
X
X
27
27

27
27 13 27
253
317
Y
Y

Masterpact MTZ2/MTZ3
Fixed device Drawout device
DB421484.ai
DB421483.ai

324
X X
387

25 18

45
25
372
25 25
Y 372

F Datum, circuit breaker or chassis mounting hole. Y

X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.
F-47
 Integrate in switchboard www.schneider-electric.com

Dimensions
External modules

Connection of auxiliary wiring to terminal block

S : 0.6 mm²
DB421994.ai

DB421995.ai
S : 2.5 mm²

8
Ø 3.5 max.

Ø 3.5

One conductor only per connection point.

External power supply module (AD) Battery module (BAT)

2 Ø4 2 Ø6
DB421996.ai

DB421997.ai

60

82
61

90
73
G4
G3 N
L

ply
er sup
Pow
AC /DC
444
LVA454 /240V
t: 200
Inpu
0.25A Output
50/60Hz DC
ut: 24V
Outp
1A

F
ge
volta C4)
Overlevel (OV
High

112
75
67.5 108

RIM Delay unit for MN voltage release

2 Ø4.2
DB421999.ai

DB421998.ai

57

60 Hz
41mA
max 90
max
120
V 6mA

66
24 V

OUT
ZSI
ule ZSI
IN
8892 Mod ZSI eam
LV84 terfaceterfacez ZSI Upstr
ZSI In in
ule d’ interfa st strea
m
Modulo de -to-te Down
Mód Push

S1
CB Acc. 2H4
Ctrl. No.5

58 100

81 45 73

46
73.5
72

F-48
 www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in switchboard
Dimensions
External modules

IFE - Ethernet interface IFM - Modbus Interface

29
DB423000_1.ai

DB430555.ai
C
24VD

ETH2
109
105
2
ETH
ETH1
1
ETH

90
84.8
set)
45
45
(fac tory
.YY.ZZ
IFE-XX
IFE
liln’X
Ener

66
71 73
72 18

I/O (Input/Output) application module

DB423001.ai

I6
C
I5
I4
C
I3

115
I2
C
I1
+
DC
24V

84.8
A1

I1
I2
O1
O2
O3
45
I3
APP
I4
I5
I6

63
LV4340

IO
T2
O3 T1
34
O2 33
24
O1 23
14
13

71
72

F
Com’X 200 - Com’X 210 - Com’X 510
DB423002.ai

0V
POWE
R
85 106
100-23 R
POWE

PO WER 45

200
Com’X

144
69

F-49
 Integrate in switchboard www.schneider-electric.com

Dimensions
External modules

External sensor for source ground return (SGR) protection

Sensor “MGDF summer” module
DB423003.ai

DB423004.ai
90
200
45
130

59 106

45 76
150

FDM128
DB423005.ai

100

100
100
+0

Ø 22.5 -0,30

100

F
39

100
1.5...6
30.6

129

+0

30 -0,20

17.5
163

F-50
 www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in switchboard
Dimensions
External modules

External sensor for external neutral

400/1600 A 400/2000 A 1000/4000 A
(MTZ1 06 to MTZ1 16) (MTZ2 08 to MTZ2 20) (MTZ2 25 to MTZ2 40)
DB423040.ai

DB423042.ai

DB423044.ai
4 Ø14.5x24 4 Ø14 8 Ø14.5
DB423041.ai

DB423043.ai

DB423045.ai
76.2
35 98 44.5 44.5
102 127

176.5
208 177
44.5 174 44.5
206
295

4000/6300 A 2000/6300 A 2000/6300 A

(MTZ3 40 to MTZ3 63) (MTZ2 to MTZ3) (MTZ2 to MTZ3)
single sensor kit 3 layer bus

F
DB423085.ai

DB423087.ai
DB423046.ai

16 Ø14.5 8 Ø14
DB423088.ai
DB423047.ai

DB423086.ai

44.5 44.5 25.4

127 127 98
11

11
44.5 174 44.5 127
127 295
44.5

44.5 174 44.5

295

F-51
 Integrate in switchboard www.schneider-electric.com

Dimensions
External modules

Rectangular sensor for earth leakage protection (Vigi)

280 x 115 mm window
4 Ø9
DB423032.ai

DB423033.ai
197 233
115 216

280 71
362
381

470 x 160 mm window

8 Ø9
DB423034.ai

DB423035.ai

281
146 242
160 263

456 72
470

F 552
572

Busbars I y 1600 A I y 3200

Window (mm) 280 x 115 470 x 160
Weight (kg) 14 18

Busbars path
280 x 115 mm window 470 x 160 mm window
Busbars spaced 70 mm center-to-center Busbars spaced 115 mm center-to-center
DB423036.ai

DB423038.ai

2 bars 50 x 10.
4 bars 100 x 5.
DB423037.ai

DB423039.ai

2 bars 100 x 5.
4 bars 125 x 5.

F-52
 www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in switchboard
Installation
Clusters

Clusters
Table : number of clusters required for the different chassis models
DB403280_1.eps

Chassis Masterpact MTZ1

rating (A) 3P 4P
630 12 18
800 12 18
1000 12 18
1250 12 18
1600 18 24
Note: the minimum order is 6 parts.

Table : number of clusters required for the different chassis models

Chassis Masterpact MTZ2-3 3P Masterpact MTZ2-3 4P
rating (A) N1, H1, H10, H2, H3 L1 N1, H1, H10, H2, H3 L1
NA HA HA10 HF NA HA HA10 HF
MTZ2 08 to 16 12 12 12 24 24 16 16 16 32 32
MTZ2 20 24 24 24 24 24 42 32 32 32 32 32 56
MTZ2 25 24 24 24 24 32 32 32 32
MTZ2 32 36 36 36 36 48 48 48 48
MTZ2 40 42 42 42 42 56 56 56 56
MTZ3 40 to 50 72 72 96 96
MTZ3 63 72 72 96 96
Note: the minimum order is 6 parts.

F-53
 Integrate in switchboard www.schneider-electric.com

Electrical diagrams
Masterpact MTZ1 Fixed and drawout devices

The diagram is shown with circuits de-energised, all devices open, connected and charged and relays in normal
position.

Power Control unit Indication contacts

Micrologic X Control Unit
Power
DB421182.ai

DB421183.ai
Disengage
Upstream cb Downstream cb

Engaged
N L1 L2 L3

Engage
Open Closed
Z1
Z2
Z3

Z4
21

Connection for PTE option 22

AF1
AF2
AF3

484

474
474

484

42
44

32
34
22
24
12
14
VN
V1
V2
V3
Z1
Z2
Z3

[3] Z4

I OF4 OF3 OF2

S1 S2
Micrologic X Control Unit
U
M2C ESM

or

Rectangular Sensor [1]

471

471

41

31

21

11
F1‒

F2+
M1
M2
M3

T1
T2
T5
T6

or
SGR Sensor [1]
1 12 5 6 7
Neutral 3 24 V DC
MDGF

F
external
Note:
sensor
for MDGF module:
b Use terminal 5 for MTZ1 and MTZ2.
Remote operation b Use terminal 6 for MTZ3.

Basic coils Diagnostic & communicating coils

DB421184.ai

Charged (+)
to-close

(+) (+) (+) (+) (+)

Ready-
Fault

AT BPF AT
BPF
BPO BPO
C12

C12
C13

252
254
182

184

B3
B2
C2

C2
C3
K2

A2

A2
A3
82

84

D2

D2

or
MCH
MN MX MX XF MN MX MX XF
SDE1 diag diag&com diag&com diag&com
SDE2 PF CH

Res or [2] or [2]

or

(-) (-) (-) (-) (-) (-) (-)

B1
181

K1

81

D1

C11

C1

A1

D1

C11

C1

A1

251

Note: M aximum length of the two wires cables between A2-A3 / C2-C3 / C12-C13: 5 m.
The maximum lengths of the wiring between the AC/DC power supply and voltage release terminals A1-A3 / C1-C3 / C11-C13 /D1-D2 are given page
D-18.
[1] Rectangular sensor or SGR sensor.
[2] Possibility to add a second MX/MX diag&com or a MN/MN diag voltage release.The second MX diag&com voltage release can only be installed after the
delivery of the circuit breaker. this is an after sales adaptation.
[3] F
 or 3 poles Masterpact MTZ circuit breaker in power system with neutral distributed, the neutral shall be connected to the VN terminal of Micrologic X
and ENVT configured to "Yes" to ensure the quality of power measurement.

F-54
 www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in switchboard
Electrical diagrams
Masterpact MTZ1 Fixed and drawout devices

Terminal block marking

CE3 CE2 Com UC1 UC2 SDE2 UC4 UC3 SDE1 MN MX XF PF MCH

334 324 F2+ T6 M1 M2 M3/T1/T5 184 V3 84 D2 C2 A2 254 B2

F2+ F1- ULP
332 322 [1] or Z3 Z4 AF3 T2 182 V2 VN 82 C3 A3 252 B3
F1-
331 321 Z1 Z2 AF1 AF2 181 V1 81 D1 C1 A1 251 B1
or or or
Res M2C / 2nd MX
ESM

K2 484 C12

474 C13

K1 471 C11

OF4 OF3 OF2 OF1 CD2 CD1 CE1 CT1 Control unit terminal block
Com : Fixed, F2+ F1- (as standard) or ULP port (as option)
44 34 24 14 824 814 314 914 Drawout, F2+ F1- (as standard) or ULP port (as option)

42 32 22 12 822 812 312 912 UC1 : Z1-Z4 zone selective interlocking

M1 = rectangular sensor (Micrologic 7.0 X) or MDGF module input
41 31 21 11 821 811 311 911
or UC2 : T1, T2 = neutral external sensors
EIFE M2, M3 = rectangular sensor (Micrologic 7.0 X) or MDGF module
input
UC3 : Voltage connector (must be connected to the neutral with a 3P
circuit breaker)
Indication contacts terminal block UC4 : External Voltage Connector (PTE option)
OF4 / OF3 / OF2 / OF1 : ON/OFF indication contacts OF or
M2C : 2 programmable contacts (external relay) F
Chassis contacts terminal block or
CD2 / CD1: disconnected position contacts ESM : ERMS switch module
CE3 /CE2 / CE1: connected position contacts
CT1: test position contacts Remote operation terminal block
SDE2: fault-trip indication contact
DB421185.ai

Connected Disconnected Test

or
Res: remote reset
822
824
812
814
332
334
322

324

312

314

914
912

SDE1: 
fault-trip indication contact
(supplied as standard)
CT1 MN /MN diag: undervoltage release standard or diagnostic
CE3 CE2 CD2 CD1 CE1 or
2 MX/MX diag&com: opening voltage release standard
nd

or diagnostic & communicating

331

321

311
821

811

911

MX/MX diag&com:  pening voltage release standard

o
or diagnostic

XF/XF diag&com: closing voltage release standard

DB421455.ai

9 11
or diagnostic & communicating
"Spring charged"
light 440/480 V R PF: ready-to-close contact
B3 B2
MCH: electric motor

Note: when communicating MX diag&com or XF diag&com voltage releases are

used, the third wire (C3,A3, C13) must be connected.
MCH
Drawout device only.
CH SDE1, OF1, OF2, OF3, OF4 supplied as standard.
interconnected connections (only one wire per connection point).
B1
[1] The connection of the +/- of the power supply either on terminals F1/F2 of
Micrologic X or on the +/- terminals of the ULP port must be strictly respected.
Spring charging motor 440/480 V AC
Crossing the polarities may damage the device.
(380 V motor + additional resistor)

F-55
 Integrate in switchboard www.schneider-electric.com

Electrical diagrams
Masterpact MTZ2/MTZ3 Fixed and drawout devices

The diagram is shown with circuits de-energised, all devices open, connected and charged and relays in normal
position.

Power Control unit

Micrologic X Control Unit
Power
DB421182.ai

Disengage
Upstream cb Downstream cb

Engaged
N L1 L2 L3

Engage
Z1
Z2
Z3

Z4
21

Connection for PTE option 22

AF1
AF2
AF3

484

474
474

484
VN
V1
V2
V3
Z1
Z2
Z3
[3] Z4

I
S1 S2
Micrologic X Control Unit
U
M2C ESM

or

Rectangular Sensor [1]

471

471
F1‒

F2+
M1
M2
M3

T1
T2
T5
T6

or
SGR Sensor [1] Note:
1 12 5 6 7 for MDGF module:
Neutral 3 24 V DC b Use terminal 5 for MTZ1 and MTZ2.
MDGF

F
external b Use terminal 6 for MTZ3.
sensor

Remote operation
Basic coils Diagnostic & communicating coils
DB421184.ai

Charged (+)
to-close

(+) (+) (+) (+) (+)

Ready-
Fault

AT BPF AT
BPF
BPO BPO
C12

C12
C13

252
254
182

184

B3
B2
C2

C2
C3
K2

A2

A2
A3
82

84

D2

D2

or
MCH
MN MX MX XF MN MX MX XF
SDE1 diag diag&com diag&com diag&com
SDE2 PF CH

Res or [2] or [2]

or

(-) (-) (-) (-) (-) (-) (-)

B1
181

K1

81

D1

C11

C1

A1

D1

C11

C1

A1

251

Note: M aximum length of the two wires cables between A2-A3 / C2-C3 / C12-C13: 5 m.
The maximum lengths of the wiring between the AC/DC power supply and voltage terminals A1-A3 / C1-C3 / C11-C13 /D1-D2 are given page D-18.
[1] Rectangular sensor or SGR sensor.
[2] Possibility to add a second MX/MX diag&com or a MN/MN diag voltage release.The second MX diag&com voltage release can only be installed after the
delivery of the circuit breaker. this is an after sale adaptation.
[3] F
 or 3 poles Masterpact MTZ circuit breaker in power system with neutral distributed, the neutral shall be connected to the VN terminal of Micrologic X
and ENVT configured to "Yes" to ensure the quality of power measurement.

F-56
 www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in switchboard
Electrical diagrams
Masterpact MTZ2/MTZ3 Fixed and drawout devices

Indication contacts Chassis contacts

Db101409.eps

Control unit terminal block Remote operation terminal block

Com : Fixed, F2+ F1- (as standard) or ULP port (as option) SDE2: fault-trip indication contact
Drawout, F2+ F1- (as standard) or ULP port (as or
option) Res: remote reset

UC1 : Z1-Z4 zone selective interlocking SDE1: fault-trip indication contact (supplied as standard)

M1 = rectangular sensor (Micrologic 7.0 X)

MN /MN diag:
or
undervoltage release standard or diagnostic F
or MDGF module input
2ndMX/MX diag&com: opening voltage release standard
or diagnostic & communicating
UC2 : T1, T2 = neutral external sensors
M2, M3 = rectangular sensor (Micrologic 7.0 X) MX/MX diag&com:  pening voltage release standard
o
or MDGF module input or diagnostic

UC3 : Voltage connector (must be connected to the neutral XF/XF diag&com: closing voltage release standard
with a 3P circuit breaker) or diagnostic & communicating

PF: ready-to-close contact

UC4 : External Voltage Connector (PTE option)
MCH: electric motor
M2C : 2 programmable contacts (external relay) Note: when communicating MX com or XF com voltage releases are used, the third wire
or (C3,A3, C13) must be connected.
ESM : ERMS switch module

Indication contacts Chassis contacts

OF4 : ON/OFF indication contacts OF OF24 or ON/OFF indication contacts OF CD3 disconnected CE3 connected CT3 test position
OF3 EF24 or connected/closed contacts EF CD2 position CE2 position CT2 contacts
OF2 OF23 or CD1 contacts CE1 contacts CT1
OF1 EF23
or or or
OF22 or
EF22 CE6 connected CT6 test position CE9 connected
OF21 or CE5 position CT5 contacts CE8 position
EF21 CE4 contacts CT4 CE7 contacts
OF14 or or
EF14 CD6 disconnected
OF13 or CD5 position
EF13 CD4 contacts
OF12 or
EF12
OF11 or
EF11

F-57
 Integrate in switchboard www.schneider-electric.com

Electrical diagrams
Masterpact MTZ2/MTZ3 Fixed and drawout devices

Terminal block marking

M2C /
CD3 CD2 CD1 Com UC1 UC2 SDE2 UC4 UC3 SDE1 CE3 CE2 CE1 MN MX XF PF MCH
ESM

M2 M3/T1/
F2+ T6 M1 T5 184 V3 484 84 D2 C2 A2 254 B2
834 824 814 334 324 314
F2 +
F1- ULP
[1] or Z3 Z4 AF3 T2 182 V2 VN 474 82 C3 A3 252 B3
832 822 812 332 322 312
F1-

831 821 811 Z1 Z2 AF1 AF2 181 V1 471 81 331 321 311 D1 C1 A1 251 B1
or or or or
CE6 CE5 CE4 Res CT6 CT5 CT4 2nd MX

364 354 344 K2 964 954 944 C12

362 352 342 962 952 942 C13

361 351 341 K1 961 951 941 C11

OF24 OF23 OF22 OF21 OF14 OF13 OF12 OF11 OF4 OF3 OF2 OF1 CT3 CT2 CT1

244 234 224 214 144 134 124 114 44 34 24 14 934 924 914

242 232 222 212 142 132 122 112 42 32 22 12 932 922 912

241 231 221 211 141 131 121 111 41 31 21 11 931 921 911
or or or or or or or or or
EF24 EF23 EF22 EF21 EF14 EF13 EF12 EF11 CE9 CE8 CE7

248 238 228 218 148 138 128 118 394 384 374

246 236 226 216 146 136 126 116 392 382 372

F 245 235 225 215 145 135 125 115 391 381 371
or
CD6 CD5 CE4

864 854 844

862 852 842

861 851 841

or
EIFE

Drawout device only.

SDE1, OF1, OF2, OF3, OF4 supplied as standard.
interconnected connections
(only one wire per connection point).
[1] The connection of the +/- of the power supply either on
terminals F1/F2 of Micrologic X or on the +/- terminals of the
ULP port must be strictly respected. Crossing the polarities may
damage the device.

F-58
www.schneider-electric.com

Integrate in special applications

Source-changeover systems

Presentation.............................................................................. G-2
Mechanical interlocking........................................................ G-3
Electrical interlocking IVE unit............................................ G-5
Controller installation............................................................. G-6
Associated controllers........................................................... G-7
BA controller............................................................................. G-8
UA controller............................................................................. G-9

Other chapters
Select your circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors.............................. A-1
Select your Micrologic X control unit........................................................... B-1
Customize your Micrologic X with digital modules......................................C-1
Customize your circuit breaker with accessories........................................D-1
Integrate in Smart panels - Architecture and systems................................ E-1
Integrate in switchboard............................................................................. F-1
Services......................................................................................................H-1
Order your circuit breaker............................................................................ I-1

G-1
 Integrate in special applications - Source-changeover systems www.schneider-electric.com

Presentation

In installations requiring a high level of availability two redundant power supplies are
PB191613-50.eps

generally used. The main supply can at any time be replaced by an emergency
supply in case of power interruption. The replacement source can be an emergency
power generator set or another low voltage network.
In complex low voltage architectures, up to three independent power supplies may
be used to secure the installation. More than three independent sources can even
be used for specific applications.
Changeover systems are required to quickly and safely switch between the power
sources.
There are three ways to switch between the sources:
bb manually
bb automatically
bb remotely

Manual source-changeover system

or : Manual Transfer Switching Equipment
The simplest way to switch between the power sources. The closing and opening
operations of the circuit breakers or switches are performed by the operators.
The time required to switch between the sources is variable.
System
65587-117.eps

Two or three mechanically interlocked circuit breakers

or switch-disconnectors.
Applications
Small commercial buildings and small and medium industrial activities where the
need for continuity of service is significant but not a priority.

Automatic source-changeover system

or : Automatic Transfer Switching Equipment
A controller is added to automatically control the switching operations. This can be
done using the standard BA, UA controllers and the associated IVE electrical
G interlocking unit. The solution is limited to two circuit breakers or two switch-
disconnectors.
The automatic switching sequence is initiated by detecting the loss of the power
supply. It can also be initiated by the operators.
System
Two mechanically interlocked circuit breakers or switch disconnectors, associated
with one BA or UA controller and the IVE electrical interlocking unit.
Applications
Large infrastructures.
108975.EPS

Remote source-changeover system

or : Remote Transfer Switching Equipment
The circuit breakers or the switch disconnectors can be operated remotely from a
control room. A dedicated programmable logic controller (PLC) controls the
switching operations. The automatic switching sequence is initiated by detecting the
loss of the power supply. It can also be initiated remotely by the operators.
System
Two or three mechanically interlocked circuit breakers or switch disconnectors.
One PLC for the automation controlling the changeover system.
Selector switches to allow the operators to initiate the switching sequence.

G-2
www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in special applications - Source-changeover systems
Mechanical interlocking

Schneider Electric offers source change-over systems based on Masterpact MTZ devices.
They are made of up to 3 circuit breakers or switch-disconnetors linked by an electrical interlocking system that may have
different configurations. Moreover, a mechanical interlocking system must be added to protect against electrical malfunctions
or incorrect manual operations. In addition, a controller can be used to automatically control the source transfer.
The following pages present the different solutions for mechanical and electrical interlocking and associated controllers.

For implementing the mechanical interlocking 2 different possibilities are offered:

PB113431.eps
bb interlocking with rods
bb interlocking with cables

Interlocking of two devices using connecting rods

The two devices must be installed one above the other.
For Masterpact MTZ1, only associations between similar type devices are allowed. It is not possible to associate a
fixed type device with a drawout type. Associations between Masterpact MTZ1 and MTZ2 or MTZ3 are not
possible.
For Masterpact MTZ2 and MTZ3, all mixed associations between fixed type and drawout type devices are possible.
Installation
This function requires:
bb an adaptation fixture on the right side of each circuit breaker or switch-disconnector
bb a set of connecting rods with no-slip adjustments
bb a mechanical operation counter CDM (mandatory)
The adaptation fixtures, connecting rods, circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors are supplied separately, ready
for assembly by the customer.
The maximum vertical distance between the fixing plates is 900 mm.
Interlocking of two
Interlocking of two or three devices using cables Masterpact MTZ1
For cable interlocking, the circuit breakers can be installed either one above the other or side-by-side. or MTZ2 / MTZ3
All mixed associations between Masterpact MTZ1, MTZ2, MTZ3 fixed type and drawout type devices are possible. circuit breakers using
connecting rods
Interlocking between two Masterpact MTZ1, MTZ2, MTZ3 devices
This function requires:
bb an adaptation fixture on the right side of each device
bb a set of cables without slip adjustments
bb a mechanical operation counter CDM (mandatory)
The maximum distance between the fixing planes (vertical or horizontal) is 2000 mm.
Interlocking between three Masterpact MTZ1, MTZ2, MTZ3 devices
This function requires:
bb a specific adaptation fixture installed on the right side of each device
bb two sets of cables without slip adjustments
bb a mechanical operation counter CDM (mandatory)
The maximum distance between the fixing planes (vertical or horizontal) is 1000 mm.
G
Installation
The adaptation fixtures, sets of cables and circuit breakers or switch-disconnectors are supplied separately, ready
for assembly by the customer. PB113432.eps

Installation conditions for cable interlocking systems:

bb cable length: 2.5 m
bb cable bending radius: greater than 100 mm
bb maximum number of curves: 3.
Note: for cable length higher than 2.5 m please consult us before ordering the circuit breakers for a customised solution.

Choice criteria
In the applications where the continuity of service is critical(*) (Data Centers, airports, hospitals, marine, oil&gas,
process industry, …) the mechanical interlocking by rods and the drawout version devices is strongly recommended.
Mechanical interlocking by rods is preferred as less energy is consumed by friction, so it has less effect on the
circuit breaker closing energy.
In terms of breaker mounting type, the drawout version is preferred as :
bb it provides mechanical isolation of the circuit breaker from possible external stress on the terminals by having a
flexible connection at the clusters level
bb it allows simple and total access for periodic maintenance
bb it allows quick replacement of the device if necessary.
When not possible, cable interlocking or fixed versions can be used, but the installation rules detailed in the 2
sections below must be strictly respected and mainly: Interlocking of two
bb the busbars or the cables used for the power connections must apply no stress on the circuit breakers terminals. Masterpact circuit
breakers using cables
Their weight must be supported by the switchboard frame.
[1] For more details please contact your local support.
bb Please refer to the “Switchboard integration - Installation rules – Power connection” section in this catalogue as
well as to the Data Bulletin “Installation of Fixed Masterpact NW Circuit Breakers in Electrical Equipment –
Class 0613” available on www.schneider-electric.com for more details.
G-3
 Integrate in special applications - Source-changeover systems www.schneider-electric.com

Mechanical interlocking

Possible association between Masterpact MTZ1,

MTZ2, MTZ3
Key interlocking
Interlocking using keylocks is very simple and makes it possible to interlock two or
more devices that are physically distant or that have very different characteristics.
Interlocking system
Each device is equipped with an identical keylock and the key is captive on the
closed (ON) device. A single key is available for all devices. It is necessary to first
open (OFF position) the device with the key before the key can be withdrawn and
used to close another device.
A system of wall-mounted captive key boxes makes a large number of combinations
possible between many devices.

DB421179.ai

Mechanical interlocking using connecting rods

Masterpact MTZ1:
2 Masterpact MTZ1 fixed type or drawout type. Association between fixed type and
drawout type MTZ1 devices is not possible nor combinations between MTZ1 and
MTZ2 or MTZ3.
Masterpact MTZ2 and MTZ3:
All mixed associations between fixed type and drawout type devices are possible.
DB419861.ai

G Mechanical interlocking by cables

All mixed associations between Masterpact MTZ1, MTZ2, MTZ3 fixed type and
drawout type devices are possible.
Note: 3 devices mechanical interlocking is applicable only to MTZ2 and MTZ3.

Vertical Horizontal
2 devices MTZ1 - MTZ2 - MTZ3
DB419862.ai

DB419864.ai
PB116219_66.eps

3 devices MTZ2 - MTZ3

DB419863.ai

DB419865.ai

G-4
 www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in special applications - Source-changeover systems
Electrical interlocking IVE unit

IVE electrical interlocking unit

PG134060_L50.eps
Electrical interlocking between Masterpact MTZ1,MTZ2, and MTZ3 circuit breakers
can be done using the IVE Electrical interlocking unit or using dedicated wiring. The
IVE unit is suitable for two circuit breakers or two switch-disconnectors only. For
three devices, dedicated wiring is required to perform the electrical interlocking.
Characteristics of the IVE unit
bb external connection terminal block:
vv inputs: status of the SDE contacts on the “N” and “R” source circuit breakers
vv output: circuit breaker control signals
bb two connectors for the two “N” and “R” source circuit breakers:
vv inputs: - Status of the OF contacts on each circuit breaker (ON or OFF) - 1 normal source - 1 replacement source
Status of the SDE contacts on the “N” and “R” source circuit breakers
vv outputs: power supply for operating mechanisms

DB419718.ai
G Qn Qr
bb control voltage: 0 0
vv 24 to 250 V DC UN 1 0
vv 48 to 415 V 50/60 Hz - 440 V 60 Hz. UR
0 1
The IVE unit control voltage must be same as for the circuit breaker operating
mechanisms.
Necessary equipment for Masterpact MTZ1, MTZ2, MTZ3, QN QR
each circuit breaker must be equipped with:
bb a remote-operation system made up of:
vv MCH gear motor
vv MX or MN opening voltage release
vv XF closing voltage release
vv PF ready-to-close contact
vv CDM mechanical operation counter 2 sources with coupler on busbars
bb an available OF contact
Qs1 Qc Qs2
DB419719.ai

bb one to three CE connected-position contacts (carriage switches) on drawout TR1 TR2

circuit breakers (depending on the installation). 0 0 0
1 0 1
1 1 0
DB419709.ai

0 1 1
QS1 QC QS2 1 0 0 [1]
0 0 1 [1]
[1] p
 ossible by forcing
operation G

OF4
44
OF3
34
32
OF2
24
22
OF1

21
14
12
CT3

11
934
932
CT2
924

931
CT1

922
921
914
912
911
2 normal sources - 1 replacement source
OF11 42 31
114 41
OF12 112
124 111
OF13 122
134 121
OF14 132
144 131
OF24 142
214 141
OF22 212
224 211
OF23 222
234 221
OF24 232
244 231
242
241
DB419720.ai

Qn1 Qn2 Qr
MCH
PF B2
254 B3
XF 252 B1

TR1 TR2
MX1 A2 251
C2 A3
MN/MX2 C3 A1
D2/C12
/C13 C1
D1/C11
CE1
CE2 314
324 312
CE3 322 311
334 321
SDE1
84 332
MC2 82 331
UC3 484 81
-VN 474
UC4 471
V3 -
SDE2/Res V2
UC2 184/K2 - V1
M3/T1
T5 182/
UC1M1 M2 AF3
T2
AF2
181/K1
COM - T6 Z4 AF1
- - Z3 Z1
Z2
- F1-
CD1 F2+
CD2 814
824 812
CD3 822 811
834 821
832
831

MN MX1 XF
MX2
PF MCH

G 0 0 0
1 1 0
CT1
914 SDE1
CT2
924 912
MC2
OF1
14
CT3
934
932
922
921
911
SDE2 UC4
UC3
OF2 12 931
24
OF3
34 22
21
11
UC2 /Res
OF4
44 32
31 UC1
COM
OF11 42
114 41
OF12 112
124 111
OF13 122
134 121
OF14 132
144 131
OF24 142
214 141
OF22 212
224 211
OF23 222
234 221
OF24 232
244 231
242
241
MCH
PF B2
254 B3
XF 252 B1
MX1 A2 251
C2 A3
MN/MX2 C3 A1
D2/C12
/C13 C1

0 0 1
D1/C11
CE1
CE2 314
324 312
CE3 322 311
334 321
SDE1
84 332
MC2 82 331
UC3 484 81
-VN 474
UC4 471
V3 -
SDE2/Res V2
UC2 184/K2 - V1
M3/T1
T5 182/
UC1M1 M2 AF3
T2
AF2
181/K1
COM - T6 Z4 AF1
- - Z3 Z1
Z2
- F1-
CD1 F2+
CD2 814
824 812
CD3 822 811
834 821
832
831

1 0 0
pact
MasterHA10
12kV
NW40 Uimp

PF MCH Ui 1250V
MN MX1 XF
V
Ue 1150V 690/1000
50kA/1s
MX2 Ue
Icw 105kA
peak

Icm 50/60Hz NEMA

AS
60947-2 UNE
SDE1 IEC CEI
BS
MC2 UTE
VDE 55°C

SDE2 UC4
UC3 Ith 4000A Ue
Ie
(A)

0 1 0
(V)
UC2 /Res 4000
UC1 1000
COM AC23A 50/60Hz
60947-3 UNE
IEC BS CEI
VDE

QN1 QN2 QR
UTE

Aux
Power VPS

A
In 1000
pact
MasterHA10
12kV
NW40 Uimp
Ui 1250V V
Ue 1150V 690/1000
Ue 50kA/1s
peak
Icw 105kA
Icm 50/60Hz NEMA
AS
60947-2 UNE
IEC CEI
BS
VDE 55°C
UTE
Ie
Ith 4000A Ue
(A)
(V)
4000
1000
AC23A 50/60Hz
60947-3 UNE
IEC BS CEI
VDE
UTE

Aux
Power VPS

A
In 1000

Note: After either manual or fault tripping the manual acknowledgement of the circuit breaker
is required.

G-5
 Integrate in special applications - Source-changeover systems www.schneider-electric.com

Controller installation

ACP control plate

PB100857_SE.eps

The control plate provides in a single unit:

bb protection for the BA or UA controller with two highly limiting P25M circuit breakers
(infinite breaking capacity) for power drawn from the AC source
bb control of circuit breaker ON and OFF functions via two relay contactors
bb connection of the circuit breakers to the BA or UA controller via a built-in terminal
block.

Control voltages
bb 110 V 50/60 Hz.
bb 220 to 240 V 50/60 Hz.
bb 380 to 415 V 50/60 Hz and 440 V 60 Hz.
The same voltage must be used for the ACP control plate, the controller and the
circuit breaker operating mechanisms.
Installation
Connection between the ACP control plate and the IVE unit may use:
bb wiring done by the installer
bb prefabricated wiring (optional)

Installation of the BA and UA controllers

The BA and UA controllers may be installed in one of two manners:
bb directly mounted on the ACP control plate
bb mounted on the front panel of the switchboard
bb if the length of the connection between the controller and the control plate (ACP)
is less than or equal to 1 m, the connecting cable ref. 29368 can be ordered as an
optional extra. Cables longer than 1 m, but not longer than 2 m will be the
responsibility of the installer.
DB419723.ai

Mounting on the ACP control plate

DB419724.ai

Mounting on the front panel of the switchboard

G-6
www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in special applications - Source-changeover systems
Associated controllers

By combining a remote-operated source-changeover system with an integrated BA or UA automatic controller, it is

possible to automatically control source transfer following user-selected sequences. These controllers can be used
on source-changeover systems that include two circuit breakers or switch-disconnectors.
For source-changeover systems that include three circuit breakers, the automatic control diagram must be prepared
by the installer as a complement to diagrams provided in the “electrical diagrams” section of this catalogue.

Controller BA UA
4-position switch

DB403809.eps
Automatic operation
Forced operation on “Normal” source
Forced operation on “Replacement” source
Stop (both “Normal” and “Replacement” sources off)
Automatic operation
Monitoring of the “Normal” source and automatic transfer
Generator set startup control
Delayed shutdown (adjustable) of generator set
Load shedding and reconnection of non-priority circuits
Transfer to the “Replacement” source if one of the phases
of the “Normal” source is absent
Test
By opening the P25M circuit breaker supplying the controller
By pressing the test button on the front of the controller
Indications
Circuit breaker status indication on the front of the controller:

DB403810.eps
on, off, fault trip
Automatic mode indicating contact
Other functions
Selection of type of “Normal” source
(single-phase or three-phase) [1]
Voluntary transfer to “Replacement” source
(for example, energy management commands)
During peak-tariff periods (energy management commands)
forced operation on “Normal” source if “Replacement” source
not operational
Additional contact (not part of controller)
Transfer to “Replacement” source only if contact is closed
(for example, used to test the frequency of UR).
Setting of maximum startup time for the replacement source
Options
Communication option
Power supply
Control voltages [2] 110 V 50/60 Hz
220 to 240 V 50/60 Hz
G
380 to 415 V 50/60 Hz
and 440 V 60 Hz
Operating thresholds
Undervoltage 0.35 Un y voltage y 0.7 Un
Phase failure 0.5 Un y voltage y 0.7 Un
Voltage presence voltage u 0.85 Un
IP degree of protection (EN 60529) and IK degree of protection against
external mechanical impacts (EN 50102)
Front IP40
Side IP30
Connectors IP20
Front IK07
Characteristics of output contacts (dry, volt-free contacts)
Rated thermal current (A) 8
Minimum load 10 mA at 12 V
Position of the Auto/Stop
Output contacts
switch
Load shedding and
reconnection order
Generator set start order
AC DC
Utilisation category (IEC/EN 60947-5-1) AC-12 AC-13 AC-14 AC-15 DC-12 DC-13
Operational current (A) 24 V 8 7 5 5 8 2
48 V 8 7 5 5 2 - [1] For example, 220 V single-phase or 220 V three-phase.
110 V 8 6 4 4 0.6 - [2] The controller is powered by the ACP control plate.
220/240 V 8 6 4 3 - - The same voltage must be used for the ACP plate, the IVE
250 V - - - - 0.4 - unit and the circuit breaker operating mechanisms. If this
380/415 V 5 - - - - - voltage is the same as the source voltage, then the “Normal”
440 V 4 - - - - - and “Replacement” sources can be used directly for the
660/690 V - - - - - - power supply. If not, an isolation transformer must be used.

G-7
 Integrate in special applications - Source-changeover systems www.schneider-electric.com

BA controller

The BA controller is used to create simple source-changeover systems that switch from one source to another
depending on the presence of voltage Un on the “Normal” source.
It is generally used to manage two permanent sources and can control Compact NS, Compact NSX and Masterpact
MTZ circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors.

Operating modes
DB403841.eps

A four-position switch can be used to select:

bb automatic operation
bb forced operation on the “Normal” source
bb forced operation on the “Replacement” source
bb stop (both “Normal” and “Replacement” sources off)

Setting the time delays

Time delays are set on the front of the controller.
t1. delay between detection that the “Normal” source has failed and the transmission
of the order to open the “Normal” source circuit breaker (adjustable from 0.1 to
30 seconds).
t2. delay between detection that the “Normal” source has returned and the
transmission of the order to open the “Replacement” source circuit breaker
(adjustable from 0.1 to 240 seconds).

Circuit breaker commands and status indications

The status of the circuit breakers is indicated on the front of the controller.
bb ON, OFF, fault.
A built-in terminal block can be used to connect the following input/output signals:
bb inputs:
vv voluntary order to transfer to “Replacement” source (for example, for special
tariffs, etc.)
DB403838.eps

BA Controller
vv additional control contact (not part of the controller). Transfer to the
“Replacement” source takes place only if the contact is closed (for example, used to
test the frequency of Ur, etc.)
bb outputs:
vv indication of operation in automatic or stop mode given by changeover contacts.

Test
G It is possible to test the operation of the BA controller by turning OFF (opening)
the P25M circuit breaker for the “Normal” source and thus simulating a failure of
voltage Un.

Front of the BA controller

G-8
www.schneider-electric.com
Integrate in special applications - Source-changeover systems
UA controller

The UA controller is used to create a source-changeover system integrating the following automatic functions:
b transfer from one source to another depending on the presence of voltage Un on the “Normal” source
b startup of an engine generator set
b shedding and reconnection of non-priority circuits
b transfer to the “Replacement” source if one of the phases on the “Normal” source fails.
The UA controller can control Compact NS, Compact NSX and Masterpact MTZ devices.

Operating modes

DB403842.eps
A four-position switch can be used to select:
bb automatic operation
bb forced operation on the “Normal” source
bb forced operation on the “Replacement” source
bb stop (both “Normal” and “Replacement” sources off, then manual operation)

Setting the time delays

Time delays are set on the front of the controller.
t1. delay between detection that the “Normal” source has failed and the transmission
of the order to open the “Normal” source circuit breaker (adjustable from 0.1
to 30 seconds).
t2. delay between detection that the “Normal” source has returned and the
transmission of the order to open the “Replacement” source circuit breaker
(adjustable from 0.1 to 240 seconds).
t3. delay following opening of Qn with load shedding and before closing of Qr
(adjustable from 0.5 to 30 seconds).
t4. delay following opening of Qr with load reconnection and before closing of Qn
(adjustable from 0.5 to 30 seconds).
t5. delay for confirmation that UN is present before shutting down the engine
generator set (adjustable from 60 to 600 seconds).
t6. delay before startup of the engine generator set (120 or 180 seconds).

DB403837.eps
Commands and indications
UA Controller

Circuit breaker status indications on the front of the controller:

bb ON, OFF, fault.
A built-in terminal block can be used to connect the following input/output signals:
bb inputs:
vv voluntary order to transfer to “Replacement” source (for example, for special
tariffs, etc.)
vv additional control contact (not part of the controller). Transfer to the “Replacement”
source takes place only if the contact is closed (for example, used to test the
frequency of Ur, etc.)
G
bb outputs:
vv control of an engine generator set (ON / OFF)
vv shedding of non-priority circuits
vv indication of operation in automatic mode given by changeover contacts.
Front of the UA controller
Distribution-system settings
Three switches are used to:
bb select the type of “Normal” source, whether single-phase or three-phase
(for example, 240 V single-phase or 240 V three-phase)
bb select whether to remain on the “Normal” source if the “Replacement” source is
not operational during operation on special tariffs
bb select the maximum permissible startup time for the engine generator set during
operation on special tariffs (120 or 180 seconds).

Test
A pushbutton on the front of the controller can be used to test the transfer from the
“Normal” source to the “Replacement” source, then to test the return to the “Normal”
source. The test lasts approximately three minutes.

G-9
 www.schneider-electric.com

H
www.schneider-electric.com

Services

Services overview....................................................................H-2
Associated services ...............................................................H-3
Life cycle services ..................................................................H-4
Digital services..........................................................................H-7

Other chapters
Select your circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors.............................. A-1
Select your Micrologic X control unit........................................................... B-1
Customize your Micrologic X with digital modules......................................C-1
Customize your circuit breaker with accessories........................................D-1
Integrate in Smart panels - Architecture and systems................................ E-1
Integrate in switchboard............................................................................. F-1
Integrate in special applications - Source-changeover systems.................G-1
Order your circuit breaker............................................................................ I-1

H-1
 Services www.schneider-electric.com

Services overview

The ultimate in life cycle support for all your installations

Electrical distribution equipment lies at the heart of the industry business, powering the machines and key processes.
Circuit breakers with associated protection relays and trip units are vital to help ensure the safety of people and
security of assets. When they fail unexpectedly, the risk of dramatic situations arises.
Implementing an effective services strategy for your electrical distribution installation is therefore crucial for your
business. Schneider Electric helps you to:
b Reduce unscheduled downtimes
b Improve reliability
b Increase your equipment lifetime.
Experienced engineers and qualified field service representatives are committed to provide you with innovative
solutions, best-in-class customer service, and advanced technical support.
Schneider Electric Field Services helps you manage your Electrical Distribution equipment throughout its life cycle.

Life Cycle Services

Plan
What are my options? Get peace of mind thanks to
Masterpact MTZ associated services
Install
How do I install and commission? when purchasing your circuit breaker
> On site assistance to commissioning & start up
Operate > 3/5 years warranty period
How do I operate and maintain?
> E-learning program
Optimize
How do I optimize?

Renew
How do I renew my solution?

Secure your process with Schneider

Electric Life Cycle services
> Corrective maintenance
H > Preventive maintenance
> On site condition maintenance
> ECOFIT™ modernization

Manage & maintain your installation using

digital services: permanent data
monitoring of your equipment
> Condition-based maintenance
> Asset management
> Energy Efficiency & Power Quality

H-2
www.schneider-electric.com
Services
Associated services

IMG_7962.eps
Peace of mind thanks to associated services
Assistance to commissionning and start up
Schneider Electric assistance and supervision of Commissioning and start-up allows
you to secure and optimize the first phase of the life cycle of your electrical
installation. The proposed services are performed by experts and highly skilled
personnel who apply manufacturer procedures for:
bb check of product commissioning in accordance with manufacturer procedures
bb validation of mechanical functions before operation
bb setting of protection functions based on data provided by end user
bb start-up assistance and testing
bb Schneider Electric compliance certificate.

3/5 years warranty period

With the Schneider Electric 3/5 years warranty period, you can be certain that in the
case of an unexpected event, your product will be repaired or replaced quickly,
minimizing downtime. 
Two options are offered to meet your business requirements and criticality of your
installation:
bb 3-year warranty period
bb 5-year warranty period including one visit for on site condition maintenance
in the fifth year.
The Schneider Electric warranty includes: Service level

DB419913.ai
bb product replacement or repair
bb on-site labor costs and travel costs for product exchange or repair, according to
Schneider Electric commercial conditions. Customized warranty
The warranty is applicable when the product is installed and operated following
Schneider Electric product recommendations.

Standard
e-Learning program: warranty
Get ready to operate & maintain your Masterpact MTZ!
Learn how to make the most of your Masterpact MTZ! Manufacturing 18 months 3 years 5 years
Content:
bb friendly format synthesizing how to commission, operate and maintain your
Masterpact MTZ.
bb trainee gets the key to understand the potential of Masterpact MTZ as digital
services enabler.
bb Schneider Electric delivers a completion certificate at the end of the quiz.
bb training manuals are provided as well, with recommended maintenance
procedures.

H-3
 Services www.schneider-electric.com

Life cycle services

Achieve the highest performance with Schneider Electric maintenance services throughout the life cycle of your
equipment.
Schneider Electric helps you to:
b Reduce unscheduled downtime by maintaining your installation in the right operating conditions
b Maximize lifetime of your equipment
b Increase operation efficiency with a high level of safety.

Schneider Electric offers four levels of maintenance:

bb Corrective maintenance
bb Preventive maintenance
bb On site condition maintenance (including Schneider Electric diagnostics solutions)
bb Condition-based maintenance with permanent equipment monitoring

DB421180.ai
Maintenance
efficiency Adaptive and when needed condition-based Maintenance
Adopt the right maintenance Permanent equipment monitoring.
strategy according to Maintenance based on expertise and asset usage profile
equipment criticality On site Condition Maintenance
Preventive solutions
Manufacturer on site diagnosis
with ProDiag solutions

Preventive Maintenance
Periodic maintenance based on
time or cycled intervals
Corrective Maintenance
Run to failure and then repair
Emegency-based

Equipment Criticality
Lower Total Cost of
Ownership (TCO) using
the appropriate maintenance Corrective maintenance
The corrective maintenance is based on on-site interventions to repair or replace inoperable devices and
restore the equipment with expected level of performance.

Recommended spare parts kit

Schneider Electric Services supply original spare parts for your Masterpact MTZ.
Recommended spare parts kits:
bb Commissioning
bb 3-year operation
Functions Recommended for Recommended for
H Closing voltage release
Commissioning 3 years of operation

Opening voltage release

Auxiliary contacts ON / OFF
Fault indication
Connected / Disc. / Test
Ready to close
Motorization Gear motor
Terminal block
Micrologic cover
Escutcheon transparent cover
Auxiliary terminals Terminal block
Jumpers

Preventive maintenance
The preventive maintenance is conducted during a scheduled outage as per time intervals/cycles of use in
accordance with equipment manufacturer recommendations:
bb visual inspections and checking
bb de-dusting, cleaning and mechanisms greasing
bb opening, closing, and mechanism operation
bb Parts checking and replacement when needed
 
H-4
www.schneider-electric.com
Services
Life cycle services

Advanced diagnosis solutions for optimised performance with ProDiag

To provide maximum care for your electrical distribution equipment, preventive maintenance should be supported by
on-site condition maintenance. Regular on site diagnosis enables to identify symptoms of an undetected malfunction
or degradation in an installation before a fault happens. The performance of the equipment is therefore maintained at
its optimum level.

On site condition maintenance

On site condition maintenance is the association of preventive maintenance with
ProDiag solutions tools developed by Schneider Electric.

Condition-based maintenance (CBM)

Condition-based maintenance is based on permanent monitoring of equipment data
in order to define the best suitable timeframe to perform the maintenance. User get
benefits from maintenance algorithms and rules to decide and act on the right asset,
at the right time.

Diagnostic services offer

Schneider Electric proposes diagnosis solutions dedicated to circuit breakers
and trip units:
bb ProDiag Trip Unit
bb ProDiag Breaker
bb ProDiag Clusters

ProDiag Trip Unit

The ProDiag Trip Unit diagnoses trip unit malfunctions in order to prevent the risk of
the circuit breaker not opening that could cause potential damage to the equipment.

bb How: Checking tripping curves, trip unit parameters and settings by secondary
injections; the goal is to determine whether recorded measurements are within the
acceptable range.
bb Method: comparison of measurements with the manufacturer expected
performance
bb Job type: Intrusive with shutdown.

ProDiag Breaker
TheProdiag Breaker detects circuit breaker malfunctions in order to prevent the risk
of the circuit breaker not opening that could cause potential damage to the
equipment

bb How: detection of possible drifts of mechanism performance.

H
bb Method: comparison of measurements with the manufacturer expected
performance.
bb Job type: intrusive with shutdown.
ProDiag Trip Unit - Isc
ProDiag Clusters
Detect possible connection culster dysfunction not detected during the traditional
preventive maintenance, and resulting from an accelerated aging process caused
by: withdrawal operations, severe environmental conditions, electrical stress, harsh
exploitation, or uneven maintenance.

bb How: crafted visual inspection of connection clusters surface condition,

and its mechanical contact pressure.
bb Method: measure with a proprietary contact pressure meter.
The values are compared with original equipment specifications.
bb Job type: intrusive with shutdown.

ProDiag Breaker data analysis

H-5
 Services www.schneider-electric.com

Life cycle services

Plan for the future of your electrical distribution

2S7C4428.eps

installation with Advantage Service Plans

bb Advantage Service Plans are comprehensive service packages designed to
provide customized best-in-class services at a contractual cost effective price
bb Advantage Service plan is a recurring offer for a duration of one to several years
with an option for renewal
bb Any plan can be customized by adding options or upgrades
bb All plans include preventive maintenance to increase uptime by detecting
problems before they occur
bb Advantage Service Plans allow to select the best and appropriate services
according to customer needs and constraints:
vv Budget
vv Criticality of the installation
vv Safety
vv Electrical archtecture complexity
vv Power interruptions risk prevention

bb Advantage Service Plans provide the following benefits:

vv Manufacturer commitment
vv Total cost of ownership reduction
vv Extended equipment lifetime
vv Optimal performance of the installation
vv On site interventions
vv Remote technical support

Advantage Service Plans

Advantage Advantage Advantage
Plus Prime Ultra
Preventive maintenance
On site condition SLA [1] reactivity
maintenance ProDiag
Corrective Technical support
maintenance Emergency on-site
intervention
Cost of parts Preferred Preferred
rates rates
Labor & travel costs Preferred
rates
Additional Time based
Optional Optional Optional
services maintenance
Data web-access Optional Optional Optional
H [1] Service Level Agreement

Electrical distribution equipment modernization

ECOFIT™ Masterpact Plug&Play
with ECOFIT™ Masterpact MTZ
Schneider Electric helps you to upgrade your equipment and your installation.
ECOFIT™ Masterkit and Plug&Play MTZ solution enables you to:
DB421314.ai

CT1
CT2 914
924 912
CT3 922 911
OF1 934 921
14 932
OF2 12 931
OF3 24 11
34 22
OF4 32 21
44 31
OF11 42
114 41
OF12 112
124 111
OF13 122
134 121
OF14 132
144

bb extend the life time of the electrical switchboard;

OF24 142 131
214 141
OF22 212
224 211
OF23 222
234 221
OF24 232
244 231
242
241
MCH
B2
PF B3
XF 254 B1
A2 252
MX1 A3 251
C2 A1
MN/MX2 C3
D2/C12
/C13 C1
D1/C11
CE1
CE2 314
324 312
CE3 322 311
334 321
SDE1
84 332
MC2 82 331
UC3 484 81
-VN- 474
UC4 471
V3
SDE2/Res V2
UC2 184/K2 - V1
M3/T1
T5 182/
UC1M1 M2 AF3
T2 181/K1
AF2
COM - T6Z3 Z4 AF1
- - Z2
- Z1
F1-
CD1 F2+
CD2 814
824 812
CD3 822 811
834 821
832

bb give a boost to the electrical switchboard for efficient operation and energy
831

PF MCH
management with the new Micrologic X
bb optimize your maintenance service costs and limit your investments
MN MX1 XF
MX2

SDE1
MC2
SDE2 UC4
UC3
UC2 /Res
UC1
COM

UC3
MC2
SDE1
MN MX1 XF
MX2
PF MCH

bb increase the safety of your personnel and surrounding equipment by using the
latest technology
SDE2 UC4
UC2 /Res
UC1
COM ct
Masterpa
HA10 12kV
NW40 Uimp
Ui 1250V
Ue 1150V 690/1000V
Ue 50kA/1s
peak
Icw 105kA
Icm 50/60Hz
AS NEMA
60947-2CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE 55°C
UTE
Ie
Ith 4000A Ue
(A)
(V)
4000
1000
AC23A 50/60Hz

bb maintain compliance with evolving industry standards and legislation.

60947-3CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE
UTE

PF MCH
MN MX1 XF
MX2

MC2 SDE1
SDE2 UC4
UC3
UC2 /Res
UC1
COM ct
Masterpa
HA10 12kV
NW40 Uimp
Ui 1250V

bb benefit 3-years warranty including parts, on-site labor costs and travel costs
Ue 1150V 690/1000V
Ue 50kA/1s
peak
Icw 105kA
Aux
Power VPS Icm 50/60Hz
AS NEMA
60947-2CEI UNE
IEC BS

Masterpact M
VDE 55°C
UTE
Ie
Ith 4000A Ue
(A)
(V)
4000
A 1000
In 1000 AC23A 50/60Hz
60947-3CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE
UTE

PF MCH
MN MX1 XF
MX2

according to Schneider Electric commercial conditions

SDE1
MC2
SDE2 UC4
UC3

chassis
UC2 /Res
Reset
Test

UC1
COM ct
Masterpa
HA10 12kV
NW40 Uimp
Ui 1250V
Ue 1150V 690/1000V
Ue 50kA/1s
peak
Icw 105kA
Aux
Power VPS Icm 50/60Hz
AS NEMA
60947-2CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE 55°C
UTE
Ie
Ith 4000A Ue
(A)

bb Upgrade your equipment with limitation of power interruption time.

(V)
4000
A 1000
In 1000 AC23A 50/60Hz
60947-3CEI UNE
IEC BS
VDE
UTE

Masterpact Test
Reset

MTZ1
Aux
Power VPS

A
In 1000

Aux
Power
Test
Reset

VPS
ECOFIT™ Masterpact Plug&Play
A simple solution, easy to implement.
A
In 1000

Masterpact M It allows you to upgrade your equipment by substituting an existing Masterpact M

for a Masterpact MTZ of the last generation. The Masterpact MTZ is inserted in the
existing Masterpact M chassis.

H-6
www.schneider-electric.com
Services
Digital services

1090017_cmyk.jpg
Protect your electrical installation, reducing unscheduled downtime and optimizing
maintenance operations using Schneider Electric digital services.
Through remote data monitoring of equipment, Schneider Electric digital services
proactively identify and address events inside equipment with advanced analysis
and manufacturer expertise.

EcoStruxure™ Asset Advisor Services

Schneider Electric’s next-generation connected service offer, EcoStruxure Asset
Advisor™, allows you to benefit from an innovative approach to mitigate risk of
failure and optimize maintenance for your most critical electrical equipment.
It embeds Asset Performance Management, from alarm management up to Asset
condition monitoring.
With EcoStruxure™ Asset Advisor Services you leverage the possibilities of IoT
(Internet of Things) and digitization:
bb to permanently monitor most critical Electrical Distribution equipment
bb through remote technical support by dedicated Service Advisors
bb by anticipating next on-site interventions through alarm prioritization
and actionable work orders.
…and you benefit by:
bb prioritizing capital expenditure

DB421458.ai
bb optimizing operational expenditure
bb securing human capital and Safety
bb benefiting from Schneider Electric technician expertise, on site.
Based on actual asset condition, Schneider Electric’s EcoStruxure Asset Advisor™
enables you to leverage the potential of your entire electrical distribution system
through actionable manufacturer insights and proactive on site operations.
EcoStruxure™ Asset Advisor Services is the winning combination to meet your
demands in asset performance management by combining our best-of-breed Gateway
technological platform, based on internet of things architecture and embedded
analytics applied to maintenance domain, with proven Schneider Electric expertise
in electrical equipment.

Energy Efficiency & Power Quality Management

Also part of digital services, Energy Efficiency & Power Quality Management
Services optimize energy costs, asset utilization and facility operations.
Masterpact MTZ embeds specific measurements in order to support Services
features as:
bb detection of abnormal consumptions and parameters
bb event management and performance follow-up
bb expert analyses and recommendations through monthly reporting
bb benchmarking when multiple sites are managed H
With Schneider Electric's expertise, you get practical data and recommendations
through periodic reporting that empowers you to take the right actions.
PB119129.eps
Energy management.jpg

H-7
 Services www.schneider-electric.com

Digital services

Have a first digital experience with EcoStruxure™ Facility Expert and improve the efficiency
on your maintenance operations
Access automatically your Masterpact MTZ standard maintenance recommendations (normal operating conditions)
by flashing the QR code. Find the QR codes on your products or on the catalogue product data sheet.
Flash with EcoStruxure™ Facility Expert app.

EcoStruxure™ Facility Expert the digital

maintenance tool
EcoStruxure™ Facility Expert is a digital maintenance log book that can be accessed
from any smartphone, tablet, or computer and that facilitates the maintenance
activities on Masterpact MTZ. This 100% collaborative, connected system keeps
maintenance technicians in the field in constant contact with their maintenance
community: manager, customer, contractors and peers for fast and effective
interventions.

Accessible by anyone, anywhere, anytime

bb EcoStruxure™ Facility Expert works on 3G, 4G and Wi-Fi networks and can also
be used offline.
bb Simply download the application to your smartphone or tablet, set up
an account, and start the tools.

The right information fast

bb Overall view of equipment (status, tasks, weekly reminders)
bb Full maintenance logs (breakdowns, maintenance reports)
bb Fast access to equipment maintenance history logs via QR code on the equipment
bb Rich maintenance reports including voice memos, notes, photos and
measurements
bb Easy access to your Masterpact MTZ maintenance plan or maintenance schedule

Monitor equipment remotely and in real time

bb Quickly add a new piece of equipment
bb Access periodic reading measurements, recent malfunctions, etc...
bb Locate equipment with a GPS in real time
bb Get a reminder when you need to perform a maintenance action

Manage your maintenance teams and interventions effectively

To download the free version bb Real-time work order sharing and reporting with selected users.
bb Get inspection reports by mail and share them in just two clicks.
of EcoStruxure™ Facility bb Monitor all regular operations such as scheduling and incomplete or upcoming
Expert: tasks.

H > On Apple store: > On GooglePlay:

Access to a demo of
EcoStruxure™ Facility Expert:

H-8
www.schneider-electric.com

Order your circuit breaker

Digital tools
Order your Masterpact MTZ through digital tools
MyPact................................................................................................I-2
Masterpact MTZ Product Code.........................................................I-4
GoDigital.............................................................................................I-5

Other chapters
Select your circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors.............................. A-1
Select your Micrologic X control unit........................................................... B-1
Customize your Micrologic X with digital modules......................................C-1
Customize your circuit breaker with accessories........................................D-1
Integrate in Smart panels - Architecture and systems................................ E-1
Integrate in switchboard............................................................................. F-1
Integrate in special applications - Source-changeover systems.................G-1
Services......................................................................................................H-1

I-1
 Order your breaker www.schneider-electric.com

Order your Masterpact MTZ through digital tools

MyPact

To simplify and expedite the ordering of Masterpact MTZ, three new tools are introduced:
b MyPact: An online software tool to help create and save the configuration of LV Circuit breaker.
It ensures quick configuration and ordering.
b Product Code: An alphanumeric code representing the configuration of a Masterpact MTZ circuit breaker.
It simplifies the way to communicate the configuration of a Masterpact MTZ circuit breaker during ordering,
sharing information and asking for help remotely.
b GoDigital: An online market place to purchase Digital Modules 24/7. It allows upgrading of Masterpact MTZ
at anytime anywhere.

MyPact > Go to MyPact

MyPact aims at providing a fast, secure and smart way of selecting and configuring
LV Circuit Breaker ranges. It includes the selection of the basic frame, control unit,
accessories and Digital Modules. Compared with the traditional way of filling up
order forms or specifying customer functions, it brings the following benefits:
bb state-of-the-art ergonomic, intuitive and interactive interface eases and speeds up
the configuration
bb configuration rules are embedded, compatible options are automatically filtered
and completeness of the configuration is checked. It ensures the correct
configuration and saves time fixing mistakes.
bb configurations can be saved either locally or through cloud service. Repeated
configuration or modified configuration can be done in a fraction of the time.

Yesterday, Today,
Ordering process of Masterpact NT/NW, Ordering process of Masterpact MTZ with MyPact
new or repeat or modified configuration new configuration repeat or modified configuration

Select base unit, accessories

Select base unit, accessories Open existing configuration [1]
and digital modules

Save configuration
Send preorder Fine-tuning
and place order

Technical validation Save configuration

by Schneider Electric and place order

I fine-tuning
[1] E
 xisting configuration can be opened
directly in the saved configurations or
by entering the Product Code.

Customer validation

Place order

I-2
www.schneider-electric.com
Order your breaker
Order your Masterpact MTZ through digital tools
MyPact

Homepage

Configuration page

Note:
b All configurations are encouraged to be done in MyPact. If you have difficulties accessing or using MyPact, contact
Schneider Electric Customer Care Centre or your Schneider Electric sales representatives for more information about MTZ
ordering.
b An overview of how to use MyPact can be accessed through MyPact portal to help first time users quickly be autonomous.

I-3
 Order your breaker www.schneider-electric.com

Order your Masterpact MTZ through digital tools

Masterpact MTZ Product Code

Masterpact MTZ Product Code is an alphanumeric code representing the complete configuration of a Masterpact MTZ circuit breaker. It will be
automatically generated for each Masterpact MTZ circuit breaker after completing the configuration through MyPact. It will appear in the invoice
and delivery documents as well as the labelling on the Masterpact MTZ circuit breaker and the packaging.
Masterpact MTZ Product Code brings the following benefits:
bb Quick and unique identification of the initial configuration of a circuit breaker can be achieved by reading the code on the physical products or
other recordings
bb Reordering of the same Masterpact MTZ circuit breaker is simplified by communicating configuration through product code
bb Recording or sharing information about the initial configuration of a circuit breaker is simplified
 etails of the coding rules can be accessed through MyPact portal and here are some of the highlights:
D
bb All options of accessories are coded.
bb The minimum length of the code is 9 characters and the maximum length of the code is 33* characters depending on the choice
of the accessories.
bb Capital letters, numbers and start sign [1] are used.
[1] The maximum length of the code may change due to future enrichment of the offer.

An example of Masterpact MTZ product code

bb Masterpact type: MTZ2 bb Type of installation: Drawout with chassis
bb Rating: 1000A bb Connection: Top Horizontal Bottom Horizontal
bb Sensor rating: 800A bb Type of communication: ULP + EIFE without I/O module
bb Performance Level: H1 bb Accessories for Design & Installation simplification and operation
bb Micrologic: 5.0 X efficiency: No
bb VPS module: Yes bb Accessories for People and Property Safety: No
bb Number of poles: 4P bb Digital Modules: Energy per phase
> Product Code: WADFEEADN**A

Yesterday When you want Today

to share information
with your colleagues
or Schneider Electric
CCC

Calling CCC and try to explain Sending a text message

all the customer functions through CCC app with the product code

Yesterday When you want Today

to know the
configuration of
a circuit breaker

I Engaging Schneider Electric

Field Service to conduct an analysis
Checking the product code
on the physical products

Yesterday When you want Today

to reorder
a circuit breaker

Fill up order form or calling Type in the product code

Schneider Electric CCC through MyPact and send order

I-4
www.schneider-electric.com
Order your breaker
Order your Masterpact MTZ through digital tools
GoDigital

> Go to GoDigital GoDigital is the Schneider Electric market place that allows you to purchase Digital
Modules for Masterpact MTZ control unit Micrologic X that is already installed in the
Masterpact MTZ. It provides different Digital Modules to customize your control unit
with optional protection, measurement and Maintenance & diagnostics
functionalities. It is open 24/7. With GoDigital, Panel Builders have the flexibility to
further customize the Micrologic X features at last minute before commissioning the
switchboard. Electrical contractors and facility managers can upgrade the install
base during operational phase of product life cycle, according to new requirements,
anytime, without changing the hardware or disrupting operations.*
Note: Changing the protection functions among LI (Micrologic 2.0 X), LSI (Micrologic 5.0 X),
LSIG (Micrologic 6.0 X) and LSIV (Micrologic 7.0 X) requires changing the Micrologic X.

Each Digital Module purchased is delivered with a software license for a unique
Micrologic X control unit and can only be installed on that particular Micrologic X.
Therefore, the Micrologic X control unit serial number needs to be preregistered in
the GoDigital platform for the first time purchase.
For the first purchase for a particular Micorlogic X, three ways are available:

1) Ecoreach
When connected to Micrologic X through either USB connection or IFE/EIFE
connection, Ecoreach can read the unique serial number* and identify the
Micrologic X. It will also show all the available Digital Modules which are compatible
with the Micrologic X firmware version. When clicking “Buy”, it will direct the user to
GoDigital marketplace PC version with the Micrologic X serial number automatically
registered in it.

2) Masterpact MTZ mobile App

When connected to Micrologic X through either Bluetooth connection or NFC
connection, Masterpact MTZ mobile App will identify the Micrologic X and proposes
available Digital Modules. When clicking “Purchase”, it will direct the user to
GoDigital marketplace mobile version with the Micrologic X serial number
automatically registered in it.

3) GoDigital mobile version I

Flash the QR code on Micrologic X using a mobile phone. Go2SE page will provide
the user direct link to the mobile version of the site GoDigital. User can proceed
directly with the purchasing or save the Micrologic X serial number in the “My assets”
section in the GoDigital for future purchase.
For the second purchase of the same Micrologic X control unit.

4) GoDigital PC version
In the section”My assets”, choose the serial number of the Micrologic X to be
upgraded and purchase the additional Digital Modules.
http://godigital.schneider-electric.com/
Note:
b Please note that GoDigital platform is only used to purchase Digital Modules for Micrologic X
which is already installed.
When ordering a new circuit breaker, Digital Modules are selected in MyPact and installed in
factory before delivered.
b The serial number is also printed on the faceplate of Micrologic X
I-5
Schneider Electric Industries SAS

35, rue Joseph Monier

CS 30323
92506 Rueil Malmaison Cedex
France

RCS Nanterre 954 503 439

Capital social 896 313 776 €
www.schneider-electric.com

12-2017
ART. 116709

© 2018 - Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved.

All trademarks are owned by Schneider Electric Industries SAS or its affiliated companies. This document has been
Document reference: LVPED216026EN printed on recycled paper